Manual de Mantenimiento Y/o Operacion Komatsu PC130

TEN00593-07
HYDRAULIC PC130 -8
EXCAVATOR
SERIAL NUMBERS 84177 and up
WARNING
Unsafe use of this machine may cause serious injury or
death. Operators and maintenance personnel must read
this manual before operating or maintaining this machine.
This manual should be kept near the machine for
reference and periodically reviewed by all personnel who
will come into contact with it.
NOTICE
Komatsu has Operation & Maintenance Manuals
written in some other languages. If a foreign language
manual is necessary, contact your local distributor for
availability.
.
1-1
.
READ THIS MANUAL FOREWORD
READ THIS MANUAL

This manual gives details of the operation and methods of inspection and maintenance for this machine that must
be obeyed in order to use the machine safely. Most accidents are caused by the failure to follow fundamental safety
rules for the operation and maintenance of machines.
Read, understand and follow all precautions and warnings in this manual and on the machine before performing
operation and maintenance. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.
Komatsu cannot predict every circumstance that might involve a potential hazard when the machine is used.
Therefore, the safety messages in this manual and on the machine may not include all possible safety precautions.
If you perform any operation, inspection, or maintenance under conditions that are not described in this manual,
understand that it is your responsibility to take the necessary precautions to ensure safety. In no event should you
or others engage in the prohibited uses or actions described in this manual. Improper operation and maintenance
of the machine can be hazardous and could result in serious injury or death.
If you sell the machine, be sure to give this manual to the new owner together with the machine.
Always keep this Operation and Maintenance Manual in the

location shown on the right so that all relevant personnel can read
it at any time.
Storage location for the Operation and Maintenance Manual:

magazine box on the left side of the operator's seat.
If this manual is lost or damaged, contact and tell your distributor about the machine model name and the serial No.
immediately to arrange for its replacement. For details regarding the machine model name and the serial No., see
the machine serial No. plate. In order to arrange the proper Operation and Maintenance Manual, you will need to
provide the machine model name and the serial No. to your Komatsu distributor.
This manual uses the International System of Units (SI) for units of measurement. For reference, units that have
been used in the past are given in { }.
The explanations, values, and illustrations in this manual have been prepared based on the latest information
available as of the date of its publication. Continuing improvements in the design of this machine may lead to
additional changes that are not reflected in this manual. Consult Komatsu or your Komatsu distributor for the latest
available information concerning your machine or with questions regarding information contained in this manual.
The numbers in circles in the illustrations correspond to the numbers in ( ) in the text.
(For example:  → (1))
Komatsu delivers machines that comply with all applicable regulations and standards of the country to which it has
been shipped. If this machine has been purchased in another country, it may lack certain safety devices and
specifications that are necessary for use in your country. If there is any question about whether your product
complies with the applicable standards and regulations of your country, consult Komatsu or your Komatsu
distributor before operating the machine.
1-2
.
FOREWORD SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
To enable you to use the machine safely, and to prevent injury or death to operators, service personnel or
bystanders, the precautions and warnings included in this manual and the safety signs attached to the machine
must always be followed.
To identify important safety messages in the manual and on the machine labels, the following signal words are used.
The "Safety Alert Symbol" identifies important safety messages on machines, in manuals, and elsewhere. When
you see this symbol, be alert to the risk of personal injury or death. Follow the instructions in the safety message.
This signal word indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
This signal word indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
This signal word indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury.
The following signal words are used to alert you to information that must be followed to avoid damage to the
machine.
This precaution is given where the machine may be damaged or the service life reduced if
the precaution is not followed.
This word is used for information that is useful to know.
1-3
.
INTRODUCTION FOREWORD
INTRODUCTION
USE OF MACHINE
This Komatsu machine is designed to be used mainly for the following work:
Digging work
Leveling work
Ditching work
Loading work
Demolition work
See the section "RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS (PAGE 3-171)" for further details.
DIRECTIONS OF MACHINE
(A) Front (E) Operator's seat

(B) Rear (F) Sprocket
(C) Left
(D) Right
In this manual, the terms front, rear, left, and right refer to the travel direction as seen from the operator's seat when
the operator's seat is facing the front and the sprocket is at the rear of the machine.
VISIBILITY FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT

This machine complies with the visibility standard (ISO 5006).
This machine maintains a close visibility of a height of 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in) at a point 1 m (3 ft 3 in) away from the outside
surface of the machine, and a visibility for a circumference of 12 m (39 ft 4 in).
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
This machine is ROPS compliant to ISO12117-2:2008 when a ROPS plate is installed - see "LOCATION OF
SAFETY LABELS (PAGE 2-6)" for location of ROPS plate.
1-4
.
FOREWORD PRODUCT INFORMATION
PRODUCT INFORMATION
When requesting service or ordering replacement parts, contact your Komatsu distributor of the following items.
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)/MACHINE SERIAL NO. PLATE

On the bottom right of the operator's cab
The design of the nameplate differs according to the territory.
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER PLATE

On the top of the engine cylinder head cover.
1-5
.
PRODUCT INFORMATION FOREWORD
SERVICE METER LOCATION

On top of the machine monitor
YOUR MACHINE SERIAL NUMBERS AND DISTRIBUTOR

Machine serial No.
Engine serial No.
Product identification number (PIN)
Distributor name
Address
Service Personnel
Phone/Fax
1-6
.
FOREWORD CONTENTS
CONTENTS
FOREWORD 1- 1
READ THIS MANUAL 1- 2
SAFETY INFORMATION 1- 3
INTRODUCTION 1- 4
USE OF MACHINE 1- 4
DIRECTIONS OF MACHINE 1- 4
VISIBILITY FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT 1- 4
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE 1- 4
PRODUCT INFORMATION 1- 5
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)/MACHINE SERIAL NO. PLATE 1- 5
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER PLATE 1- 5
SERVICE METER LOCATION 1- 6
YOUR MACHINE SERIAL NUMBERS AND DISTRIBUTOR 1- 6
SAFETY 2- 1
SAFETY 2- 2
SAFETY LABELS 2- 5
LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS 2- 6
SAFETY LABELS 2- 7
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 14
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION 2- 14
PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION 2- 14
FIRE PREVENTION 2- 16
PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF MACHINE 2- 17
DO NOT GET CAUGHT IN WORK EQUIPMENT 2- 19
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES 2- 19
PROTECTION AGAINST FALLING, FLYING, INTRUDING OBJECTS 2- 20
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION 2- 20
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS 2- 20
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO CAB GLASS 2- 20
PRECAUTIONS WHEN RUNNING ENGINE INSIDE BUILDING 2- 21
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 2- 22
PRECAUTIONS FOR JOBSITE 2- 22
STARTING ENGINE 2- 24
OPERATION 2- 26
TRANSPORTATION 2- 34
TOWING 2- 35
LIFTING OBJECTS WITH BUCKET 2- 36
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 37
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 37
PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 41
OPERATION 3- 1
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS 3- 2
OVERALL MACHINE VIEW 3- 2
CONTROLS AND GAUGES 3- 3
DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES 3- 5
MONITORING SYSTEM 3- 5
SWITCHES 3- 70
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS 3- 75
SUN ROOF 3- 79
1-7
.
CONTENTS FOREWORD
WINDSHIELD 3- 80
EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER 3- 86
DOOR LOCK 3- 86
CAP WITH LOCK 3- 87
DRINK BOX 3- 88
MAGAZINE BOX 3- 88
ASHTRAY 3- 88
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS 3- 89
RADIO 3-102
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC POWER 3-111
FUSE 3-112
SLOW BLOW FUSE 3-113
CONTROLLER 3-113
TOOL BOX 3-113
GREASE PUMP HOLDER 3-113
FIRE EXTINGUISHER 3-114
MACHINE OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS 3-115
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 3-115
STARTING ENGINE 3-134
AFTER STARTING ENGINE 3-139
STOPPING THE ENGINE 3-151
MACHINE OPERATION 3-152
STEERING THE MACHINE 3-156
SWINGING 3-158
WORK EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND OPERATIONS 3-159
WORKING MODE 3-161
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS 3-163
GENERAL OPERATION INFORMATION 3-166
TRAVELING ON SLOPES 3-168
ESCAPE FROM MUD 3-170
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS 3-171
BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION 3-173
PARKING MACHINE 3-176
MACHINE INSPECTION AFTER DAILY WORK 3-177
LOCKING 3-178
ROAD LINERS 3-179
TRANSPORTATION 3-181
TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE 3-181
LOADING AND UNLOADING WITH TRAILER 3-182
LIFTING MACHINE 3-191
COLD WEATHER OPERATION 3-195
COLD WEATHER OPERATION INFORMATION 3-195
AFTER DAILY WORK COMPLETION 3-197
AFTER COLD WEATHER SEASON 3-197
LONG TERM STORAGE 3-198
BEFORE STORAGE 3-198
DURING STORAGE 3-198
AFTER STORAGE 3-199
STARTING MACHINE AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE 3-199
TROUBLES AND ACTIONS 3-200
1-8
.
FOREWORD CONTENTS
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL 3-200

PHENOMENA THAT ARE NOT FAILURES 3-200
TOWING THE MACHINE 3-201
LIGHTWEIGHT TOWING HOLE 3-202
SEVERE JOB CONDITION 3-202
DISCHARGED BATTERY 3-203
OTHER TROUBLE 3-207
MAINTENANCE 4- 1
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 4- 2
OUTLINE OF SERVICE 4- 5
HANDLING OIL, FUEL, COOLANT, AND PERFORMING OIL CLINIC 4- 5
BATTERY TERMINAL 4- 10
ELECTRIC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 4- 11
WEAR PARTS 4- 12
WEAR PARTS LIST 4- 12
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT 4- 13
USE OF FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 4- 14
RECOMMENDED BRANDS, RECOMMENDED QUALITY FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN
KOMATSU GENUINE OIL 4- 16
TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 4- 17
TIGHTENING TORQUE LIST 4- 17
DEFINED LIFE PARTS 4- 18
DEFINED LIFE PARTS LIST 4- 18
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 4- 19
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART 4- 19
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR HYDRAULIC BREAKER 4- 21
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4- 22
WHEN REQUIRED 4- 22
CHECK BEFORE STARTING 4- 50
EVERY 100 HOURS MAINTENANCE 4- 51
SPECIFICATIONS 5- 1
SPECIFICATIONS 5- 2
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS 6- 1
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS - GENERAL INFORMATION 6- 2
SAFETY FIRST 6- 2
ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION 6- 3
BUCKET WITH HOOK 6- 4
HOOK CONDITION 6- 4
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS 6- 4
MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT 6- 5
LOCATIONS 6- 5
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT 6- 14
ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 6- 15
1-9
.
CONTENTS FOREWORD
ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS 6- 19
LONG TERM STORAGE 6- 26
SPECIFICATIONS 6- 26
ATTACHMENT GUIDE 6- 27
ATTACHMENT COMBINATIONS 6- 28
TRACK SHOES SELECTION 6- 29
SAFETY DEVICE 6- 30
HANDLING OF RUBBER PAD SHOE AND ROAD LINER 6- 31
RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS 6- 33
HYDRAULIC BREAKER 6- 33
KOMTRAX 6- 38
POWER SUPPLY FOR KOMTRAX 6- 38
INDEX 7- 1
1 - 10
.
2-1
.
SAFETY SAFETY
SAFETY
SAFETY LABELS 2- 5
LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS 2- 6
SAFETY LABELS 2- 7
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 14

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION 2- 14
ENSURING SAFE OPERATION 2- 14
UNDERSTANDING THE MACHINE 2- 14
PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION 2- 14
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SAFETY-RELATED EQUIPMENT 2- 14
INSPECTING MACHINE 2- 14
WEAR WELL-FITTING CLOTHES AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 2- 14
KEEP MACHINE CLEAN 2- 15
PRECAUTIONS INSIDE OPERATOR'S COMPARTMENT 2- 15
PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT 2- 15
IF ANY PROBLEM IS FOUND 2- 15
FIRE PREVENTION 2- 16
ACTION IF FIRE OCCURS 2- 16
PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT FIRE 2- 16
PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF MACHINE 2- 17
USE HANDRAILS AND STEPS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF MACHINE 2- 17
NO JUMPING ON OR OFF MACHINE 2- 18
NO PEOPLE ON ATTACHMENTS 2- 18
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STANDING UP FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT 2- 18
PRECAUTIONS WHEN LEAVING MACHINE 2- 18
EMERGENCY EXIT FROM OPERATOR'S CAB 2- 19
DO NOT GET CAUGHT IN WORK EQUIPMENT 2- 19
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES 2- 19
PROTECTION AGAINST FALLING, FLYING, INTRUDING OBJECTS 2- 20
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION 2- 20
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS 2- 20
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO CAB GLASS 2- 20
PRECAUTIONS WHEN RUNNING ENGINE INSIDE BUILDING 2- 21
2-2
.
SAFETY SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 2- 22

PRECAUTIONS FOR JOBSITE 2- 22
INVESTIGATE AND CONFIRM JOBSITE CONDITIONS 2- 22
WORKING ON LOOSE GROUND 2- 22
DO NOT GO CLOSE TO HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES 2- 23
ENSURE GOOD VISIBILITY 2- 23
CHECKING SIGNS AND SIGNALMAN'S SIGNALS 2- 23
BEWARE OF ASBESTOS DUST 2- 24
STARTING ENGINE 2- 24
USE WARNING TAGS 2- 24
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 2- 25
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ENGINE 2- 25
PRECAUTIONS IN COLD AREAS 2- 25
STARTING WITH BOOSTER CABLES 2- 26
OPERATION 2- 26
CHECKS BEFORE OPERATION 2- 26
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING IN FORWARD OR REVERSE AND SWINGING 2- 27
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING 2- 28
TRAVELING ON SLOPES 2- 29
OPERATING ON SLOPES 2- 30
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS 2- 30
TRAVELING ON SNOW-COVERED OR FROZEN SURFACES 2- 32
PARKING MACHINE 2- 33
TRANSPORTATION 2- 34
LOADING AND UNLOADING 2- 34
TOWING 2- 35
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TOWING 2- 35
PRECAUTIONS FOR LIFTING OPERATIONS 2- 36
2-3
.
SAFETY SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 37

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 37
DISPLAY WARNING TAG DURING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 37
KEEP WORKPLACE CLEAN AND TIDY 2- 37
SELECT SUITABLE PLACE FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 37
ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL 2- 37
APPOINT LEADER WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS 2- 37
STOP ENGINE BEFORE CARRYING OUT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 38
2 WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING 2- 39
INSTALLING, REMOVING, OR STORING ATTACHMENTS 2- 39
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING AT HIGH PLACES 2- 39
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING UNDER MACHINE OR WORK EQUIPMENT 2- 40
PROPER TOOLS 2- 40
PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 41
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WELDING 2- 41
HANDLING BATTERY 2- 41
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING HAMMER 2- 42
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-TEMPERATURE COOLANT 2- 42
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-TEMPERATURE OIL 2- 42
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE OIL 2- 43
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL 2- 43
HANDLING HIGH-PRESSURE HOSES AND PIPING 2- 43
PRECAUTIONS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE 2- 44
NOISE 2- 44
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE GREASE WHEN ADJUSTING TRACK TENSION 2- 44
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE RECOIL SPRING 2- 45
HANDLING ACCUMULATOR AND GAS SPRING 2- 45
PRECAUTIONS WITH COMPRESSED AIR 2- 45
MAINTENANCE OF AIR CONDITIONER 2- 45
DISPOSING OF WASTE MATERIALS 2- 46
MERCURY CONTAINING COMPONENT(S) 2- 46
METHOD OF SELECTING WINDOW WASHER FLUID 2- 46
PERIODIC INSPECTION OF DEFINED LIFE PARTS 2- 46
2-4
.
SAFETY SAFETY LABELS
SAFETY LABELS
The following warning signs and safety labels are used on this machine.
Be sure that you fully understand the correct position and content of labels.
To ensure that the content of labels can be read properly, be sure that they are in the correct place and always
keep them clean. When cleaning them, do not use organic solvents or gasoline. These may cause the labels to
peel off.
If the labels are damaged, lost, or cannot be read properly, replace them with new ones. For details of the part
numbers for the labels, see this manual or the actual label, and place an order with Komatsu distributor.
There are also other labels in addition to the warning signs and safety labels. Handle those labels in the same
way.
2-5
.
SAFETY LABELS SAFETY
LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS
2-6
.
SAFETY LABELS
(1) Caution before operating or maintaining machine
(09651-03001)
(2) Caution before operating (09802-03000)
(3) Caution for leaving operator's seat (09654-03001)
2-7
.
(4) Caution for going close to electric cables (09801-03001)
(5) Caution for operating pattern (09822-03000)
2-8
.
(6) Caution when opening or closing front window

(09839-03000)
(7) Caution when stowing front window (09803-03000)
(8) Caution for high-temperature hydraulic oil (09653-03001)
(9) Caution with high-temperature coolant (09668-03001)
2-9
.
(10) Caution for handling accumulator and gas spring

(09659-53000)
(11) Caution for adjusting track tension (09657-03003)
(12) Caution for handling cable (203-00-11181)
(13) Stopping rotation for inspection and maintenance

(09667-03001)
2 - 10
.
(14) Emergency escape (09844-00050)
(15) Warning against falling (09805-13000)
(16) Keep off swing area (09133-23000)
(17) Beware of work equipment (09134-A1681)
(18) Caution when handling battery (09664-30013)
2 - 11
.
(19) Prohibited to start by short-circuiting (09842-A0481)
(20) Caution when swinging or traveling in reverse (22B-00-21290)
(21) Caution for blast site (203-00-11440)

(only when equipped with KOMTRAX)
(22)Caution for ROPS (09620-J2000)
2 - 12
.
(23) Caution for handling quick coupler (20J-00-11271)
(24) Overload alarm buzzer (203-00-11221)
2 - 13
.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SAFETY
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE
Mistakes in operation, inspection, or maintenance may result in serious personal injury or death. Before performing
operation, inspection, or maintenance, always read this manual and the safety labels on the machine carefully and
obey the warnings.
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION
ENSURING SAFE OPERATION

Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain the machine.
Follow all safety, precautions, and instructions in this manual when operating or performing inspection or
maintenance on the machine.
If you are not feeling well, or if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication, your ability to safely operate
or repair your machine may be severely impaired, putting yourself and everyone else on your job site in danger.
When working with another operator or with the person on the worksite traffic duty, discuss the content of the
operation beforehand and use the determined signals when performing the operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE MACHINE

Before operating the machine, read this manual thoroughly. If there are any places in this manual that you do not
understand, ask the person in charge of safety to give an explanation.
PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING SAFETY-RELATED EQUIPMENT

Be sure that all guards, covers, cameras, and mirrors are in their proper position. Have them repaired
immediately if they are damaged.
Understand the method of use of safety features and use them properly.
Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good operating condition.
INSPECTING MACHINE
Check the machine before starting operations. If any abnormality is found, do not operate the machine until repairs
of the problem location have been completed.
WEAR WELL-FITTING CLOTHES AND PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Do not wear loose clothes or any accessories. If these catch on
the control levers or protruding parts, there is danger that it may
cause the machine to move unexpectedly.
Always wear a hard hat and safety shoes. If the nature of the
work requires it, wear protective eyeglasses, mask, gloves, ear
plugs, and personal fall-arrest equipment when operating or
maintaining the machine.
If you have long hair and it hangs out from your hard hat, there
is a hazard that it may get caught up in the machine, so tie your
hair up and be careful not to let it get caught.
Check that all protective equipment functions properly before
using it.
2 - 14
.
SAFETY GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
KEEP MACHINE CLEAN

If you get on or off the machine or perform inspection and maintenance when the machine is dirty with mud or oil,
there is a hazard that you will slip and fall. Wipe off any mud or oil from the machine. Always keep the machine
clean.
If water gets into the electrical system, there is a hazard that it
will cause malfunctions or misoperation. If there is any
misoperation, there is danger that the machine may move
unexpectedly and cause serious personal injury or death. When
washing the machine with water or steam, do not allow the water
or steam to come into direct contact with electrical components.
When washing the machine with high-pressure water, direct
spray onto camera may cause trouble. Defective camera cannot
monitor surrounding area. When cleaning camera, do not allow
the high-pressure water to get into camera directly, and wipe off
any dirt with soft cloth.
When cleaning camera, if you stand on an unstable place, or
take an unstable posture, you may fall and be injured. Put proper
stepladder or step on the level and firm ground, and clean the
camera in secure posture.
PRECAUTIONS INSIDE OPERATOR'S COMPARTMENT

When entering the operator's compartment, always remove all mud and oil from the soles of your shoes.
If you operate the pedal with mud or oil affixed to your shoes, your foot may slip and this may cause a serious
accident.
Do not leave tools or a machine parts lying around inside the operator's compartment. If tools or parts get into the
control devices, it may obstruct operation and cause the machine to move unexpectedly, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads act as a lens and may cause fire.
Do not use a cell phone when driving or operating the machine. This may lead to mistakes in operation, which
could cause serious personal injury or death.
Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or explosive items into the operator's compartment.
PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT

Always observe the following to prepare for action if any injury or death or fire should occur.
Be sure that fire extinguishers have been provided and read the
labels to ensure that you know how to use them in emergencies.
Perform periodic inspection and maintenance to ensure that the
fire extinguisher can always be used.
Provide a first aid kit in the storage point. Perform periodic
checks and add to the contents if necessary.
IF ANY PROBLEM IS FOUND

If you find any problems in the machine during operation or maintenance (noise, vibration, smell, incorrect gauges,
smoke, oil leakage, etc., or any abnormal display on the warning devices or machine monitor), report to the person
in charge and have the necessary action taken. Do not operate the machine until the problem has been corrected.
2 - 15
.
FIRE PREVENTION
ACTION IF FIRE OCCURS

Turn the starting switch OFF to stop the engine.
Use the handrails and steps to get off the machine.
Do not jump off the machine. There is the danger of falling and suffering serious injury.
PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT FIRE

Fire caused by fuel, oil, coolant or window washer fluid
Do not bring any open flame close to flammable substances
such as fuel, oil, coolant or window washer fluid. There is danger
that they may catch fire. To prevent fire, always observe the
following:
Do not smoke or use any open flame near fuel or other
flammable substances.
Stop the engine before adding fuel.
Do not leave the machine when adding fuel or oil.
Tighten all fuel and oil caps securely.
Be careful not to spill fuel on overheated surfaces or on parts
of the electrical system.
After adding fuel or oil, wipe up any spilled fuel or oil.
Put greasy rags and other combustible materials into a safe
container to maintain safety at the workplace.
When washing parts with oil, use a non-flammable oil. Do not
use diesel oil or gasoline. There is danger that they may
catch fire.
Do not weld or use a cutting torch to cut any pipes or tubes
that contain flammable liquids.
Determine well-ventilated areas for storing oil and fuel. Keep
the oil and fuel in the determined place and do not allow
unauthorized persons to enter.
When performing grinding or welding work on the machine,
move any flammable materials to a safe place before
starting.
Fire caused by accumulation of flammable material.

Remove any dry leaves, chips, pieces of paper, coal dust, or any other flammable materials accumulated or
affixed around the engine, exhaust manifold, muffler, or battery, or inside the undercovers.
To prevent fires spreading from sparks or burning particles from other fires, remove any flammable materials
such as dry leaves, chips, pieces of paper, coal dust, or any other flammable materials accumulated around
the cooling system (radiator, oil cooler) or inside the undercover.
Fire coming from electric wiring

Short circuits in the electrical system can cause fire. To prevent fire, always observe the following.
Keep all electric wiring connections clean and securely tightened.
Check the wiring every day for looseness or damage. Tighten any loose connectors or wiring clamps. Repair
or replace any damaged wiring.
2 - 16
.
Fire coming from piping

Check that all the hose and tube clamps, guards, and cushions are securely fixed in position.
If they are loose, they may vibrate during operation and rub against other parts. There is danger that this may lead
to damage to the hoses and cause high-pressure oil to spurt out, leading to fire, serious personal injury or death.
Explosion caused by lighting equipment

When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, or coolant, always use lighting with anti-explosion specifications.
When taking the electrical power for the lighting from the machine itself, follow the instructions in this manual.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF MACHINE
USE HANDRAILS AND STEPS WHEN GETTING ON OR OFF MACHINE

To prevent personal injury or death caused by slipping or falling off the machine, always observe the following.
Use the handrails and steps marked by arrows in the figure on
the right when getting on or off the machine.
Always face the machine and maintain at least 3 point contact

(both feet and one hand, or both hands and one foot) with the
handrail and steps to ensure that you support yourself.
Before getting on and off the machine, check the handrails and steps if there is any oil, grease, or mud on them.
Wipe it off immediately not to slip if any. In addition, tighten any loose bolt of the handrails and steps.
If the handrails and steps are damaged or deformed, they need to be repaired immediately. Ask your Komatsu
distributor to perform this work.
Do not grip the control levers or lock lever when getting on or off the machine. When getting on or off the machine,
take care that your body or clothes do not touch the levers.
Never climb on the engine hood or covers where there are no non-slip pads.
2 - 17
.
Do not get on or off the machine while holding tools in your hand.
(if equipped)
The collapsible type side mirror can turn, so do not grab hold of it as a handrail.
NO JUMPING ON OR OFF MACHINE

Never jump on or off the machine. Never get on or off a moving machine.
If the machine starts to move when there is no operator on the machine, do not jump on to the machine and try
to stop it.
NO PEOPLE ON ATTACHMENTS
Never let anyone ride on the work equipment or other attachments. There is a hazard of falling and suffering serious
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STANDING UP FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT

Be sure to lower the work equipment completely to the ground
before standing up from the operator's seat, such as when opening
or closing the front window or ceiling window, when removing or
installing the bottom window, or adjusting the position of the seat.
Operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever (1) to set it to
LOCK position (L) and stop the engine.
If the control levers are touched by mistake, the machine may
suddenly move and cause serious personal injury or death.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN LEAVING MACHINE

If the proper procedures are not taken when parking the machine,
the machine may suddenly move off by itself, and this may lead to
serious personal injury or death. Always observe the following.
When leaving the machine, be sure to make the undercarriage
and upper structure point to the same direction, and lower the
work equipment to the ground. Operate the operating portion (g)
of the lock lever (1) to set it to LOCK position (L) and stop the
engine.
When the operator's seat and console are located in front, your
body or clothes will easily touch the levers. Shift them backward
to keep enough space, and then get off the machine.
Lock all the places and always take the key with you and keep
it in the specified place.
2 - 18
.
EMERGENCY EXIT FROM OPERATOR'S CAB

If it should be impossible to open the door of the cab, break the window glass with the hammer supplied and use
the window as an emergency escape.
For details, see "EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER (PAGE 3-86)" in this volume.
When escaping, remove all the pieces of glass from the window frame first and be careful not to cut yourself on
the glass. Be careful also not to slip on the broken pieces of glass on the ground.
DO NOT GET CAUGHT IN WORK EQUIPMENT

The clearance in the area around the work equipment changes according to the movement of the link. If you get
caught, you may suffer serious personal injury or death. Do not allow anyone to come close to any rotating or
extending/retracting portion.
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES

The operator compartment is equipped with a structure (such as
ROPS, OPG) to protect the operator by absorbing impact energy.
For machines equipped with ROPS (ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE

STRUCTURE):
If the machine weight (mass) exceeds the certified value shown
on ROPS certification plate or if the machine specification is
changed into another specification that is not shown in this
manual, ROPS will not be able to fulfil it's function, which may
result in serious injury or death.
Do not increase the machine weight beyond the certified value by modifying the machine or by installing
additional attachments to the machine and do not change the machine specification to that which is not shown
in this manual. If in any doubt contact your Komatsu distributor.
With any combination of work tool (such as bucket, breaker) that Komatsu refer to in this manual, the overall
weight of the machine does not exceed the certified value of ROPS.
Always observe the following. If the machine is equipped with a protective structure, do not remove the protective
structure and perform operations without it.
If the protective structure is welded, or holes are drilled in it, or it is modified in any other way, its strength may
drop. Any modification is prohibited.
If the protective structure is damaged or deformed by falling objects or by rolling over, its strength will be reduced
and it will not be able to fulfill its function properly. In such cases, always consult your Komatsu distributor.
Even if the protective structure is installed, always fasten your seat belt properly when operating the machine. If
you do not fasten your seat belt properly, it cannot perform its function.
2 - 19
.
PROTECTION AGAINST FALLING, FLYING, INTRUDING OBJECTS

On jobsites where there is a hazard that falling objects, flying
objects, or intruding objects may hit or enter the operator's cab,
consider the operating conditions and install the necessary guards
to protect the operator.
When operating on jobsites, such as mines or quarries, where
there is a hazard of falling rocks, install FOPS and a front guard,
and always keep all the windows and doors closed when
operating. In addition, always check that there is no one except
the operator in the surrounding area. They may be hit by falling
objects or flying objects.
When performing out demolition or breaker operations, install a
front guard and always keep all the windows closed when
operating. In addition, always check that there is no one except
the operator in the surrounding area. They may be hit by falling
objects or flying objects.
If, furthermore, the machine is used for standard operations, it is
also necessary to install additional guards, depending on the
prevailing conditions at the jobsite.
In such a case, do not operate the machine without an additional
guard. Be sure to consult with your Komatsu distributor about
necessary guards.
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
Komatsu will not be responsible for any injuries or death, accidents, product failures or other property damages
resulting from modifications made without authorization from Komatsu.
Any modification made without authorization from Komatsu can create hazards. Before making a modification,
consult your Komatsu distributor.
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS

Any injuries or death, accidents, product failures or other property damages resulting from the use of
unauthorized attachments or parts will not be the responsibility of Komatsu.
When installing optional parts or attachments, there may be problems with safety or legal restrictions. Therefore
consult your Komatsu distributor for advice.
Depending on type of combination of work equipment, there is hazard that the work equipment may hit the cab
or other parts of the machine. During operation, an interference of the work equipment with the machine may
cause a serious personal injury. Before using unfamiliar work equipment, check there is hazard of interference,
and operate within not contact.
When installing and using optional attachments, read the instruction manual for the attachment, and the general
information related to attachments in this manual.
PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO CAB GLASS

If the cab glass is broken during operations, stop operations and repair the cab glass immediately.
If the cab glass on the work equipment side is broken, there is a hazard that the operator may be directly hit or
caught in the work equipment. If the glass is broken, stop operations immediately and replace the glass.
The ceiling window is made of plastic, so if it is scratched, the visibility will become poor and there is danger that
it may break. If it is scratched, replace it with the new part as soon as possible. If the window is scratched and
is not replaced, there is danger that any rocks falling on it will cause it to break, leading to injury to the operator.
2 - 20
.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN RUNNING ENGINE INSIDE BUILDING

The engine exhaust gas contains substances that may damage
your health or even cause death. Start or operate the engine in a
place where there is good ventilation. If the engine or machine
must be operated inside a building or under ground, where the
ventilation is poor, take steps to ensure that the engine exhaust
gas is removed and that ample fresh air is brought in.
2 - 21
.
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS FOR JOBSITE
INVESTIGATE AND CONFIRM JOBSITE CONDITIONS

On the jobsite, there are various hidden dangers that may lead to personal injury or death. Before starting
operations, always check the following to confirm that there is no danger on the jobsite.
When performing operations near combustible materials such as attatched roofs, dry leaves or dry grass, there
is a hazard of fire, so be careful when operating.
Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the worksite, and determine the safest method of operation. Do
not operate where there is a hazard of landslides or falling rocks.
If water lines, gas lines, or high-voltage electrical lines may be
buried under the worksite, contact each utility and identify their
locations. Be careful not to sever or damage any of these lines.
Take necessary measures to prevent any unauthorized person
from entering the operating area.
In particular, if you need to operate on a road, protect pedestrian
and cars by designating a person for worksite traffic duty or by
installing fences around the worksite.
When traveling or operating in water or on soft ground, check
the water depth, speed of the current, bedrock, and shape of the
ground beforehand and avoid any place that will obstruct travel.
WORKING ON LOOSE GROUND

Avoid traveling or operating your machine too close to the edge of cliffs, overhangs, and deep ditches. The
ground may be weak in such areas. If the ground should collapse under the weight or vibration of the machine,
there is a hazard that the machine may fall or tip over. Remember that the soil after heavy rain or blasting or after
earthquakes is weak in these areas.
When working on embankments or near excavated ditches, there is a hazard that the weight and vibration of the
machine will cause the soil to collapse. Before starting operations, take steps to ensure that the ground is safe
and to prevent the machine from rolling over or falling.
2 - 22
.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION
DO NOT GO CLOSE TO HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES

Do not travel or operate the machine near electric cables. There is
a hazard of electric shock, which may cause serious personal
injury or death. On jobsites where the machine may go close to
electric cables, always observe the following.
Before starting work near electric cables, inform the local power
company of the work to be performed, and ask them to take the
necessary action.
Even going close to high-voltage cables can cause electric

shock, which may cause serious burns or even death. Always
Voltage of Cables Safety Distance
maintain a safe distance (see the table on the right) between the 100 V, 200 V Over 2 m (7 ft)
machine and the electric cable. Check with the local power 6,600 V Over 2 m (7 ft)
company about safe operating procedure before starting 22,000 V Over 3 m (10 ft)
operations. 66,000 V Over 4 m (14 ft)
To prepare for any possible emergencies, wear rubber shoes 154,000 V Over 5 m (17 ft)
and gloves. Lay a rubber sheet on top of the seat, and be careful
187,000 V Over 6 m (20 ft)
not to touch the chassis with any exposed part of your body.
275,000 V Over 7 m (23 ft)
Use a signalman to give warning if the machine approaches too
close to the electric cables. 500,000 V Over 11 m (36 ft)
When performing operations near high voltage cables, do not let anyone near the machine.
If the machine should come too close or touch the electric cable, to prevent electric shock, the operator should
not leave the operator's compartment until it has been confirmed that the electricity has been shut off.
Also, do not let anyone near the machine.
ENSURE GOOD VISIBILITY

This machine is equipped with mirrors and cameras to ensure good visibility, but even then there are places that
cannot be seen from the operator's seat, so be careful when operating.
When traveling or performing operations in places with poor visibility, it is impossible to check for obstacles in the
area around the machine and to check the condition of the jobsite. This leads to danger of serious personal injury
or death. When traveling or performing operations in places with poor visibility, always observe the following.
Position a signalman if there are areas where the visibility is not good.
Only 1 signalman should give signals.
When working in dark places, turn on the working lamp and front lamps installed to the machine, and set up
additional lighting in the work area if necessary.
Stop operations if the visibility is poor, such as in mist, snow, rain, or dust.
When checking the mirrors installed to the machine, remove all dirt and adjust the angle of the mirror to ensure
good visibility.
If the machine is equipped with cameras, clean off any dirt from the lens and make sure that the camera gives
a clear view.
CHECKING SIGNS AND SIGNALMAN'S SIGNALS

Set up signs to inform of road shoulders and soft ground. If the visibility is not good, position a signalman if
necessary. Operators should pay careful attention to the signs and follow the instructions from the signalman.
Only 1 signalman should give signals.
Make sure that all workers understand the meaning of all signals and signs before starting work.
2 - 23
.
BEWARE OF ASBESTOS DUST

Asbestos dust in the air can cause lung cancer if it is inhaled. There is danger of inhaling asbestos when working
on jobsites handling demolition work or work handling industrial waste. Always observe the following.
Spray water to keep down the dust.
Do not use compressed air.
If there is danger that there may be asbestos dust in the air,
always operate the machine from an upwind position, and make
sure that all workers operate on the upwind side.
All workers should use anti-dust masks.
Do not allow other persons to approach during the operation.
Always observe the rules and regulations for the work site and
environmental standards.
This machine does not use asbestos, but there is a danger that
improper parts may contain asbestos, so always use genuine
Komatsu parts.
STARTING ENGINE
USE WARNING TAGS

If there is any "DANGER! Do NOT operate!" warning tag displayed,
it means that someone is performing inspection and maintenance
of the machine. If the warning sign is ignored and the machine is
operated, there is danger that the person performing inspection or
maintenance may be caught in the rotating parts or moving parts
and suffer serious personal injury or death. Do not start the engine
or touch the levers.
2 - 24
.
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

Perform the following checks before starting the engine at the beginning of the day's work to ensure that there is no
problem with the operation of the machine. If this inspection is not performed properly, problems may occur with the
operation of the machine, and there is danger that this may lead to serious personal injury or death.
Remove all dirt from the surface of the window glass to ensure a good view.
Perform the "Walk-around Checks (PAGE 3-115)".
Remove all dirt from the surface of the lens of the front lamps and working lamps, and check that they light up
correctly.
Check the coolant level, fuel level, and oil level in engine oil pan, check for clogging of the air cleaner, and check
for damage to the electric wiring.
Check the battery terminals for looseness or corrosion.
Check that there is no mud or dust accumulated around the movable parts of any pedals, and check that the
pedals work properly.
Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to perform operations, and check that there is no damage
or wear to the seat belt or mounting clamps.
Check that the gauges work properly, check the angle of the mirror, and check that the control levers are all at
NEUTRAL position.
Before starting the engine, check that lock lever (1) is in LOCK
position (L).
Adjust the mirrors so that the rear of the machine can be seen
clearly from the operator's seat.
When adjusting, see "Adjustment of Mirrors and Camera (PAGE
3-127)".
If the machine is equipped with cameras, adjust the angle so
that the surrounding area can be seen clearly from the
operator's seat.
For details when adjusting, see "Adjusting Angle of Camera
(PAGE 3-129)".
Check that there are no persons or obstacles above, below, or
in the area around the machine.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ENGINE

Start and operate the machine only while seated.
When starting the engine, sound the horn as a warning.
Do not allow anyone apart from the operator to ride on the machine.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting circuit. This may cause fire, serious
PRECAUTIONS IN COLD AREAS

Perform the warming-up operation thoroughly. If the machine is not thoroughly warmed up before the control
levers or control pedals are operated, the reaction of the machine will be slow or the machine may move in a way
not expected by the operator. Particularly in cold weather, be sure to perform the warming-up operation
thoroughly.
If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source.
There is a hazard that this will ignite the battery and cause the battery to explode.
Before charging or starting the engine with a different power source, melt the battery electrolyte and check that
there is no leakage of electrolyte before starting.
2 - 25
.
STARTING WITH BOOSTER CABLES

If any mistake is made in the method of connecting the booster
cables, it may cause the battery to explode, so always observe the
following.
Always wear protective eyeglasses and rubber gloves when
starting the engine with booster cable.
When connecting a normal machine to a failed machine with
booster cables, always use a normal machine with the same
battery voltage as the failed machine.
When starting with a booster cable, perform the starting
operation with 2 workers (1 worker sitting in the operator's seat
and the other working with the battery).
When starting from another machine, do not allow the nomal
machine and failed machine.
When connecting the booster cables, turn the starting switch to
OFF position for both the normal machine and failed machine.
There is a hazard that the machine will move when the power is
connected.
Be sure to connect the positive (+) cable first when installing the
booster cables. Disconnect the negative (-) cable (ground side)
first when removing them.
When removing the booster cables, be careful not to let the booster cable clips touch each other or to let the clips
touch the machine.
For details of the starting procedure when using booster cables, see "Starting Engine with Booster Cables (PAGE
3-205)" in OPERATION section.
OPERATION
CHECKS BEFORE OPERATION

If the checks before starting are not performed properly, the machine will be unable to display its full performance,
and there is also danger that it may lead to serious personal injury or death.
When performing the checks, move the machine to a wide area where there are no obstructions, and pay careful
attention to the surrounding area. Do not allow anyone near the machine.
Always fasten the seat belt. There is danger that you may be
thrown out of the operator's seat and suffer serious injury when
the brakes are applied suddenly.
Check that the movement of the machine matches the display
on the control pattern card. If it does not match, replace it
immediately with the correct control pattern card.
Check the operating condition of the machine, work equipment,
arm, boom, travel, and swing system.
Check for any problem in the sound of the machine, vibration,
heat, smell, or gauges; check also that there is no leakage of oil
or fuel.
If any problem is found, perform repairs immediately.
2 - 26
.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING IN FORWARD OR REVERSE AND SWINGING

When traveling, drive with sprocket (1) at the rear of the
machine. If sprocket (1) is at the front, the operation of the travel
levers will be the opposite of the actual direction of travel, so
there is a hazard that the machine may travel in an unexpected
direction, leading to serious injury or death.
Always lock all the door and windows of the operator's
compartment in position (open or closed).
On jobsites where there is a hazard of flying objects or of objects
entering the operator's compartment, check that all the door and
windows are securely closed.
Do not allow anyone apart from the operator to ride on the
machine.
If there are any persons in the area around the machine, there
is danger that they may be hit or caught by the machine, and this
may lead to serious personal injury or death. Always observe
the following before traveling.
Always operate the machine only when seated.
Before moving off, check it again that there is no person or
obstacle in the surrounding area.
Before starting to move, sound the horn to warn people in the
surrounding area.
Check that the travel alarm and other alarms work properly.
If there is an area to the rear of the machine that cannot be
seen, position a signalman. Swing slowly and be extremely
careful not to hit any person or object.
Always be sure to perform the above precautions even when the
machine is equipped with mirrors and cameras.
2 - 27
.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TRAVELING

When traveling or performing operations, always keep a safe distance from people, structures, or other machines
to avoid coming into contact with them.
When traveling on the level ground, keep the work equipment
approximately 40 to 50 cm {16 to 20 in} above the ground.
Otherwise, the work equipment may contact to the ground and
the machine may be turned over.
If the view to the right side is poor, raise the boom to ensure
better visibility.
For machines equipped with an auto-deceleration system,
always turn the auto-deceleration switch OFF when traveling on
rough ground or steep slopes. If the machine is operated with
the auto-deceleration system ON, the engine speed will rise and
the machine travel speed may suddenly become faster.
Avoid traveling over obstacles when possible. If the machine
has to travel over an obstacle, keep the work equipment close
to the ground and travel at low speed. There is more danger of
the machine tipping over to the left or right than tipping over to
the front or rear, so do not travel over obstacles which make the
machine tilt strongly to the left or right sides.
When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed and do not
operate the steering suddenly. There is danger that the machine
may turn over. The work equipment may hit the ground surface
and cause the machine to lose its balance, or may damage the
machine or structures in the area.
When using the machine, to prevent personal injury caused by damage to the work equipment or by the machine
overturning due to overloading, do not exceed the permitted performance of the machine or the maximum
permitted load for the structure of the machine.
When passing over bridges or structures, check first that the structure is strong enough to support the weight of
the machine.
When operating in tunnels, under bridges, under electric wires, or other places where the height is limited, operate
slowly and be extremely careful not to let the machine or work equipment hit anything.
2 - 28
.
TRAVELING ON SLOPES
To prevent the machine from tipping over or slipping to the side, always observe the following.
Keep the work equipment approximately 20 to 30 cm {8 to 12 in}
above the ground. In case of emergency, lower the work
equipment to the ground immediately to help stop the machine.
When the machine goes the uphill, let the work equipment point
to the uphill side, and when it goes the downhill, let it point to the
downhill side. Make sure the condition of the ground below the
undercarriage is safe, and move the machine carefully.
When traveling up a steep slope, extend the work equipment to

the front to improve the balance, keep the work equipment
approximately 20 to 30 cm {8 to 12 in} above the ground, and
travel at low speed.
When traveling downhill, lower the engine speed, keep the travel lever close to NEUTRAL position, and travel at
low speed.
Always travel straight up or down a slope. Traveling at an angle
or across the slope is extremely dangerous.
Do not turn on slopes or travel across slopes. Always go down
to a flat place to change the position of the machine, then travel
on to the slope again.
Do not travel on a slope covered with the steel plates. Even with slight slopes there is a hazard that the machine
may slip.
Travel on grass or fallen leaves with low speed. Even with slight slopes there is a hazard that the machine may
slip.
If the engine stops when the machine is traveling on a slope, move the control levers immediately to NEUTRAL
position and start the engine again.
2 - 29
.
OPERATING ON SLOPES
When working on slopes, there is a hazard that the machine may lose its balance and turn over when the swing
or work equipment are operated. This may lead to serious injury or property damage, so always provide a stable
place when performing these operations, and operate carefully.
Do not swing the work equipment from the uphill side to the
downhill side when the bucket is loaded. This operation is
dangerous, and may cause the machine to tip over.
If the machine has to be used on a slope, pile the soil to make
a platform (A) that will keep the machine as horizontal as
possible.
Do not work on a slope covered with the steel plates. Even with
slight slopes there is a hazard that the machine may slip.
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS
If the machine rolls over or falls, or the ground at the working point collapses, or a structure being demolished
collapses, it may lead to serious personal injury or death. Always observe the following.
Never dig the work face under an overhang. There is a hazard
that rocks may fall or that the overhang may collapse and fall on
top of the machine.
Do not excavate too deeply under the front of the machine. The
ground under the machine may collapse and cause the machine
to fall.
To make it easier to escape if there is any problem, set the

tracks at right angles to the road shoulder or cliff with the
sprocket at the rear when performing operations.
2 - 30
.
When performing demolition work, do not perform demolition

work under the front of the machine. This makes the ground
unstable, and there is a hazard of the machine falling.
When performing demolition work, do not perform demolition

work above your head. There is a hazard of broken parts falling
or of the building collapsing and causing serious injury or death.
When performing demolition work, do not use the impact force

of the work equipment for breaking work. There is a hazard of
damage to the work equipment and also a hazard of serious
personal injury or death being caused by flying pieces of broken
materials, or of the machine tipping over due to reaction from the
impact.
The not pass the bucket over the heads of other workers or over the operator's seat of dump trucks or other
hauling equipment. There is danger that the load may spill or the bucket may hit the dump truck and cause
serious personal injury or death.
When working on or from the top of buildings or other structures, check the strength and the structure before
starting operations. There is a hazard of the building collapsing and causing serious injury or damage.
Generally speaking, the machine is more liable to overturn when the work equipment is at the side than when it
is at the front or rear.
When using a breaker or other heavy work equipment, there is a hazard of the machine losing its balance and
tipping over. When operating on flat ground as well as on slopes.
Do not suddenly lower, swing, or stop the work equipment.
Do not suddenly extend or retract the boom cylinder. There is a hazard that impact will cause the machine to
tip over.
2 - 31
.
In the operation using the fork or grapple, do not attempt to pick

up an object with their tips.
There is a danger of damage to the machine or personal injury,
as the picked up object can easily slip off.
TRAVELING ON SNOW-COVERED OR FROZEN SURFACES

Snow-covered or frozen surfaces are slippery, so be extremely careful when traveling or operating the machine,
and do not operate the levers suddenly. Even a slight slope may cause the machine to slip, so be particularly
careful when working on slopes.
With frozen ground surfaces, the ground becomes soft when the temperature rises, and this may cause the
machine to tip over or make it impossible for the machine to escape.
If the machine enters deep snow, there is a hazard that it may tip over or become buried in the snow. Be careful
not to leave the road shoulder or to get trapped in a snow drift.
When clearing snow, the road shoulder and objects placed beside the road are buried in the snow and cannot be
seen. There is a hazard of the machine tipping over or hitting covered objects, so always perform operations
carefully.
2 - 32
.
PARKING MACHINE
Park the machine on firm, level ground.
Select a place where there is no hazard of landslides, falling
rocks, or flooding.
Lower the work equipment completely to the ground.
When leaving the machine, be sure to make the undercarriage

and upper structure point to the same direction, and lower the
work equipment to the ground. Operate the operating portion (g)
of the lock lever (1) to set it to LOCK position (L) and stop the
engine.
When the operator's seat and console are located in front, your
body or clothes will easily touch the levers. Shift them backward
to keep enough space, and then get off the machine.
Always close the operator's cab door, and use the key to lock all
the equipment in order to prevent any unauthorized person from
moving the machine. Always remove the key, take it with you,
and leave it in the specified place.
If it is necessary to park the machine on a slope, always observe
the following.
Set the work equipment on the downhill side and dig it into the
ground.
In addition, put blocks under the tracks to prevent the
machine from moving.
2 - 33
.
TRANSPORTATION
When the machine is transported on a trailer, there is danger of serious personal injury or death during
transportation. Always observe the following.
Always check the machine dimensions carefully. Depending on the work equipment installed, the machine
weight, transportation height, and overall length may differ.
Check beforehand that all bridges and other structures on the transportation route are strong enough to withstand
the combined weight of the transporter and the machine being transported.
The machine can be divided into parts for transportation, so when transporting the machine, consult your
Komatsu distributor to have the work performed.
LOADING AND UNLOADING

When loading or unloading the machine, mistaken operation may
bring the hazard of the machine tipping over or falling, so particular
care is necessary. Always observe the following.
Perform loading and unloading on firm, level ground only.
Maintain a safe distance from the edge of the road or cliff.
Never use the work equipment to load or unload the machine.
There is danger that the machine may fall or tip over.
Always use ramps of adequate strength. Be sure that the ramps
are wide, long, and thick enough to provide a safe loading slope.
Take suitable steps to prevent the ramps from moving out of
position or coming off.
(1) Blocks
Be sure the ramp surface is clean and free of grease, oil, ice and (2) Ramp
water. Remove dirt from the undercarriage. On a rainy day, in (3) Centerline of ramps
particular, be extremely careful since the ramp surface is (4) Angle of ramps: Max. 15 deg.
slippery.
For machines equipped with an auto-deceleration device, always turn the auto-deceleration switch OFF. If the
machine is operated with the auto-deceleration system ON, there is danger that the engine speed will suddenly
rise, the machine will suddenly move off, or the machine travel speed will become faster.
Run the engine at Low idle (MIN) and drive the machine slowly at low speed.
Do not operate any lever except for the travel lever (travel forward and reverse) on the ramps.
Never correct your steering on the ramps. If necessary, drive off the ramps, correct the direction, then enter the
ramps again.
The center of gravity of the machine will change suddenly at the joint between the ramps and the track or trailer,
and there is danger of the machine losing its balance. Travel slowly over this point.
When loading or unloading the machine to an embankment or platform, make sure that it has suitable width,
strength, and grade.
When swinging the upper structure on the trailer, the trailer is unstable, so pull in the work equipment and swing
slowly.
For machines equipped with a cab, always lock the door after boarding the machine. If this is not done, the door
may suddenly open during transportation.
Refer to "TRANSPORTATION (PAGE 3-181)".
When it is necessary to remove handrails and steps, take care not to lose removed handrails and steps.
Install the removed handrails and steps securely.
2 - 34
.
TOWING
PRECAUTIONS WHEN TOWING

Always use the correct towing equipment and towing method. Any mistake in the selection of the wire rope or towing
bar or in the method of towing a disabled machine may lead to serious personal injury or death.
For towing, see "TOWING THE MACHINE (PAGE 3-201)".
Always confirm that the wire rope or drawbar used for towing has ample strength for the weight of the machine
being towed.
Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced
diameter (B), or kinks (C). There is danger that the rope may
break during the towing operation.
Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
Never tow a machine on a slope.
During the towing operation, never stand between the towing
machine and the machine being towed.
2 - 35
.
LIFTING OBJECTS WITH BUCKET
PRECAUTIONS FOR LIFTING OPERATIONS

Do not perform lifting work on slopes, soft ground, or other places where the machine is not stable.
Use wire rope that conforms to the specified standard.
Determine the signals to be used and place a signalman in position.
To prevent the danger of contact with a raised load or the danger from a falling load, do not allow any worker inside
the area.
It is dangerous if a raised load hits any person or structure. When operating the swing or work equipment, always
check carefully that the surrounding area is safe.
Do not start, swing, or stop the machine suddenly. There is a hazard that the lifted load will swing.
Do not use the work equipment or swing to pull the load in any
direction. There is danger that the hook may break and the load
come off, causing the work equipment to move suddenly and
cause personal injury.
Do not leave the operator's seat when there is a raised load.
2 - 36
.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY WARNING TAG DURING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

If there is any "DANGER! Do NOT operate!" warning tag displayed,
it means that someone is performing inspection and maintenance
of the machine. If the warning sign is ignored and the machine is
operated, there is danger that the person performing inspection or
maintenance may be caught in the rotating parts or moving parts
and suffer serious personal injury or death. Do not start the engine
or touch the levers.
If necessary, put up signs around the machine also.
Warning tag part number: 09963-03001
When not using this warning tag, keep it in the toolbox.
If there is no toolbox, keep it in the pocket for the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
KEEP WORKPLACE CLEAN AND TIDY

Do not leave hammers or other tools lying around in the work place. Wipe up all grease, oil, or other substances
that will cause you to slip. Always keep the work place clean and tidy to enable you to perform operations safely.
If the work place is not kept clean and tidy, there is the danger that you will trip, slip, or fall over and injure yourself.
When cleaning the ceiling window which is made of organic glass (polycarbonate), use tap water and avoid use
of organic solvents for cleaning. An organic solvent like benzene, toluene or methanol can invite a chemical
reaction like dissolution and decomposition on the window glass, deteriorating polycarbonate in use.
SELECT SUITABLE PLACE FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Stop the machine on firm, level ground.
Select a place where there is no hazard of landslides, falling rocks, or flooding.
ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL

Do not allow any unauthorized personnel into the area when servicing the machine. If necessary, employ a guard.
APPOINT LEADER WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS

When repairing the machine or when removing and installing the work equipment, appoint a leader and follow his
instructions during the operation.
2 - 37
.
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE SAFETY
STOP ENGINE BEFORE PERFORMING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Lower the work equipment completely to the ground and stop
the engine before performing any inspection and maintenance.
Turn the starting switch to the ON position. Operate the work

equipment control lever back and forth, right and left 2 to 3 times
fully to release the remaining pressure in the hydraulic circuit.
Operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever (1) to set it to
the LOCK position (L), and turn the starting switch to the OFF
position.
Check that the battery relay is off and main power is not
conducted. (Wait for approximately 1 minute after turning off the
engine starting switch key and press the horn switch. If the horn
does not sound, it is not activated.)
Put blocks under the track to prevent the machine from moving.
2 - 38
.
TWO WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN ENGINE IS RUNNING

To prevent personal injury, do not perform maintenance with the engine running. If maintenance must be performed
with the engine running, perform the operation with at least two workers and observe the following.
One worker must always sit in the operator's seat and be ready
to stop the engine at any time. All workers must maintain
contact with the other workers.
When performing operations near the fan, fan belt, or other
rotating parts, there is a hazard of being caught in the parts, so
be careful not to come close.
Never drop or insert tools or other objects into the fan, fan belt,
or other rotating parts. There is danger that they may contact
the rotating parts and break or be sent flying.
Release the remaining pressure in the hydraulic circuit, and

operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever (1) to set it to
the LOCK position (L). For releasing of the remaining oil
pressure, see the "METHOD OF RELEASING PRESSURE IN
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (PAGE 4-79)".
Do not touch the control levers or pedals. If it is necessary to
operate the control levers or pedals, always give a signal to your
fellow workers and have them move to a safe place.
INSTALLING, REMOVING, OR STORING ATTACHMENTS

Appoint a leader before starting removal or installation
operations for attachments.
Place attachments that have been removed from the machine in
a stable condition so that they do not fall. And take steps to
prevent unauthorized persons from entering the storage area.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING AT HIGH PLACES

When working at high places, use a step ladder or other stand to ensure that the work can be performed safely.
2 - 39
.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WORKING UNDER MACHINE OR WORK EQUIPMENT

Make sure the hoists or hydraulic jacks you use are in good
repair and strong enough to handle the weight of the
component. Never use hydraulic jacks at places where the
machine is damaged, bent, or twisted. Never use if the element
wire of wire rope is frayed, twisted or pinched. Never use bent or
distorted hooks.
It is extremely dangerous to work under the machine if the track
shoes are lifted off the ground and the machine is supported
only with the work equipment. If any of the control levers is
touched by accident, or there is damage occurring to the
hydraulic piping, the work equipment or the machine will
suddenly drop. This is extremely dangerous. Never work under
the work equipment or the machine.
If it is necessary to raise the work equipment or the machine and then go under it to perform inspection or
maintenance, support the work equipment and machine securely with blocks and stands strong enough to
support the weight of the work equipment and machine.
If the work equipment and machine are not supported, there is a hazard that they may come down and that this
may lead to serious personal injury or death.
Never use concrete blocks for supports. They can collapse under even light loads.
PROPER TOOLS
Use only tools suited to the task and be sure to use the tools
correctly. Using damaged, deformed, or low quality tools, or
making improper use of the tools may cause serious personal
injury or death.
2 - 40
.
PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS WHEN WELDING

Welding operations must always be performed by a qualified welder and in a place equipped with proper equipment.
There is a hazard of gas, fire, or electrocution when performing welding, so never allow any unqualified personnel
to perform welding.
HANDLING BATTERY
Before inspecting or handling the battery, turn the key in the starting switch to OFF position.
Danger of battery exploding

When the battery is being charged, flammable hydrogen gas is
generated and may explode. In addition, the battery electrolyte
includes dilute sulphuric acid. Any mistake in handling may
cause serious personal injury or death, explosion, or fire, so
always observe the following.
Do not use or charge the battery if the battery electrolyte is
below LOWER LEVEL mark. This will cause explosion.
Always perform periodic inspection of the battery electrolyte
level, and add distilled water (or commercially available
battery filler solution) to UPPER LEVEL mark.
Do not use a direct air blow or dry cloth to clean the battery.
A wet cloth will prevent fire or explosion from static electricity.
Do not smoke or bring any open flame close to the battery.
Hydrogen gas is generated when the battery is being
charged, so remove the battery from the machine, take it to
a well-ventilated place, remove the battery caps, then
perform the charging.
After charging, tighten the battery caps securely.
Danger from dilute sulphuric acid

When the battery is being charged, flammable hydrogen gas is
generated and may explode. In addition, the battery electrolyte
includes dilute sulphuric acid. Any mistake in handling may
cause serious personal injury or death, explosion, or fire, so
always observe the following.
When handling the battery, always wear protective
eyeglasses and rubber gloves.
If battery electrolyte gets into your eyes, immediately wash
your eyes with large amounts of fresh water. After that, get
medical attention immediately.
If battery electrolyte gets on your clothes or skin, wash it off
immediately with large amounts of water.
Removing battery cables

Before repairing the electrical system or performing electric welding, turn the starting switch OFF. Wait for
approximately 1 minute, then remove the negative (-) battery cable to stop the flow of electricity.
2 - 41
.
Danger of sparks
There is hazard that sparks will be generated, so always observe the following.
Do not let tools or other metal objects make any contact between the battery cables. Do not leave tools lying
around near the battery.
When removing the battery cables, remove the ground cable (negative (-) cable) first. When installing,
connect the positive (+) cable first, then connect the ground.
Tighten the battery cable terminals securely.
Secure the battery firmly in the specified position.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING HAMMER

When using a hammer, pins may fly out or metal particles may be
scattered. This may lead to serious personal injury or death.
Always observe the following.
When hitting pins or bucket teeth, there is a hazard that broken
pieces might be sent flying and injure people in the surrounding
area. Always check that there is no one in the surrounding area.
If hard metal parts such as pins, bucket teeth, cutting edges, or
bearings are hit with a hammer, there is a hazard that pieces
might be scattered and cause serious personal injury or death.
Always wear protective eyeglasses and gloves.
If the pin is hit with strong force, there is a hazard that it may fly
out and injure people in the surrounding area. Do not allow
anyone to enter the surrounding area.
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-TEMPERATURE COOLANT

To prevent burns from boiling water or steam spurting out when
checking or draining the coolant, wait for the coolant to cool down
to a temperature where the radiator cap can be touched by hand.
Then loosen the cap slowly to release the pressure inside the
radiator, and remove the cap.
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-TEMPERATURE OIL

To prevent burns from hot oil spurting out or from touching
high-temperature parts when checking or draining the oil, wait for
the oil to cool down to a temperature where the cap or plug can be
touched by hand. Then loosen the cap or plug slowly to release the
internal pressure and remove the cap or plug.
2 - 42
.
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE OIL

The hydraulic system is always under internal pressure. In addition, the fuel piping is also under internal pressure
when the engine is running and immediately after the engine is stopped. When performing inspection or
replacement of the piping or hoses, check that the internal pressure in the circuit has been released. If this is not
done, it may lead to serious personal injury or death. Always observe the following.
Do not perform inspection or replacement work with the circuit under pressure.
Always release the pressure before starting. For details, see "METHOD OF RELEASING PRESSURE IN
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT (PAGE 4-79)".
If there is any leakage from the piping or hoses, the surrounding area will be wet, so check for cracks in the piping
and hoses and for swelling in the hoses.
When perform inspection, wear protective eyeglasses and leather gloves.
There is a hazard that high-pressure oil leaking from small holes
may penetrate your skin or cause loss of sight if it contacts your
skin or eyes directly. If you are hit by a jet of high-pressure oil
and suffer injury to your skin or eyes, wash the place with clean
water, and consult a doctor immediately for medical attention.
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL

When the engine is running, high-pressure is generated in the engine fuel piping. When performing inspection or
maintenance of the fuel piping system, stop the engine and wait for at least 30 seconds to allow the internal pressure
to go down before starting the operation.
HANDLING HIGH-PRESSURE HOSES AND PIPING

If oil or fuel leaks from high-pressure hoses or piping, it may cause fire or misoperation, and lead to serious
personal injury or death. If the hose or piping mounts are loose or oil or fuel is found to be leaking from the mount,
stop operations and tighten to the specified torque.
If any damaged or deformed hoses or piping are found, consult your Komatsu distributor.
Replace the hose if any of the following problems are found.
Damaged hose or deformed hydraulic fitting.
Frayed or cut covering or exposed reinforcement wire layer.
Covering swollen in places.
Twisted or crushed movable portion.
Foreign material embedded in covering.
2 - 43
.
PRECAUTIONS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE

When the engine is running and immediately after it is stopped,
high voltage is generated inside the engine controller and the
engine injector, and there is danger of electrocution. Never touch
the inside of the controller or the engine injector portion.
If it is necessary to touch the inside of the controller or the engine
injector portion, contact your Komatsu distributor.
NOISE
When performing maintenance of the engine and you are exposed to noise for long periods of time, wear ear covers
or ear plugs while working.
If the noise from the machine is too loud, it may cause temporary or permanent hearing problems.
PRECAUTIONS WITH HIGH-PRESSURE GREASE WHEN ADJUSTING TRACK TENSION

Grease is pumped into the track tension adjustment system
under high pressure.
If the specified procedure for maintenance is not followed when
making adjustment, grease drain plug (1) may fly out and cause
serious injury or property damage.
When loosening grease drain plug (1) to loosen the track
tension, never loosen it more than 1 turn. Loosen the grease
drain plug slowly.
Never put your face, hands, feet, or any other part of your body
close to grease drain plug (1).
2 - 44
.
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE RECOIL SPRING

Never disassemble the recoil spring assembly. The recoil spring
assembly has a powerful spring that acts to reduce the impact on
the idler. If it is disassembled by mistake, the spring may shoot out
and cause serious personal injury or death.
It is necessary to disassemble the recoil spring assembly, always
ask your Komatsu distributor to perform the operation.
HANDLING ACCUMULATOR AND GAS SPRING

This machine is equipped with an accumulator. Even after the engine stops, the work equipment control levers can
be operated for a short time in LOWER direction to allow the work equipment to go down under its own weight.
After stopping the engine, set the lock lever to LOCK position.
The accumulator and gas spring are charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas. If the accumulator is handled
mistakenly, it may cause an explosion that could lead to serious personal injury or death. For this reason, always
observe the following.
Do not disassemble the accumulator.
Do not bring it near open flame or dispose of it in fire.
Do not make holes in it, weld it, or use a cutting torch.
Do not hit or roll the accumulator, or subject it to any impact.
When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released.
Ask your Komatsu distributor to have this work performed.
PRECAUTIONS WITH COMPRESSED AIR

When performing cleaning with compressed air, there is a hazard of serious personal injury caused by flying dust
or particles.
When using compressed air to clean the filter element or radiator, wear protective eyeglasses, anti-dust mask,
gloves, and other protective equipment.
MAINTENANCE OF AIR CONDITIONER

If air conditioner refrigerant gets into your eyes, it may cause loss of sight; if it contacts your skin, it may cause
frostbite. Never loosen any parts of the cooling circuit.
2 - 45
.
DISPOSING OF WASTE MATERIALS

To prevent pollution, pay careful attention to the method of disposing of waste materials.
Always put oil drained from your machine in containers. Never
drain oil directly onto the ground or dump into the sewage
system, rivers, the sea, or lakes.
Obey appropriate laws and regulations when disposing of
harmful objects such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvent, filters, and
batteries.
MERCURY CONTAINING COMPONENT(S)

The monitor display backlight contains mercury. The machine may be equipped with optional High Intensity
Discharge lighting lamps which also may contain mercury. These components must be reused, recycled or properly
disposed of in accordance with applicable Local, State and Federal Laws.
METHOD OF SELECTING WINDOW WASHER FLUID

Use an ethyl alcohol base washer liquid.
Methyl alcohol base washer liquid may irritate your eyes, so do not use it.
PERIODIC INSPECTION OF DEFINED LIFE PARTS

To use the machine safely for a long period, be sure to periodically inspect the defined life parts that have an
especially close relation to safety, such as hoses and the seat belt. If an abnormality is found, replace it
immediately.
The material of these components naturally changes over time, and repeated use causes deterioration, wear,
and fatigue. As a result, there is a hazard that these components can fail and cause serious personal injury or
death. It is not easy to judge the remaining life of these components but inspect them as much as possible before
work and at the regular maintenance.
Replace or repair the defined life parts if a defect is found by the check.
2 - 46
.
3-1
.
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS OPERATION
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS

OVERALL MACHINE VIEW
(1) Bucket (6) Boom cylinder

(2) Bucket cylinder (7) Sprocket
(3) Arm (8) Track frame
(4) Arm cylinder (9) Track shoe
(5) Boom (10) Idler
3-2
.
OPERATION MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS
CONTROLS AND GAUGES
(1) Radio (12) Starting switch

(2) Lock lever (13) Fuel control dial
(3) Left work equipment control lever (14) Lamp switch
(4) One-touch power max. switch (15) Swing lock switch
(5) Travel pedals (16) Revolving warning lamp switch (if equipped)
(6) Travel levers (17) Roof Glass Wiper Switch (if equipped)
(7) Horn switch (18) Attachment control pedal (if equipped)
(8) Machine monitor (19) Attachment control pedal (if equipped)
(9) Cigarette Lighter (20) Room Lamp Switch
(10) Right work equipment control lever (21) Emergency pump drive switch
(11) Blade control lever (if equipped) (22) Swing parking brake release switch
3-3
.
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS OPERATION
Machine monitor
AA: Screen for standard

BB: Screen with all lamps lit
CC: Maintenance time warning screen
(1) Wiper switch (16) Window washer switch
(2) Buzzer cancel switch (17) Air conditioner control switches
(3) Auto-deceleration switch (18) Engine oil pressure monitor
(4) Engine coolant temperature monitor (19) Charge level monitor
(5) Engine coolant temperature gauge (20) Radiator coolant level monitor
(6) Hydraulic oil temperature gauge (21) Air conditioner monitor
(7) Service meter, Clock (22) Wiper monitor
(8) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor (23) Swing lock monitor
(9) Working mode monitor (24) Engine pre-heating monitor or One-touch
(10) Travel speed monitor (25) Auto-deceleration monitor
(11) Fuel gauge (26) Engine oil level monitor
(12) ECO gauge (27) Air cleaner clogging monitor
(13) Fuel level monitor (28) Function switches (F1 to F6)
(14) Working mode selector switch (29) Maintenance due time monitor
(15) Travel speed selector switch
3-4
.
OPERATION DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES
DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES

The following is an explanation of devices needed for operating the machine.
To perform suitable operations correctly and safely, it is important to completely understand methods of operating
the equipment, and the meanings of the displays.
MONITORING SYSTEM

(A) Emergency monitors (D) Meter display portion,pilot display

(B) Caution monitors (E) Monitor switches portion
(C) Basic check monitors
REMARK
If environmental temperature of the machine monitor is high, brightness may be automatically reduced to protect
the liquid crystal.
Intensity or color of the objects may change because of the automatic adjustment function of the camera.
3-5
.
DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES OPERATION
Basic Operation of Machine Monitor
Starting Engine When Situation is Normal
When the starting switch is turned to ON position, the opening screen GG is displayed.
After the opening screen GG is displayed for 2 seconds, the screen switches to the check before starting screen
DD.
After the check before starting screen DD is displayed for 2 seconds, the screen switches to the working
mode/travel mode display screen HH.
After the working mode/travel mode display screen HH is displayed for 2 seconds, the screen switches to
standard screen BB.
If the working mode when the engine is started is B mode, the opening screen GG is displayed for 2 seconds, and
the screen then switches to the breaker mode confirmation screen II.
When starting in B mode, press switch F6. If you do not want to

start B mode, press switch F5. In this case, the system starts with
E mode.
3-6
.
REMARK
When the engine is started, the battery voltage may suddenly drop depending on the temperature and the battery
condition. If this happens, the display on the machine monitor may momentarily go out, but this does not indicate
any abnormality.
Stopping Engine When Situation is Normal
When the starting switch is turned to OFF position, ending screen JJ is displayed for 5 seconds, then the display
goes out.
3-7
.
If There Is Abnormality When Starting Engine
If there is any abnormality when starting the engine, the check before starting screen DD changes to the
maintenance time warning screen CC, warning screen FF, or error screen EE.
After displaying the check before starting screen DD for 2 seconds, the screen changes to the maintenance time
warning screen CC.
After displaying the maintenance time warning screen CC for 30 seconds, the screen returns to the standard
screen BB.
After displaying the check before starting screen DD for 2 seconds, the screen changes to the warning screen
FF or error screen EE.
3-8
.
If Any Abnormality Occurs During Operation
If any abnormality occurs during operation, the standard screen BB changes to warning screen FF-(1) or the error
screen EE.
After displaying warning screen FF-(1) for 2 seconds, the screen automatically changes to warning screen FF-(2).
3-9
.
REMARK
The colors lighting up the monitors related to the emergency stop items, caution items, and basic check items are
as follows.

Color when monitor lights up

Type of monitor When When At low
normal abnormal temperature
(1) Engine coolant temperature monitor Blue Red White
(2) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor Blue Red White
(3) Fuel level monitor Blue Red -
(4) Radiator coolant level monitor OFF Red -
(5) Charge level monitor OFF Red -
(6) Engine oil pressure monitor OFF Red -
(7) Engine oil level monitor OFF Red -
(8) Air cleaner clogging monitor OFF Red -
(9) Maintenance due time monitor OFF Red -
3 - 10
.
Emergency Monitors
CAUTION
If the monitor lights up in red, stop the engine immediately or run at Low idle (MIN), check applicable location, then perform
necessary actions.
These items should be observed while the engine is running. If there is a problem, the monitor for the abnormal
location lights up in red and buzzer sounds, perform action immediately.
(1) Engine coolant temperature monitor (3) Engine oil pressure monitor
(2) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor
Engine Coolant Temperature Monitor

Monitor (1) warns operator that the engine coolant temperature
has risen.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes abnormally high, the
monitor shows abnormal display (C). The overheat prevention
system is automatically actuated and the engine speed drops.
Stop operations and run the engine at Low idle (MIN) until monitor
(1) shows normal display (B).
Display (A) at low temperatures: Monitor background (D) is white

Display (B) at correct temperatures: Monitor background (D) is
blue
Display (C) when condition is abnormal: Monitor background (D)
is red
3 - 11
.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Monitor

This monitor (2) warns the operator that the hydraulic oil
temperature has risen.
If the hydraulic oil temperature becomes abnormally high,
abnormality display (C) is shown.
Stop operations and stop the engine or run it at Low idle (MIN) until
the monitor changes to normal display (B).

blue
is red
Engine Oil Pressure Monitor

Monitor (3) lights up in red if the engine lubrication oil pressure
goes below normal level. If monitor lights up in red, stop the engine
immediately, check the lubrication system and level of oil in the
engine oil pan.
3 - 12
.
Caution Monitors
CAUTION
If the alarm monitor lights up in red, stop operations as soon as possible and perform inspection and maintenance of the
applicable location. If the warning is ignored, it may lead to failure.
These are items that should be observed while the engine is running. If any abnormality occurs, the screen displays
the item that needs immediate action.
If there is an abnormality, the monitor for the abnormal location lights up in red.
(1) Engine coolant temperature monitor (4) Charge level monitor

(2) Hydraulic oil temperature monitor (5) Air cleaner clogging monitor
(3) Fuel level monitor
Engine Coolant Temperature Monitor

If this monitor (1) shows low-temperature display (A), perform the
warm-up operation. For details, see "Engine Warm Up (PAGE
3-140)".
Monitor (1) will show normal display (B), so perform the warm-up
operation for the engine.

blue
is red
3 - 13
.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Monitor

If this monitor (2) shows low-temperature display (A), perform the
warm-up operation. For details, see "Hydraulic Equipment Warm
Up (PAGE 3-142)".
Perform the warm-up operation for the hydraulic equipment until
monitor (2) shows normal display (B).

blue
is red
Fuel Level Monitor

This monitor (3) lights up to warn that the operator that the level in
the fuel tank is low.
When the remaining fuel level reaches approx. 39 liters (10.30 US
gal), the monitor lamp lights up red, so add fuel as soon as
possible.
Charge Level Monitor

This monitor (4) warns the operator that there is an abnormality in
the charging system when the engine is running.
If the battery is not being charged properly while the engine is
running, monitor lights up in red.
If monitor lights up in red, check the V-belt for looseness. If any
abnormality is found, perform the necessary actions. For details,
see "OTHER TROUBLE (PAGE 3-207)".
Air Cleaner Clogging Monitor

This monitor (5) warns the operator that the air cleaner is clogged.
If it lights up in red, stop the engine and inspect and clean the air
cleaner.
For details of checking and cleaning the air cleaner, see "CHECK,
CLEAN AND REPLACE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (PAGE 4-22)".
3 - 14
.
Basic Check Monitors

CAUTION
These monitors do not guarantee the condition of the machine.
Do not simply rely on the monitor when performing checks before starting (daily inspection). Always get off the machine and
check each item directly.
Displays basic items among the check before starting items that must be checked before starting the engine. If there
is any abnormality, monitor for the location of abnormality will light up in red.
(1) Radiator coolant level monitor (3) Maintenance time monitor

(2) Engine oil level monitor
Radiator Coolant Level Monitor

Monitor (1) warns the operator that there has been a drop in the
radiator coolant level.
If the radiator coolant is low, the lamp lights up in red, so check
coolant level in the radiator and reservoir tank, and add coolant.
3 - 15
.
Engine Oil Level Monitor

Monitor (2) warns the operator that the oil level in the engine oil pan
has dropped.
If oil level in the engine oil pan is low, the lamp lights up in red, so
check the oil level, and add oil.
Maintenance Time Monitor

This monitor (3) lights up when the maintenance time gets close
and remains lit after the maintenance time has already passed.
Lit in yellow: The maintenance time is due within 30 hours.
Lit in red: The maintenance time has already passed.
This monitor lights up when the starting switch is turned to ON

position. It goes off after 30 seconds and the display changes to
the normal screen.
REMARK
For details of the method of confirming the maintenance time,
see "Maintenance Selector Switch (PAGE 3-41)".
If it is desired to change settings for the maintenance time, have
your Komatsu distributor change the settings.
3 - 16
.
Meter Display Portion
Pilot display Gauge and Meter

(1) Engine preheating monitor (10) Engine coolant temperature gauge
(2) Swing lock monitor (11) Hydraulic oil temperature gauge
(3) Wiper monitor (12) Fuel gauge
(4) Auto-deceleration monitor (13) Service meter, clock
(5) Working mode monitor (14) ECO gauge
(6) Travel speed monitor
(7) One-touch power max. monitor
(8) Air conditioner monitor
(9) Idle stop guidance
Pilot Display
The pilot display at the top of the screen consists of the pilot lamps to confirm the actuation of each function.
When the starting switch is turned ON, the pilot lamp lights up when the display items are functioning.
Engine Preheating Monitor

This monitor (1) is displayed when preheating the engine before
starting the engine in temperatures below 0°C (32°F).
In cold weather, when the starting switch is turned to the HEAT
position, the preheating monitor lights up. After lighting up for
approx. 30 seconds, it starts to flash to inform the operator that the
preheating has been completed. After flashing for approx. 10
seconds, the monitor goes out.
3 - 17
.
Swing Lock Monitor

This monitor (2) informs the operator that the swing lock is being
actuated.
Actuated: Lights up
When the swing lock switch is turned ON (ACTUATED), the
monitor lamp lights up.
This lamp lights up when the swing parking brake cancel switch is
set to FREE position.
For details of the positions of the swing parking brake cancel
switch, see "CONTROLS AND GAUGES (PAGE 3-3)".
REMARK
The swing motor is equipped with a disc brake that mechanically
stops the rotation. When the swing lock monitor is lit, the brake
remains applied.
Wiper Monitor
Monitor (3) indicates operating ststus of the wiper.
The monitor display when wiper switch is operated, as follows.
When ON lights up: Wiper moves continuously
When INT lights up: Wiper moves intermittently
OFF: Wiper stops
For details of the positions of the wiper switch, see "CONTROLS
AND GAUGES (PAGE 3-3)".
Auto-deceleration Monitor
Monitor (4) shows if the auto-deceleration is being actuated.
The monitor display when auto-deceleration switch is operated, as
follows.
Auto-deceleration monitor ON: Auto-deceleration actuated
Auto-deceleration monitor OFF: Auto-deceleration canceled
For details of the positions of the auto-deceleration switch, see
"CONTROLS AND GAUGES (PAGE 3-3)".
3 - 18
.
Working Mode Monitor

This monitor (5) displays the setting of the working mode.
The monitor display is as follows according to the operation of the
working mode switch.
P: P mode (for heavy-load operations)
E: E mode (for operations with emphasis on fuel consumption)
L: L mode (for fine control operations)
B: B mode (for breaker operations)
ATT: ATT mode (for crusher operations)
For details of the positions of the working mode switch, see
"CONTROLS AND GAUGES (PAGE 3-3)".
Travel Speed Monitor

This monitor (6) shows the setting for the travel speed.
The monitor display is as follows according to the operation of the
travel speed selector switch.
Lo: Low-speed travel
Hi: High-speed travel
For details of the positions of the travel speed selector switch,
see "CONTROLS AND GAUGES (PAGE 3-3)".
One-Touch Power Max. Monitor

This monitor (7) shows if the one-touch power max. function is
being actuated.
The monitor display when the knob switch on the left control lever
is operated is as follows. (The actual monitor display is shown at
the position of preheating monitor (1).)
Monitor lights up: Digging power is increased while knob switch is

kept pressed.
For details of the positions of the knob switch, see "CONTROLS
AND GAUGES (PAGE 3-3)".
REMARK
Only when the working mode is P or E or ATT mode, the power is
increased while the knob switch is being pressed. Even if the knob
switch continues to be pressed, the power increase is finished after
8.5 seconds.
Monitor goes out: Power max function stopped
3 - 19
.
Air Conditioner Monitor

This monitor (8) displays the working state of the air conditioner.
Monitor is lit: Air conditioner ON

Monitor off: Air conditioner OFF
Idle Stop Guidance

If the levers are not operated for more than 5 minutes, and the
engine is at idle, the idle stop message is displayed on the monitor.
When waiting for work or stopping work for a short periods, stop the
engine to reduce unnecessary fuel consumption.
The idle stop message screen returns to the standard screen

any lever is operated again or when switch F5 (Back) is pressed.
3 - 20
.
Gauges and Meter
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

This meter (10) shows the engine coolant temperature.
During normal operations, the indicator should be in the green
range. If the indicator goes beyond red range (A) during
operations, the overheat prevention system is actuated.
(A) to (B): Red range
(A) to (C): Green range
(C) to (D): White range
The overheat prevention system is actuated as follows.

Red range (A) position: Engine coolant temperature monitor (E) shows abnormality display
Red range (B) position: Engine speed changes to Low idle (MIN), engine coolant temperature monitor (E) shows
abnormality display, alarm buzzer sounds at same time
The overheat prevention system continues to work until the indicator enters the green range.
When the engine is started, if the indicator is at position (C), engine coolant temperature monitor (E) shows the
low-temperature display.
If this happens, perform the warm-up operation. For details, see "Engine Warm Up (PAGE 3-140)".
Display (G) at low temperatures: Monitor background (K) is white

Display (H) at correct temperatures: Monitor background (K) is
blue
Display (J) when condition is abnormal: Monitor background (K)
is red
3 - 21
.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge

This meter (11) shows the hydraulic oil temperature.
range.
If the indicator enters the red range (A) during operations, the
hydraulic oil temperature is 102°C (215.6°F) or more. Run the
engine at Low idle (MIN) or stop it and wait for the hydraulic oil
temperature to go down.
(A) to (B): Red range
(A) to (D): Green range
(D) to (C): White range
REMARK
When the indicator reaches red range (A), the hydraulic oil temperature is as follows.
Red range (A) position: 102°C (215.6°F) or more
Red range (B) position: 105°C (221°F) or more
When the indicator is in red range (A) to (B), hydraulic oil temperature monitor (E) shows the abnormality display.
When the engine is started, if the indicator is at position (C) and the hydraulic oil temperature is 20°C (68°F),
hydraulic oil temperature monitor (E) shows the low-temperature display. If this happens, perform the warm-up
operation. For details, see "Hydraulic Equipment Warm Up (PAGE 3-142)".
Display (G) at low temperatures: Monitor background (K) is white

Display (H) at correct temperatures: Monitor background (K) is
blue
Display (J) when condition is abnormal: Monitor background (K)
is red
Fuel Gauge
This meter (13) shows the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
range.
If the indicator starts to enter red range (A) during operation, there
is less than 50 liters (13.21 US gal) of fuel remaining, so carry out
inspection and add fuel.
(A) to (B): Indicates red range
(A) to (C): Indicates green range
REMARK
When the indicator reaches red range (B), there is less than 39
liters (10.30 US gal) of fuel remaining.
When the indicator is in red range (B), fuel level monitor (D) lights
up red.
The correct fuel level may not be displayed for a short time when the starting switch is turned ON, but this is not an
abnormality.
3 - 22
.
Service Meter, Clock

This meter (13) shows the total hours of operation of the machine
or the present time.
When the engine is running, the service meter advances even if
the machine is not moving. The service meter advances 1 for
every hour that the machine is working, regardless of the engine
speed.
When the standard screen is being displayed, if switch F4 is

pressed, it is possible to switch between the clock display and
the service meter display.
Clock display (12-hour or 24-hour displays are available)
To set or correct the time, press switch F6 (user mode switch).
3 - 23
.
ECO Gauge
This gauge (14) shows the working load state.
When the gauge is in green range A, the work load is light to
medium. When the gauge is in orange range B, the load is heavy.
When the gauge enters the orange range, there is no

abnormality on the machine, but to protect the environment,
reduce the engine output to a point where there is no adverse
effect on the operation. Generally, perform energy-saving
operations in the green range. Reducing the frequency of travel
also helps to save energy. Consider the best way of saving
energy.
3 - 24
.
Monitor Switches Portion
(1) Working mode selector switch (5) Window washer switch

(2) Auto-deceleration switch (6) Buzzer cancel switch
(3) Travel speed selector switch (7) Function switches
(4) Wiper switch (8) Air conditioner switch
Working Mode Selector Switch

Use this switch (1) to set the movement or power of the work
equipment.
The operation becomes easier if the mode is selected to match the
content of the operation.
P mode: For heavy-load operations
E mode: For operation with emphasis on fuel consumption
L mode: For fine control operations
B mode: For breaker operations
ATT mode: For double-acting circuit attachment, such as crusher
(attachment-ready machines)
When the monitor first appears, it is automatically set to the

mode in use when it was started the previous time.
Press switch (1) to display the working mode selection screen.
For each set mode, the pilot monitor at the top right of the
monitor display shows P, E, L, B, ATT.
3 - 25
.
For machines ready for attachment, the attachment mode is added to the display.
For details of the method for handling machines ready for attachment, see the ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
Section.
When the monitor starts up, if the working mode setting is B
mode, the confirmation message on the right is displayed and
the buzzer sounds.
When starting up and staying in B mode, always press switch F6
(Yes).
If you press F5 (No), the system starts up in E mode.
If you want to have automatic setting of the P, E, L, B or ATT mode when starting (optional default setting), ask
your Komatsu distributor to change the setting.
3 - 26
.
Procedure for operation

1. If working mode selector switch (1) is pressed, the Working
Mode screen is displayed on the monitor.
2. Press switches F3 or F4 at the bottom of the screen or working
mode selector switch (1) to change the mode selection one at
a time.
If no switch is touched for more than 5 seconds, the selected

working mode is automatically set as the working mode and
the screen changes to steps 3 and steps 4.
REMARK
To return to the standard screen without changing the working
mode, press switch F5.
3. After selecting the desired mode, press switch F6 and the

mode is displayed in the center of the monitor display.
(Example: If power mode is selected: P)
4. After 2 seconds, the pilot monitor display at the top right of the
screen is highlighted in orange.
After 2 seconds, the screen returns to the standard screen.

The monitor display highlighted in orange in steps 4 returns to
blue.
3 - 27
.
REMARK
When setting the working mode to B mode, to ensure safety, the
buzzer sounds and at the same time, the message in the
illustration on the right is displayed. When setting to the breaker
mode, always press switch F6.
If switch F5 is pressed, the breaker mode is not set, and the

screen returns to working mode selection screen.
NOTICE
When using the breaker, set to B mode. If B mode is not used, there is danger that the breaker may break.
3 - 28
.
Auto-deceleration Switch
If the control levers are at neutral, this switch (2) automatically
lowers the engine speed and turns on the function to reduce fuel
consumption.
Auto-deceleration monitor ON: Auto-deceleration ON
Auto-deceleration monitor OFF: Auto-deceleration OFF
Each time the switch is pressed, the auto-deceleration is switched
between ON and OFF.
Auto-deceleration function
When the auto-deceleration function is ON, if the work
equipment control and travel levers are returned to N position,
the engine speed will drop after 4 seconds from the operating
speed to idle speed.
This makes it possible to reduce fuel consumption.
If any lever is operated when the machine is in this condition,
engine speed will return to the previous operating speed to
make it possible to perform operations.
1. When auto-deceleration switch (2) is pressed and the

auto-deceleration function is turned ON, the mode is displayed
in the center of the monitor display, and after 2 seconds, the
screen returns to the standard screen.
2. On the standard screen, the Auto-deceleration monitor lights

up.
(When the auto-deceleration is OFF, it does not light up.)
3 - 29
.
Travel Speed Selector Switch
WARNING
When loading or unloading the machine on a trailer, always travel at low speed (set to Lo). Never operate the travel speed
selector switch when traveling.
If the Hi-Lo switch is operated when the machine is traveling, the machine may deviate to one side even when it is traveling in
a straight line. Always stop the machine before changing the travel speed.
The area at the rear of the machine is a blind spot. Always checking the area at the rear of the machine by the camera image
before driving in reverse.
Switch (3) is used to set the travel speed to 2 stages.

Lo lights up : Low-speed travel
Hi lights up : Hi-speed travel
When the engine is started, the speed is automatically set to Lo.
Each time that the switch is pressed, the display changes Lo 
Hi  Lo in turn.
When traveling in high speed (Hi), if travel power is needed, such

as when traveling on soft ground or on slopes, the speed
automatically switches to low speed (Lo), so there is no need to
operate the switch. The monitor display stays at Hi.
REMARK
Each time travel speed selector switch (3) is switched, the mode is
displayed on the monitor display, and after 2 seconds, the screen
returns to the standard screen.
3 - 30
.
Wiper Switch
This switch (4) actuates the front window wiper.
Each time the switch is pressed, it changes ON → INT → stop
(OFF).
Wiper monitor INT is lit: Wiper operates intermittently
Wiper monitor ON is lit: Wiper operates continuously
Wiper monitor OFF: Wiper stops
REMARK
Each time wiper switch (4) is pressed, the mode is displayed in the
center of the monitor display, and after 2 seconds, the screen
returns to the standard screen.
3 - 31
.
Window Washer Switch

This switch (5) is kept continuously pressed, window washer fluid
is sprayed out on the front glass. When the switch is released, the
spray stops.
If switch (5) is kept pressed when the wiper is stopped, the

window washer fluid will spray, and at the same time, the wiper
will be actuated continuously. When switch (5) is released, the
wiper will continue to operate for 2 cycles, then stop.
If the wiper is moving intermittenly and switch (5) is kept pressed
continuously, window washer fluid will spray, and at the same
time, the wiper will be actuated continuously. When switch (5) is
released, the wiper will continue to operate for 2 cycles, then
return to intermittent operation.
Buzzer Cancel Switch

When this switch (6) is pressed, the warning buzzer for the
abnormal warning item stops.
3 - 32
.
Function Switches
Function switches (7) consist of 6 switches (F1 to F6). The
function of each switch differs according to the content of each
screen.
When the monitor display shows the standard screen, the
functions are displayed as follows.
F3: Camera screen selector switch

F4: Service meter/time display selector switch
F5: Maintenance mode switch
F6: User mode switch
F1 and F2 are auxiliary switches for expanded functions.
For explanation of each switch, see "Handling Function Switches

(PAGE 3-34)".
Air Conditioner Switch

The air conditioner switches (8) consist of 9 switches.
For explanation of each switch, see "AIR CONDITIONER

CONTROLS (PAGE 3-89)".
3 - 33
.
Handling Function Switches

The function switches (A) at the bottom of the monitor display
consist of 6 switches (F1 to F6). The function of each switch
differs according to the content of each screen.
The of switches (A) on each screen can be confirmed by
guidance icons (B) displayed on top of each switch.
If there is no display in guidance icon (B), even if switch (A) is
pressed, it will not function.
Even if guidance icon (B) is pressed, it will not function. Press
switch (A) immediately below the guidance icon display to
operate the function.
The operation of the function switches if the initial screen is the standard screen is as follows.
Camera Screen Selector Mode Switch

On machines with a camera (if equipped), press switch F3 to
switch to the camera screen display.
On machines not equipped with a camera, the guidance icon on
top of switch F3 is not displayed.
Even if switch F3 is pressed, the screen will not switch to the
camera screen display.
A maximum of 3 cameras can be installed.
If you want to install a camera, consult your Komatsu distributor.
3 - 34
.
Operations on Camera 1 Image Display Screen

The following explanation describes the method of operation when it is desired to display only 1 camera screen on
the monitor.
On the standard screen, if switch F3 is pressed, the image
display screen is displayed.
Press switch F1 to display all the screens for images from the
No. 1 camera.
No. 2 camera.
No. 3 camera.
REMARK
If the machine is not equipped with a No. 2 camera or No. 3
camera, guidance icons (a), (b), and (c) are not displayed.
Press switch F5 to return to the standard screen.
3 - 35
.
Operation of Image Display Screen When 2 Camera Screens are Shown Simultaneously.
The following explanation describes the method of operation when it is desired to display 2 camera screens at the
same time on the monitor.
On the No. 1 camera image display screen, if switch F4 is
pressed, No. 1 camera image (d) and No. 2 camera image (e)
are displayed.
Even if 3 cameras are installed, only the images from the No. 1
camera and No. 2 camera can be displayed at the same time.
When 2 screens are displayed at the same time, the display
changes more slowly than when only 1 screen is displayed.
3 - 36
.
Other Mode Operations When Displaying Camera Image

Even during the camera display, it is possible to operate other
modes.
The air conditioner can be operated.
If the air conditioner switch is operated, the screen switches to
the air conditioner control screen. If the screen switches to the
air conditioner control screen, press switch F6 to return to the
camera image screen. In addition, if no operation is performed
for 5 seconds after the screen switches to the air conditioner
control screen, the screen automatically returns to the camera
image screen.
For details of the operation of the air conditioner, see "AIR
CONDITIONER CONTROLS (PAGE 3-89)".
It is possible to change the working mode by pressing the

working mode selector switch.
For details of the method of using the working mode selector
switch, see "Working Mode Selector Switch (PAGE 3-25)".
When the working mode is changed, the screen returns
automatically to the camera image screen. When this happens,
the pilot monitor display at the top right of the monitor screen is
highlighted in yellow for 2 seconds, then returns to blue.
It is possible to change the travel speed by pressing the travel

speed selector switch.
For details of the method of using the travel speed selector
switch, see "Travel Speed Selector Switch (PAGE 3-30)".
When the travel speed is changed, the pilot monitor display at
the top right of the monitor screen is highlighted in yellow for 2
seconds, then returns to blue.
3 - 37
.
Press the auto-deceleration switch to turn the auto-deceleration

function ON/OFF.
Even if the auto-deceleration switch is pressed, the camera

image display screen does not switch to another screen or
return to the standard screen display.
It is possible to press the buzzer cancel switch to stop the alarm

buzzer for the warning item where there is an abnormality.
Even if the buzzer cancel switch is pressed, the camera image

display screen does not switch to another screen or return to the
standard screen display.
Press the wiper switch and washer switch to operate the wipers
and washer.
Even if the wiper switch or washer switch is pressed, the camera

image display screen does not switch to another screen or
return to the standard screen display.
3 - 38
.
Action When Warning is Generated When Displaying Camera Image

If an error or alarm occurs while the camera image is being
displayed, the error monitor or alarm monitor is displayed at the
top left of the screen and flashes.
If the error monitor or alarm monitor is displayed, press switch

F6, return to the standard screen, and check the content of the
error or alarm display.
When the error monitor is flashing, if no lever is operated for
more than 10 seconds, the screen automatically returns to the
standard screen.
When the screen returns to the standard screen, the error
monitor at the top left of the screen goes out and the error or
alarm is displayed in the center of the screen.
If an error monitor is displayed, move the machine, set it in a
safe posture, then have inspection performed immediately.
For details of the content of the warning displays, see "Basic
Check Monitors (PAGE 3-15)", "Caution Monitors (PAGE 3-13)",
"Emergency Monitors (PAGE 3-11)" and "TROUBLES AND
ACTIONS (PAGE 3-200)".
3 - 39
.
Service Meter/Clock Display Selector Switch

On the standard screen, it is possible to press switch F4 to switch
the service meter and clock display at the top of the monitor
display.
When the time is being displayed, press switch F4 to switch to

the service meter display.
When the service meter is being displayed, press switch F4 to
switch to the time display.
3 - 40
.
Maintenance Selector Switch

When switch F5 is pressed on the standard screen, the monitor
display screen switches to the maintenance mode screen.
The items on the maintenance display are as follows.
a b
Engine oil change 500
Engine oil filter change 500
Fuel main filter change 1000
Fuel prefilter change 500
Hydraulic oil filter change 1000
Hydraulic tank breather change 500
Damper case service 1000
Final drive case oil change 1000
Swing machinery case oil change 1000
Hydraulic oil change 5000
a: Maintenance items
b: Default maintenance time settings (h)
c: Time remaining until maintenance (h)
3 - 41
.
Operations on Maintenance List Screen

On the maintenance list screen, it is possible to perform the
following operations with switches F1 to F6.
F1: Displays next page. When on the last page, it displays the first
page.
F2: Displays previous page. When on the first page, it displays the
last page.
F3: Moves to next item (1 line down). When on the last line, it
moves to the first line on the next page.
F4: Moves to previous item (1 line up). When on the first line, it
moves to the last line on the previous page.
F5: Returns to standard screen.
F6: If this switch is kept pressed, the screen changes to the screen
for resetting the remaining time for the selected item (item
highlighted in yellow).
REMARK
When resetting the remaining time, keep switch F6 pressed for at
least 1.5 seconds. If switch F6 is not kept pressed for at least 1.5
seconds, the switch operating sound can be heard, but the screen
does not switch to the screen for resetting the remaining time.
If no switch is operated for 30 seconds on the maintenance list

screen, the screen automatically returns to the standard screen.
On the maintenance list screen, if the time remaining until
maintenance for any item is less than 30 hours, the remaining
time display is highlighted in yellow. If the time remaining until
maintenance becomes 0 hours, the remaining time display is
highlighted in red.
If you want to change the setting for the maintenance time,
3 - 42
.
Operations on Maintenance Time Reset Screen

On the maintenance list screen, if switch F6 is kept pressed for at least 1.5 seconds, the screen changes to the
maintenance time reset screen.
Reset the remaining time on this screen.
1. Press switch F6 when the reset screen is in the condition

shown in the figure on the right. The screen switches to the
reconfirmation screen.
REMARK
It is desired to cancel the reset, press switch F5. The screen
returns to the maintenance list screen.
On the reset screen, if no switch is operated for more than 30
seconds, the screen automatically switches to the maintenance
list screen.
2. The reconfirmation screen shown on the right is displayed.

3. If switch F6 is pressed again, the remaining time is reset and
the screen switches to the maintenance list screen.
REMARK
It is desired to cancel the reset, press switch F5. The screen
returns to the maintenance list screen.
On the reconfirmation screen, if no switch is operated for more
than 30 seconds, the screen automatically switches to the
maintenance list screen.
3 - 43
.
User Mode Selector Switch

When the switch F6 is pressed, the monitor display screen
switches to the setting mode screen for the machine.
On the User Menu screen, it is possible to perform the following

operations with switches F3 to F6.
F3: Moves to next item (1 line down). When on the last line, it
moves to the first line on the next page.
F4: Moves to previous item (1 line up). When on the first line, it
moves to the last line on the previous page.
3 - 44
.
F5: Returns to standard screen.

F6: Switches to setting screen for selected item.
If no switch is operated for 30 seconds on the user menu screen,

the screen automatically returns to the previous screen.
The following items can be set.
a: Breaker/attachment setting
(machines ready for installation of attachment)
b: Message display
(machines equipped with KOMTRAX)
c: Screen adjustment
d: Clock adjustment
e: Language selection
f: Economy mode adjustment
The operation for setting a to f is as follows.
3 - 45
.
Breaker/Attachment Setting
On machines ready for attachment, it is possible on the
breaker/attachment setting menu to adjust the oil flow in B mode
and ATT mode to match the attachment.
For machines that have no attachment, the breaker/attachment
setting mode is not displayed.
Changing Breaker Mode Setting

1. On the standard screen, press switch F6.
2. Select Breaker/Attachment Settings on the user menu, then

press switch F6.
3 - 46
.
3. On the working mode selection screen shown on the right,

select B Breaker and press switch F6.
On the working mode selection screen shown on the right,

it is possible to perform the following operations with
switches F3 to F6.
F3: Moves to next item (1 line down).

F4: Moves to previous item (1 line up).
F5: Returns to user menu screen.
4. The screen switches to the Breaker Select Menu.

Breaker setting selection menu
In breaker Select (a), the oil flow to be set in B mode can be
set to one of 2 set values.
Breaker flow setting menu
In the breaker flow setting (b), the oil flow to be set in B mode
can be changed.
3 - 47
.
On the Breaker Select Menu screen, it is possible to perform the


F5: Returns to previous screen.
Changing breaker setting selection

1. Select breaker setting selection (a) on the breaker setting
menu screen, then press switch F6.
3 - 48
.
2. On the Breaker Select screen, select one of the 2 set values for
the oil flow, then press switch F6.
The default values for the flow setting are both set to 130
liter/min, as shown in the illustration on the right.
To select the oil flow setting, follow the procedure given in
"Changing breaker flow setting (PAGE 3-50)".
The present oil flow set for B mode is marked with a B in front
of the item name as shown in the illustration on the right.
On the Breaker Select Menu and breaker setting selection

menu, it is possible to perform the following operations with
switches F3 to F6.

3 - 49
.
Changing breaker flow setting

1. Select breaker flow setting (b) on the Breaker Select Menu
screen, then press switch F6.
2. On the Breaker Oil Flow Setting screen, select one of the 2 set
values for the oil flow, then press switch F6.
The default values for the oil flow setting are both set to 130
liter/min, as shown in the illustration on the right.
The present oil flow set for B mode is marked with B in front
of the item name as shown in the illustration on the right.
3 - 50
.
On the Breaker Select Menu and Breaker Oil Flow Setting

screen, it is possible to perform the following operations with
switches F3 to F6.

3. On the Breaker Oil Flow Setting screen, change the set oil flow.
After using switches F3 or F4 to change to a suitable oil flow,
press switch F6 to accept the change in the oil flow and
return to the previous screen.
When switch F5 is pressed, no change is made in the oil flow
and the screen returns to the previous screen.
(X): Present oil flow setting

(Y): Min. adjusted oil flow
(Z): Max. adjusted oil flow
3 - 51
.
Changing Attachment Mode Setting

2. Select Breaker/Attachment Settings on the user menu, then

press switch F6.
3 - 52
.
3. On the working mode selection screen shown on the right,

select ATT 2-Way Attachment, then press switch F6.
On the working mode selection screen shown on the right,

it is possible to perform the following operations with
switches F3 to F6.

4. The screen switches to the 2-Way Attachment Select menu.

2-Way Attachment Select menu
In 2-Way Attachment Select (a), the oil flow to be set in ATT
mode can be set to one of 2 set values.
2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting menu
In 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting (b), it is possible to
change the oil flow set for the ATT mode.
3 - 53
.
On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu screen, it is possible to

perform the following operations with switches F3 to F6.

Changing attachment setting selection

1. Select attachment setting selection (a) on the attachment
setting menu screen, then press switch F6.
3 - 54
.
2. On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu, select one of the 2 set

values for the oil flow, then press switch F6.
liters/min, as shown in the illustration on the right.
To change the oil flow setting, follow the procedure given in
"Changing attachment flow setting (PAGE 3-56)".
The present oil flow set for ATT mode is marked with ATT in
front of the item name as shown in the illustration on the
right.
If No 2-Way Attachment is selected, it becomes impossible

to select the attachment mode on the working mode
selection screen.
On the working mode selection screen, it is not possible to select

No 2-Way Attachment.
On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu screen and 2-way

attachment select menu, it is possible to perform the following
operations with switches F3 to F6.

3 - 55
.
Changing attachment flow setting

1. Select 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting (b) on the 2-Way
Attachment Select menu screen, then press switch F6.
2. On the 2-Way Attachment Select Oil Flow Setting screen,

select one of the 2 set values for the oil flow, then press switch
F6.
liters/min, as shown in the illustration on the right.
The present oil flow set for ATT mode is marked with ATT in
front of the item.
"No 2-Way Attachment" cannot be selected
3 - 56
.
On the 2-Way Attachment Select Menu screen and 2-Way

Attachment Select Menu screen, it is possible to perform the

3. On the 2-Way Attachment Oil Flow Setting menu, it is possible

to change the oil flow setting.
After using switches F3 or F4 to change to a suitable oil flow,
press switch F6 to accept the change in the oil flow and
return to the previous screen.
When switch F5 is pressed, no change is made in the oil flow
and the screen returns to the previous screen.
(X): Present oil flow setting

(Y): Min. adjusted oil flow
(Z): Max. adjusted oil flow
3 - 57
.
Message Display
(Machines equipped with KOMTRAX)
On machines equipped with KOMTRAX, it is possible to see the messages from your Komatsu distributor on this
message display menu.
REMARK
At present, there is no territory where it is possible to the use the message service.
In territories where it is not possible to use the message service, the message display menu functions as follows.
2. Select "User Message" on the User Menu, then press switch

F6.
If you press switch F5, the screen returns to the user menu
screen.
3. "No message" is displayed on the screen.

3 - 58
.
Adjusting Screen
Use this screen adjustment menu to adjust the brightness,
contrast, and back light of the screen.
2. Select screen adjustment on the user menu, then press switch

F6. The screen switches to the selection menu screen for
screen adjustment.
On machines equipped with cameras, it is possible to adjust

the brightness, contrast, and back light of the cameras
screen on this menu.
3 - 59
.
3. Select item to be adjusted (a) or (b) from the selection menu

screen for screen adjustment, then press switch F6. The
screen switches to the setting screen for the selected item.
(a): Standard screen adjustment

(b): Camera screen adjustment (only machines equipped with
camera)
On the mode selection screen shown on the right, it is

possible to perform the following operations with switches
F3 to F6.

REMARK
If the machine is not equipped with a camera, the selection menu
for screen adjustment is not displayed.
If screen adjustment is selected from the user menu, the
adjustment screen in step 4 is displayed.
4. Use switches F2 to F6 to adjust the brightness, contrast, and

back light of the selected screen.
1) Adjustment screen for standard screen

If the light switch is at night mode ON, and the standard
screen is adjusted, it is possible to adjust the brightness
of the monitor screen (night mode).
If the light switch is at day mode ON or OFF, and the
standard screen is adjusted, it is possible to adjust the
brightness of the monitor screen (day mode).
2) Adjusting camera screen
The background when adjusting the camera image is
the image for the No. 1 camera.
When displaying the camera screen, the screen may
become dark if the image is on snow. In such cases, we
recommend adjustment of the screen.
3 - 60
.
On the screen for Items 1) and 2), it is possible to perform the

F2: Resets all adjusted values to default value

F3: Indicator of selected item moves 1 segment to left.
F4: Indicator of selected item moves 1 segment to right.
F5: Returns to user menu.
F6: Accepts change and switches to next item setting.
3 - 61
.
Clock Adjustment
On this clock adjustment menu, it is possible to change the setting
of the clock displayed on the pilot monitor of the standard display.
3 - 62
.
2. Select "Clock Adjustment" on the user menu, then press switch

F6. The screen switches to the time adjustment selection
menu screen.
The following 3 items can be changed.

(a) Clock setting
(b) 12/24 hour display mode
(c) Daylight saving time
3 - 63
.
3. On the clock adjustment selection screen, it is possible to perform the following operations with switches F3 to
F6.
Time
Adjust the hour setting.
1) If "Time" (a) is not highlighted in yellow, press switch F6 to

highlight "Time" (a) in yellow. When this is done, hour
display (b) changes to orange.
Adjust hour display (b) with the switches as follows. If it is
not necessary to change the hour setting, press switch F6.
F3: Time advances 1 hour.

F4: Time goes back 1 hour.
F5: Cancels change and returns to user menu.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for minutes.
3 - 64
.
2) When minute display (c) is highlighted in orange, operate

the switches as follows to adjust minute display (c).
If it is not necessary to change the minute setting, press
switch F6. If the time has been changed, always press
switch F6.
F3: Time advances 1 minute.

F4: Time goes back 1 minute.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for 12/24 hour
display mode.
12h/24h Mode
Choose either a 12-hour display (am/pm) or a 24-hour display.
(b): 24-hour display

(c): 12-hour display (am/pm)
1) If "12h/24h Mode" (a) is not highlighted in yellow, press switch

F6 to highlight "12h/24h Mode" (a) in yellow.
2) Change "12h/24h Mode" with the switches as follows.
The selected display mode (b) or (c) is highlighted in green.
F3: Moves 1 item to left.

F4: Moves 1 item to right.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for "Daylight Saving
Time".
If the setting has been changed, always press switch F6.
3 - 65
.
Daylight Saving Time (Summer time)

1) If daylight saving time is turned ON (a), the clock display
becomes 1 hour earlier. If daylight saving time is turned OFF
(b), the clock display returns to the set time.
The selected display mode is highlighted in green.
2) Change the daylight saving time with the switches as follows.
F3: Moves 1 item to left.

F4: Moves 1 item to right.
F6: Accepts change and goes to setting for "Time".
If the setting has been changed, always press switch F6.
REMARK
Daylight saving time or summer time means moving the clock
forward 1 hour to take advantage of the fact that the sun rises early
in summer. This system is used in many countries during the
summer.
3 - 66
.
Language Selection
On this language selection menu, it is possible to select the language used on the monitor display.
The languages that can be selected are as follows.

Japanese, English, Chinese, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, German, Russian, Turkish, Indonesian, Thai
2. Select "Language" on the user menu, then press switch F6.

The screen switches to the language selection menu screen.
3 - 67
.
3. Select the language to use for the display, then press switch
F6. The screen display changes to the selected language.
On the language selection screen, it is possible to perform

the following operations with switches F3 to F6.
F3: Moves to item below.

F4: Moves to item above.
F5: Cancels change and returns to user menu screen.
F6: Accepts change and returns to user menu screen.
Adjusting Economy Mode

With this economy mode, the engine output can be adjusted to improve the fuel consumption in E mode.
3 - 68
.
2. Select "Economy Mode Adjustment" on the user menu, then

press switch F6.
The screen switches to the economy mode adjustment
selection menu screen.
3. Select the desired E mode from the economy mode

adjustment selection menu.
The levels that can be set are as follows.
E0: Default
E1: Economy Adjustment 1
The higher the selection is made from E0 to E3, the better

the fuel consumption becomes, but the production is
reduced accordingly.
When the machine is shipped, it is set to E0.
On the Economy Mode Adjustment menu screen, it is
possible to perform the following operations with switches
F3 to F6.
F3: Moves to item below.

F4: Moves to item above.
F5: Cancels change and returns to user menu screen.
F6: Accepts change and returns to user menu screen.
3 - 69
.
SWITCHES
(1) Starting switch (7) One-Touch Power Max. Switch

(2) Fuel control dial (8) Room lamp switch
(3) Cigarette lighter (9) Emergency pump drive switch
(4) Swing lock switch (10) Swing parking brake releasel switch
(5) Lamp switch (11) Revolving warning lamp switch (if equipped)
(6) Horn switch (12) Roof glass wiper switch (if equipped)
Starting Switch
Starting switch (1) is used to start or stop the engine.
(A): OFF position

The key can be inserted or withdrawn. Switches for the electrical
system (except room lamp), are all turned off and the engine is
stopped.
(B): ON position
Electric current flows through the charging and lamp circuits. Keep
starting switch key in ON position while the engine is running.
(C): START position

This is the engine-start position. Keep the key at this position during cranking. Immediately after starting the engine,
release the key. It will automatically return to ON position (B).
3 - 70
.
(D): HEAT position

Set to this position when starting the engine in cold weather.
When the starting key is turned to HEAT position (D), the preheating monitor lights up. Keep the key in this position
until the preheating monitor flashes. When the preheating monitor flashes, release the key immediately. When the
key is released, it will return automatically to OFF position (A), so turn it immediately to START position (C) and start
the engine.
Fuel Control Dial

Dial (2) adjusts the engine speed and output.
(a)Low idle (MIN): Turned fully to the left
(b)High idle (MAX): Turned fully to the right
REMARK
On this machine, the engine is electronically controlled to give the
optimum matching with the main pump. There is an area without
any feeling on the dial, but this is not an abnormality.
Range (c): No feeling (engine speed constant)

P mode: 22%
E mode: 30%
Position (d): High idling
Cigarette Lighter
This switch (3) is used when lighting cigarettes.
When the cigarette lighter is pushed in, it will return to its original
position after several seconds, so pull it out to use it.
If the cigarette lighter is removed, the socket can be used as an 85
W (24 V x 3.5 A) power source.
NOTICE
This cigarette lighter is for 24 V. Do not use it as the power source for 12
V equipment.
3 - 71
.
Swing Lock Switch
WARNING
When not using the swing operation, e.g. when traveling, put the swing lock switch to ON position.
On slopes, even when the swing lock switch is at ON position, the weight of the work equipment may cause the upper structure
to swing if the swing control lever is operated in the downhill direction.
This switch (4) is used to lock the upper structure so that it cannot
swing.
(a) ON position (actuated): The swing lock is always applied, and
the upper structure will not swing even
if the swing is operated. In this
condition, the swing lock lamp lights
up.
(b) OFF position (canceled): The swing lock is released, when
operating the swing control lever,
allowing the upper structure to swing.
Lamp Switch
This switch (5) is used to light up the working lamp and monitor
lighting.
(a) Night position: Lamps light up and monitor illumination is set to

night mode.
(b) Day position: Lamps light up and monitor illumination is set to
day mode.
(c) OFF position: Lamps go out.
(The monitor illumination is set to day mode.)
Horn Switch
This switch (6) is used to sound the horn.
Press the switch on the right work equipment control lever to sound
the horn.
3 - 72
.
One-Touch Power Max. Switch

This switch (7) on the left work equipment control lever is used to
actuate the power max functions.
Press once (single click) and keep the switch pressed. The
one-touch power max. function is actuated for a maximum of 8.5
seconds at P and E mode.
Room Lamp Switch
NOTICE
It is possible to turn on the interior cab room lamp even when starting
switch is in OFF position, do not forget to turn it off.
This switch (8) is used to light up the room lamp.

(a) ON position: Lamp lights up
(b) OFF position: Lamp goes out
The room lamp lights up even when the starting switch is at OFF
position.
Emergency Pump Drive Switch
NOTICE
This switch is provided to enable you to perform operation temporarily, when any problem occurs on the pump control system.
Do not use it except in emergency. Furthermore, remove the cause of the problem immediately.
If this switch is depressed and moved to EMERGENCY position by mistake, thereby engaging the machine in the work, while
the machine is in normal condition, an "E02" mark is shown in the display.
If "E02" is displayed during the work, check that the switch is in NORMAL position.
This switch (9) is used to make it possible to perform operations

temporarily if any problem should occur in the pump control system
(when the display shows "E02").
(a) EMERGENCY: When abnormal (move switch up)

(b) NORMAL: When normal (move switch down)
If the display shows "E02", move the switch up to make it possible

to perform work.
3 - 73
.
Swing Parking Brake Cancel Switch
NOTICE
This switch makes it possible to perform swing operations for a short time even when there is a problem in the swing parking
brake system. DO NOT use this switch except in emergencies. Repair the problem as soon as possible.
This switch (10) is used to make it possible to perform operations

temporarily if any problem should occur in the swing brake system
(when the upper structure does not swing but the display does not
show "E03").
(a) FREE: When abnormal (move switch up)

(b) NORMAL: When normal (move switch down)
If the display does not show "E03", move the switch up to FREE
position (a) to make it possible to perform work.
When the switch is moved to FREE position (a), the swing lock
monitor flashes.
Revolving Warning Lamp Switch

(if equipped)
Use this switch (11) to light up the yellow rotating lamp on top of the
cab.
(a) ON: Lamps light up
(b) OFF: Lamps go off
Roof Glass Wiper Switch

(if equipped)
This switch (12) actuates the cab roofs glass wiper and window
washer fluids.
Wiper position (a): Roof glass wiper is actuated
Washer position (b) is as:

When the switch is kept pressed, washer fluid is sprayed out onto
the roof glass and the wiper is actuated.
When the switch is released, it returns to position (a). The washer
fluid stops, and only the roof glass wiper continues to be actuated.
Stop position (c): Roof glass wiper stops
3 - 74
.
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS
(1) Lock lever (3) Left work equipment control lever

(2) Travel levers (with auto-deceleration system)
(with pedal and auto-deceleration system) (4) Right work equipment control lever
(with auto-deceleration system)
3 - 75
.
Lock Lever
WARNING
When standing up from the operator's seat, set the lock lever securely to LOCK position. If the lock lever is not at LOCK position
and the control levers or control pedals are touched by mistake, it may lead to serious personal injury or death.
Check that the lock lever is securely in LOCK position.
When pulling up or pushing down the lock lever, be careful not to touch the work equipment control levers. Check that the work
equipment control levers do not catch any clothes.
This lever (1) is a device to lock the work equipment, swing, travel,
and attachment (if equipped) control levers.
Be sure to operate the lock lever by the operating portion (g). Do
not hold the red bar on the top of the console to operate it.
(L) LOCK position: The red bar on the top of the console is
lowered, and the machine does not move even
if you operate the control levers or attachment
control pedals (if equipped).
(F) FREE position: The red bar on the top of the console rises, and
it blocks the passage. The machine moves in
response to the operation of levers or
attachment control pedals (if equipped).
REMARK
This lock lever is of hydraulic lock type. Accordingly, when it is in LOCK position (L), the control levers or control
pedals move but the machine does not move.
3 - 76
.
Travel Levers
WARNING
Do not rest your foot on the pedal during operations. If the pedal is depressed by mistake, the machine may suddenly move
and cause a serious accident. Be extremely careful when operating the pedal for travel or steering operations. When you are
not using the pedal, do not rest your foot on it.
If the track frame is facing the rear, the direction of travel operations will be reversed when the travel lever is operated. (The
machine will travel forward when operated in reverse, and in reverse when operated forward; the left and right directions will
also be reversed.)
When operating the travel levers, check if the track frame is facing the front or the rear. (If the sprocket is at the rear, the track
frame is facing the front.)
This lever (2) is used to change the direction of travel between

forward and reverse. ( ) shows the pedal operation.
(a) FORWARD: The lever is pushed forward
(The pedal is angled forward)
(b) REVERSE: The lever is pulled back
(The pedal is angled back)
N (NEUTRAL): The machine stops
REMARK
If the lever is shifted to FORWARD or REVERSE position from
NEUTRAL position, the alarm sounds to warn that the machine is
starting to move.
3 - 77
.
Work Equipment Control Lever

Left work equipment control lever (3) is used to operate the arm
and upper structure.
Arm operation
(a) Arm OUT
(b) Arm IN
Swing operation
(c) Swing RIGHT
(d) Swing LEFT
N (NEUTRAL): The upper structure and arm are held in position

and do not move.
Right work equipment control lever (4) is used to operate the boom
and bucket.
Boom operation
(a) RAISE
(b) LOWER
Bucket operation
(c) DUMP
(d) CURL
N (NEUTRAL): The boom and bucket are held in position and do

not move.
3 - 78
.
SUN ROOF
WARNING
When leaving the operator's seat, set the lock lever securely to LOCK position.
If the lock lever is at FREE position and the control levers or control pedals is touched by mistake, this may lead to a serious
accident.
Opening
1. Operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever (1) to set it
securely to LOCK position (L).
2. Push up lock (A) in the front center of the roof window and
check that the lock is released. Then hold grip (B) and push up
the roof window.
Closing
Hold grasping grip (B), lower the ceiling window, and apply lock (A). If the lock cannot be applied, open the ceiling
window, then pull it in again and apply the lock.
3 - 79
.
WINDSHIELD
WARNING
When opening or closing the front window, bottom window, or door, always set the lock lever to LOCK position.
If the lock lever is at FREE position and the control levers or control pedals is touched by mistake, this may lead to a serious
accident.
When opening or closing the front window, stop the machine on horizontal ground, lower the work equipment completely to
the ground, stop the engine, then perform the operation.
When opening the front window, hold the grip securely with both hands, pull up, and do not let go until the automatic lock catch
is locked.
When closing the front window, the window will move quicker under its own weight. Hold the grips securely with both hands
when closing it.
It is possible to stow (pull up) the front window in the roof of the operator's compartment.
Opening
1. Stop the machine on level ground, lower the work equipment completely to the ground, then stop the engine.
3. Check that the wiper blade is stowed in the right stay.

If the wiper blade is stowed in wrong stowing position (b), lift it
to move to the correct stowing position (a), or ask your
Komatsu distributor for repair.
(a) Correct stowing position
The wiper blade is on the cab.
(b) Wrong stowing position
The wiper blade is on the glass.
3 - 80
.
4. Hold 2 grips (A) on the left and right top sides of the front
window, and pull the 2 levers (B) to release the locks at the top
of the front window. The top of the front window will come out.
3 - 81
.
5. Hold lower knob (C) with your left hand from inside the
operator's cab, and with your right hand, grip top knob (D), pull
it up, and push it against lock catch (E) at the rear of the cab
securely to lock the window.
6. Check that lever (B) is securely at LOCK position.

The lock is engaged if the arrow on lock case (F) matches
the position of the arrow on lever (B). Check visually.
If the arrow on lock case (F) does not match the position of
the arrow on lever (B), the lock is not engaged. Repeat the
operation in step 5 to engage the lock.
3 - 82
.
Closing
WARNING
When closing the window, lower it slowly and be careful not to get your hand caught.
NOTICE
Check that the wiper blade is stowed at the correct position (a), and close
the front window.
If the front window is closed when the wiper blade is being stowed at the
wrong position (b), the wiper blade may break. Take care.
1. Stop the machine on level ground, lower the work equipment

completely to the ground, then stop the engine.
3. Check that the wiper blade is stowed in the right stay.

If the wiper blade is stowed in wrong stowing position (b), lift it
to move to the correct stowing position (a), or ask your
Komatsu distributor for repair.
(a) Correct stowing position
The wiper blade is on the cab.
(b) Wrong stowing position
The wiper blade is on the glass.
3 - 83
.
4. Grip left and right handles (A), and pull down lever (B) to
release the lock.
5. Grip handle (C) at the bottom of the front window with your left
hand and handle (D) at the top with your right hand, push to the
front, then lower slowly.
6. When the bottom of the window reaches the top of the bottom
window, push the top of the window to the front to push it
against left and right lock catches (G) and engage the lock.
7. Check that lever (B) is securely at LOCK position.

The lock is engaged if the arrow on lock case (F) matches
the position of the arrow on lever (B). Check visually.
If the arrow on lock case (F) does not match the position of
the arrow on lever (B), the lock is not engaged. Repeat the
operation in step 5 to engage the lock.
3 - 84
.
Removing Lower Windshield

1. Open the front window, then hold grip (1), pull up, and remove
the bottom window.
If sand or dust is collected at the bottom of the front window, it

will be difficult to remove the window. In addition, when stowing,
the sand and dust stuck to the glass will be carried inside the
cab. To prevent this, clean area (A) before removing.
2. After removing the lower windshield, store it at the right rear of

the operator's cab, and set lever (2) to LOCK position (B) to
hold it securely in position.
3. When removing it, set lever (2) to RELEASE position (C), hold
the glass with both hands, and pull it up.
3 - 85
.
EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER

CAUTION
If it is necessary to break the window glass with the hammer, be extremely careful not to injure yourself on the flying pieces
of broken glass.
To prevent injury, remove the broken pieces of glass remaining in the frame before escaping through the window. Be careful
also not to slip on the broken pieces of glass.
If it should become impossible to open the cab door for any reason,
and it is necessary to make an emergency escape from the
operator's compartment, use hammer (A) to escape.
To escape from the operator's cab, use hammer (A) to break the
glass and escape through the window.
DOOR LOCK
WARNING
Before the releasing the door lock, always stop the machine on flat ground.
Never release the door lock on a slope. The door may suddenly close and cause injury.
When releasing the door lock, do not extend your body or hands outside the machine and do not put your hands on the door
frame. The door may suddenly close and cause injury.
Use the door lock to fix the door in position after opening it.
1. Push the door against catch (1) to lock it in position.
2. When closing the door, push down the lever (2) on the left of
the operator's seat to release the catch.
3. When attaching the door in position, lock it firmly to the catch.
3 - 86
.
CAP WITH LOCK

Use the starting switch key to open and close the locks on the caps and covers.
For details of the locations of the caps and covers with locks, see "LOCKING (PAGE 3-178)".
Insert the key as far as it will go to the shoulder (A). If the key is
turned before it is inserted all the way, it may break.
Opening and Closing Caps with Lock
Opening the Cap

1. Insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the key clockwise, align the key groove with mark (1) on
the cap, then open the cap.
Position (A): OPEN
Position (B): LOCK
Locking the Cap

1. Turn the cap until tight, then insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the starting switch key to LOCK position (B), then remove the key.
Opening and Closing Cover with Lock
Opening the Cover (Locked Cover)

1. Insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise and open the cover by pulling
the cover grip.
(A): OPEN
(B): LOCK
Locking the Cover

1. Close the cover and insert the key into the key slot.
2. Turn the key clockwise and take the key out.
3 - 87
.
DRINK BOX
This is on the right side at the rear of the operator's seat. It keeps
drinks and other things hot or cold.
Hot or cold air blows into the box according to the setting of the air
conditioner.
MAGAZINE BOX
(The cup holder is provided separately at the front of the magazine box.)
Located on left side of the operator's seat.
Keep the Operation and Maintenance Manual in this box so that it
can be taken out and read whenever necessary.
ASHTRAY
This is on top of the console box on the left side of the operator's
seat.
Always put out your cigarette before putting it in the ashtray and be
sure to close the lid.
3 - 88
.
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS
Air Conditioner Control Panel
(1) OFF switch (6) FRESH/RECIRC selector switch

(2) Fan switch (7) Display monitor
(3) Temperature control switch (8) Air conditioner switch
(4) Vent selector switch (9) Sunlight sensor
(5) Auto switch
OFF Switch
Switch (1) is used to stop the fan and air conditioner.
REMARK
Even if this switch (1) is pressed, the monitor screen does not
switch to the air conditioner adjustment screen.
3 - 89
.
Fan Switch
Switch (2) is used to adjust the air flow.
The air flow can be adjusted to 6 levels.
Press the E switch to increase the air flow; press the R switc
h to decrease the air flow.
During auto operation, the air flow is automatically adjusted.
Monitor display and air flow

A: Liquid crystal display
B: Air flow
a: Air flow "low"
b: Air flow "medium 1"
c: Air flow "medium 2"
d: Air flow "medium 3"
e: Air flow "medium 4"
f: Air flow "high"
Temperature Control Switch

Switch (3) is used to control temperature inside the cab. The
temperature can be set between 18°C (64.4°F) and 32°C (89.6°
F).
Press the E switch to raise the set temperature; press the R
switch to lower the set temperature.
The temperature is generally set at 25°C (77°F).

The temperature can be set in stages of 0.5°C (0.9°F).
<Monitor display and the function>

When the temperature is set to the minimum (18.0°C (64.4°F)), the air flow is fixed to the maximum cooling
temperature.
When the temperature is set to 18.5 to 31.5°C (65.3 to 88.7°F), the temperature in the cab is adjusted to the set
temperature.
When the temperature is set to the maximum (32.0°C (89.6°F)), the air flow is fixed to the maximum heating
temperature.
REMARK
If the mode is set to auto mode and the temperature setting is set to 18.0 °C (64.4 °F) or 32.0 °C (89.6 °F), the air
flow from the fan is always set to HIGH and does not change even when the set temperature is reached.
3 - 90
.
Vent Selector Switch

Switch (4) is used to select the vents.
When switch (4) is pressed, the display on monitor display (7)
switches and air blows out from the vents displayed.
During automatic operation, the vents are automatically
selected.
(A): Rear vent (4 places)

(B1): Front vent (1 place)
(C): Foot vent (1 place)
(D): Front window glass vent (2 place)
(B2): Front window glass vent (1 place)
3 - 91
.
Auto Switch
With switch (5), the air flow, vents, and air source
(FRESH/RECIRC) are automatically selected according to the set
temperature.
Press switch (5), then use temperature control switch (3) to set
the temperature, and run the air conditioner under automatic
control.
When switching from automatic operation to manual operation,
it is possible to use the switches to select the vents and air
source (FRESH/RECIRC).
REMARK
When Auto Mode is selected, if the set temperature is set to 18.0
°C (64.4 °F) or 32.0 °C (89.6 °F), the air flow is always set to High,
but this is not a problem.
FRESH/RECIRC Selector Switch

Switch (6) is used to switch the air source between recirculation of
the air inside the cab and intake of fresh air from the outside.
During automatic operation, the selection of inside air (RECIRC)
and outside air (FRESH) is performed automatically.
Outside air is shut off and only air inside the cab is circulated.
RECIRC
Use this setting to perform rapid cooling of the cab or when outside air is dirty.
Outside air is taken into the cab.
FRESH
Use this setting to take in fresh air when performing demisting.
Display Monitor
Monitor (7) displays the state of temperature setting (a), air flow (b),
and vents (c).
When OFF switch (1) is pressed, the display of temperature
setting (a) and air flow (b) goes out, and operation stops.
3 - 92
.
Air Conditioner Switch

Switch (8) is used to turn the air conditioner (cooling,
dehumidifying, heating) ON or OFF.
Press air conditioner switch (8) when the fan is operating (when
display (b) is shown on the display monitor). The air conditioner
is switched ON and starts to work. Press the switch again to
stop the air conditioner.
Air conditioner cannot be operated while the fan is off.
Sunlight Sensor
This sensor (9) automatically adjusts the flow of air from the vents
to match the strength of the sun's rays. In addition, it automatically
detects changes in the temperature inside the cab caused by
changes in the strength of the sun's rays beforehand and
automatically adjusts the temperature.
REMARK
Do not put a thing on this sensor (9).
There is a threat that the sensor does not sensor function normally.
3 - 93
.
Method of Operation
The air conditioner can be operated automatically or manually. Select the method of operation as desired.
Automatic Operation
1. Turn auto switch (5) ON.
The monitors for the set temperature (a) and air flow (b) are
also displayed.
2. Use temperature set switch (3) to set to the desired

temperature. The air flow, combination of vents, and selection
of fresh or recirculated air is automatically selected according
to the set temperature, and the air conditioner is operated
automatically to provide the set temperature.
REMARK
When vent display monitor (c) displays (d) or (e), and engine
coolant temperature is low, the air flow is automatically limited to
prevent cold air from blowing out.
3 - 94
.
Stopping Automatic Operation

Press OFF switch (1). Operation stops.
Manual Operation
1. Press fan switch (2) and adjust the air flow. When doing this,
check that temperature setting (a) and air flow (b) are displayed
on the monitor.
2. Turn air conditioner switch (8) ON.
3 - 95
.
3. Press temperature setting switch (3) and adjust temperature

inside the cab.
4. Press vent selector switch (4) and select the desired vents.
When this is done, the display for vent (c) of the display monitor
changes according to the selection.
5. Press FRESH/RECIRC selector switch (6) and select

recirculation of the air inside the cab (RECIRC) or intake of
fresh air from outside (FRESH).
3 - 96
.
Stopping Manual Operation

Press OFF switch (1). Operation stops.
Operation with Cold Air to Face and Warm Air to Feet

To operate with cold air blowing to the face and warm air blowing
to the feet, set as follows.
on the monitor.
2. Press vent selector switch (4) and set the vent display on the
display monitor to the display shown in the figure on the right.
3 - 97
.
3. Turn air conditioner switch (8) ON.
4. Adjust fan switch (2), temperature setting switch (3) and

FRESH/RECIRC selector switch (6) to the desired positions.
3 - 98
.
Defroster Operation
on the monitor.
2. Press vent selector switch (4) and set vent display on the
display monitor to (f) or (g) as shown in figure on the right.
3 - 99
.
3. Press FRESH/RECIRC selector switch (6) and set it to take in

fresh air.
4. Press temperature setting switch (3) and set temperature on

the display (7) monitor to maximum heating.
5. Adjust vents (A), (B1), and (B2) so that the air blows onto the
window glass.
(Vents (C) and (D) are fixed and cannot be adjusted.)
When operating in the rainy season or when it is desired to remove

the mist from the window glass or to dehumidify the air, turn air
conditioner switch (8) ON.
3 - 100
.
Use Air Conditioner with Care
NOTICE
When running the air conditioner, always start with the engine running at low speed. Never start the air conditioner when the
engine is running at high speed. It will cause failure of the air conditioner.
If water gets into the control panel or sunlight sensor, it may lead to unexpected failure, be careful not to let water get on these
parts. In addition, never bring any open flame near these parts.
For the auto function of the air conditioner to work properly, always keep the sunlight sensor clean and do not leave anything
around the sunlight sensor that may interfere with its sensor function.
Ventilation
When running the air conditioner for a long time, turn the lever to FRESH position once 1 hour to perform
ventilation and cooling.
If you smoke when the air conditioner is on, the smoke may start to hurt your eyes, so open the window and turn
the lever to FRESH for a while to remove the smoke while continuing the cooling.
Temperature Control
When the cooler is on, set the temperature so that it feels slightly cool when entering the cab (5 to 6 °C (9 to 10.8
°F) lower than the outside temperature). This temperature difference is considered to be the most suitable for your
health, so always be careful to adjust the temperature properly.
Inspection and maintenance of Air Conditioner Equipped Machine

When performing inspection and maintenance on machines equipped with an air conditioner, perform the
inspection and maintenance according to the chart. For details, see "CHECK AND MAINTENANCE AIR
CONDITIONER (PAGE 4-43)", "CHECK AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION, ADJUST
(PAGE 4-57)", "CLEAN AIR CONDITIONER FRESH/RECIRC FILTERS (PAGE 4-66)".
When the air conditioner is not being used every day, to prevent
loss of the film of oil at various parts, run at the engine at low
speed from time to time and perform cooling or dehumidifying
heating for several minutes.
If the temperature inside the cab is low, the air conditioner may
not work. In this case, circulate fresh air to warm the inside of
the cab. When the air conditioner switch is turned ON, the air
conditioner will work.
If any abnormality is detected in any equipment or sensor used
on the air conditioner, "A/C Controller Error" is displayed on the
air conditioner monitor screen. If "A/C Controller Error" is
displayed, turn the key in starting switch to the OFF position and
stop the engine.
Restart the engine and confirm "A/C Controller Error" is
displayed again.
When outside temperature deteriorates remarkably while use
an air-conditioner, there is the case that "A/C Controller Error" is
displayed.
If "A/C Controller Error" is displayed again, please ask your
Komatsu distributor to carry out inspection and repair.
3 - 101
.
RADIO
The volume control knob type or volume control button type radio is installed. Check which type of radio is installed,
and see the following pages.
"Volume Control Knob Type (PAGE 3-102)"
"Volume Control Button Type (PAGE 3-106)"
Volume Control Knob Type
Control Panel
(1) Power switch, Volume control knob, Balance (5) AS/PS button
control knob (6) Preset station buttons (1,2,3,4,5,6)
(2) SEL button (7) Display
(3) FM/AM selection button (8) Time reset button
(4) Display selection button (9) Tuning button
Power Switch, Volume Control Knob, Balance Control Knob

Press this knob (1) to turn the power for the radio on. The frequency is displayed on display (7). Press the knob
again to turn the power off.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase the volume; press counterclockwise to reduce the volume. The range for the
volume is VOL 0 to VOL 40.
SEL Button
Each time this button (2) is pressed, the mode changes as follows: VOL (volume)  BAS (bass)  TRE (treble) 
BAL (balance). The mode is displayed on display (7). For details of each mode, see "Method of Operating Mode
(PAGE 3-105)".
FM/AM Selection Button (AM/FM)

Press this button (3) to select the desired band.
Each time the button is pressed, the band changes FM  AM  FM . . .
3 - 102
.
Display Selection Button (TIME)

On this machine, priority is given to the frequency display. When the frequency is being displayed, press button (4)
and the display will show the present time for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds pass, the display returns automatically
to the frequency display. If any button other than TIME ADJ (H, M, ADJ) is pressed within 5 seconds, the display
returns to the frequency display. For details of the method of adjusting the time, see "Setting Correct Time (PAGE
3-105)".
AS/PS Button
This button (5) actuates the auto store and preset scan functions.
Auto store
If this button is kept pressed for at least 2 seconds during radio reception, it will automatically search for 6
available AM and FM stations each, starting with the lowest frequency and going up to the highest frequency.
These frequencies can then be saved in the preset memory.
Preset scan
If this button is pressed within 2 seconds, it is possible to select one of the already preset stations. Wait for 6 sec.
after pressing the button and then press the button again to select the next preset station. If it is impossible to
receive the preset frequency, the selection advances after 1 second to the next preset station.
Preset Station Buttons (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

If this button (6) has been used to decide which stations to preset, it is possible to select the desired station at a
touch. It is possible to preset 6 stations each for both AM and FM.
For details of the method of presetting the stations, see "Method of Setting with Preset Button (PAGE 3-104)".
REMARK
The preset button can be used to save the frequency manually. To save the frequency automatically, use the Auto
store button.
Display
This display (7) shows the reception band, frequency, preset No., and time.
Time Reset Button

Use this button (8) when adjusting the time. For details of the method of adjusting the time, see "Setting Correct
Time (PAGE 3-105)".
H: Hour
M: Minute
ADJ: Sets to 00 minutes
Tuning Button (TUNING)

Use this button (9) to change the frequency.
For further details, see "Method of Tuning (PAGE 3-104)"
3 - 103
.
Controls of Radio
Method of Setting with Preset Button

1. Press power switch (1) and display the frequency on display
(7).
2. Use tuning button (9) to set to the desired frequency. There are
2 methods for tuning: auto tuning and manual tuning.
3. With the display (7) showing the desired frequency, keep the
desired Preset button No. pressed for at least 1.5 seconds.
The reception sound will disappear, but when the presetting
operation (saving to memory) is completed, the sound will
appear again and the Preset No. and frequency will be shown
on the display to show that the presetting operation has been
completed.
After completing the presetting, press Preset button (6) and
release it within approximately 1.5 seconds. This will make it
possible to receive the channel preset to that button. One
channel each for AM and FM can be preset to each Preset
button.
REMARK
It is also possible to save to the Preset button by using the auto
store button.
Method of Tuning
1. Press power switch (1) and display the frequency on display (7).
2. Use tuning button (9) to set to the desired frequency. There are 2 methods for tuning: auto tuning and manual
tuning.
Auto tuning
Press tuning button (9) for at least 3 seconds. When a station is picked up, the tuning automatically stops. To
search for the next station, press the tuning button again for at least 3 seconds.
< button: Frequency moves down
> button: Frequency moves up
If this button is pressed during auto tuning, the auto tuning will be cancelled and the setting will return to the
frequency in use before the button was pressed.
Manual tuning
Press tuning button (9) until the frequency is displayed on display (7).
< button: Frequency moves down
> button: Frequency moves up
When the frequency reaches the top or bottom frequency, it automatically continues as follows: Top  Bottom, or
Bottom  Top.
3 - 104
.
Method of Operating Mode

(BAS) Bass adjustment: When button (2) is pressed, BAS is displayed on display (7). If knob (1) is turned
clockwise within 5 seconds, the bass sound is emphasized. If the knob is turned
counterclockwise, the bass sound is reduced.
(TRE) Treble adjustment: When button (2) pressed, TRE is displayed on display (7). If knob (1) is turned
clockwise within 5 seconds, the treble sound is emphasized. If the knob is turned
counterclockwise, the treble sound is reduced.
(BAL) Balance adjustment: When button (2) is pressed, BAL is displayed on display (7). If knob (1) is turned
clockwise within 5 seconds, the sound from the right speaker is increased. If the knob
is turned counterclockwise, the sound from the left speaker is increased. When it is
set to BAL 0, the sound from the left and right speakers is balanced.
REMARK
With each mode, the display is returned automatically to its original setting after 5 seconds.
Setting Correct Time

1. Press display selector button (4) to display the time.
After 5 seconds, the display will return to the frequency display
and the time cannot be corrected. If this happens, press
display selector button (4) again.
2. Press time adjustment button (8) to select Hour or Minute.
H button: Adjusts the hour (each time the button is pressed,
the time advances by 1 hour)
M button: Adjusts the minute (each time the button is pressed,
the time advances by 1 minute)
If the H or M button is kept pressed, the time will advance
continuously until the button is released.
ADJ button: When the ADJ button is pressed, the time is reset
as follows.
When display is 00 to 05 minutes, time is returned to 00 min.
00 sec. (No change in hour)
(10:05  10:00)
When display is 55 to 59 minutes, time is advanced to 00
min. 00 sec. (Hour advances)
(10:59  11:00)
When display is 06 to 54 minutes, time cannot be reset.
(Time stays same)
(10:26  10:26)
Use the H, M, and ADJ buttons to set to the correct time.
3 - 105
.
Volume Control Button Type
Control Panel
(1) Power button (5) Preset station buttons (1,2,3,4,5,6)

(2) Band selection button (6) Display selection button
(3) Volume control button (7) Sound adjust button
(4) Tuning/time adjust button (8) Display
Power Button
Press this power button (1) to supply the power to the radio and the frequency is shown on the display (8). Press
the button again to turn the power off.
Band Selection Button

Press this button (2) to select the desired band.
Each time the button is pressed, the band changes FM -> AM -> AUX -> FM - - - -
But AUX is unusable.
Volume Control Button

Use this button (3) to control volume. Press the E button, and the volume increases. Press the R button, and the
volume decreases. The range for the volume is 0 to 32.
Keep pressing volume control button, volume becomes change continuously.
Tuning/Time Adjust Button

Use the button (4) to select frequency and step for sound adjustment and to adjust time. For details of the adjusting
method, see "Controls of Radio (PAGE 3-108)".
3 - 106
.
Preset Station Buttons

If this button (5) has been used to decide which stations to preset, it is possible to select the desired station at a
touch. It is possible to preset 6 stations each for both AM and FM.
For details of the method of presetting the stations, see "Controls of Radio (PAGE 3-108)".
Display Selection Button

Use this button (6) to change frequency and time shown on the display.
Each time you press this button, frequency, time and band are shown on the display in this order. 1.5 seconds
elapse when a band is shown, a frequency will be displayed again.
Sound Adjust Button

Press this button (7), and the sound adjustment is ready.
Each time this button is pressed, BAL (Balance), TRE (Treble) and BAS (Bass) will be selected in this order.
If this button (7) is pressed while BAS is displayed, the sound adjustment will be cancelled.
For details of the sound adjusting method, see "Controls of Radio (PAGE 3-108)".
Display
(A): Band name, frequency, time and other character/numeric
information are displayed.
(B): Frequencies are displayed in step of 50 kHz in certain areas.
(C): Lights up when a stereo broadcasting is heard while a FM
station is selected.
(D): Lights up at the time of balance adjustment in the sound
adjusting condition.
(E): Lights up at the time of treble adjustment in the sound
adjusting condition.
(F): Lights up at the time of bass adjustment in the sound adjusting
condition.
3 - 107
.
Controls of Radio
Frequency Adjustment
1. Press band selection button (2) and select FM or AM.
2. In this condition, press the E button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the frequency becomes higher.
Also, press the R button, and the frequency becomes lower.
3. Keep pressing the E button of tuning/time adjust button (4), and the frequency becomes higher continuously.
4. Keep pressing the R button of tuning/time adjust button (4), and the frequency becomes lower continuously.
5. Keep pressing the E button and release it, and the frequency becomes higher continuously. Keep pressing the
R button and release it, and the frequency becomes lower continuously as an auto seek.
When a proper frequency is picked up, the tuning automatically stops.
Frequency Adjustment (AUTO PRESETTING)

2. In this condition, keep pressing sound adjust button (7), and the auto presetting starts, i.e., a well-receiving
frequency is detected and is automatically registered in the preset memory 1 to 6.
Preset Call
2. In this condition, press any of buttons 1 to 6 of preset station button (5), and the frequency registered to the preset
number is called to start receiving.
Example:
While a frequency is displayed, press button 1 of preset station button (5), and the preset number "P-1" appears on
the display.
The preset number is shown for 0.5 seconds, and then the frequency is displayed.
Preset Memory
While the radio is receiving a station, keep pressing any of buttons 1 to 6 of preset station button (5), and the
frequency being received now is memorized to the corresponding preset number.
Example:
While a frequency is displayed, keep pressing button 1 of preset station button (5), and the preset number "P-1"
appears on the display.
After the preset number flashes 3 times, the frequency is displayed and then memorized to the preset number "P-1".
Sound Adjustment (BALANCE)

1. Press the sound adjust button (7) to turn on BAL on the display for starting sound adjustment (Balance).
2. In this condition, press the E button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the speaker output increases by 1
from R output. (R1 to R7)
3. Also, press the R button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the speaker output increases by 1 from L output.
(L1 to L7)
Sound Adjustment (TREBLE)

1. Press the sound adjust button (7) to turn on TRE on the display for starting sound adjustment (Treble).
2. In this condition, press the E button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the bass level increases by 1.
(Maximum + 7)
3. Also, press the R button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the bass level decreases by 1. (Minimum - 7)
Sound Adjustment (BASS)

1. Press the sound adjust button (7) to turn on BAS on the display for starting sound adjustment (Bass).
3 - 108
.
2. In this condition, press the E button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the bass level increases by 1.
(Maximum + 7)
3. Also, press the R button of the tuning/time adjust button (4), and the bass level decreases by 1. (Minimum - 7)
Setting Correct Time

1. Press display selection button (6) to display the time.
2. In this condition, keep pressing display selection button (6) for starting time adjustment.
3. For the time adjustment, press display selection button (6), and the adjustment target changes from "Hour" to
"Minute".
At this time, the adjustment target flashes.
4. Flash the item to be adjusted, and press the tuning/time adjust button (4) and start the adjustment.
5. If display selection button (6) is pressed during the minute adjustment, the time adjustment will be released and
the time display will resume.
3 - 109
.
Antenna
Before transporting the machine or putting it inside a building, stow the antenna to prevent any interference.
Stow the antenna as follows.
1. Loosen antenna mounting bolt (1) and store the antenna at
position (A).
2. After stowing the antenna, tighten bolt (1).
Use Radio with Care

To ensure safety, always keep the sound to a level where it is possible to hear outside sounds during operation.
If water gets into the speaker case or radio, it may lead to an unexpected failure, so be careful not to get water
on the equipment.
Do not wipe the scales or buttons with solvent such as benzene or thinner. Wipe with a dry soft cloth. If the dirt
cannot be removed easily, soak the cloth with alcohol.
When the battery is replaced, the settings for the preset buttons are all cleared, so set them again.
3 - 110
.
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC POWER
24 V Power Source
NOTICE
Do not use this as the power supply for 12 V equipment.
It will cause failure of the equipment.
Pull out the connector plug for taking out electric power from the
rear side of the panel.
Maximum usable electric power is 85 W (24 V x 3.5 A).
12 V Power Source
(if equipped)
This power source can be used up to a capacity of 60 W (12 V x 5
A).
3 - 111
.
FUSE
NOTICE
Before replacing a fuse, be sure to turn off the power supply (turn the starting switch to OFF position).
The fuse holder is at the rear right of the operator's seat.

The fuses protect the electrical equipment and wiring from
burning out.
If the fuse becomes corroded, or white powder can be seen, or
the fuse is loose in the fuse holder, replace the fuse.
Replace the fuse with another of the same capacity.
Fuse Capacities and Circuit Names
Fuse
No. Name of circuit
capacity
(1) 10 A Relay for lamp
(2) 30 A Solenoid valve
(3) 10 A PPC lock solenoid
(4) 10 A Window washer, cigarette lighter
(5) 10 A Horn
(6) 10 A Spare
(7) 10 A Beacon
(8) 20 A Lamp
(9) 10 A Radio, speaker, left knob switch
(10) 10 A Spare
(11) 20 A A/C unit
(12) 10 A Spare
(13) 10 A OPT lamp
(14) 10 A OPT power source (1)
OPT power source (2), travel alarm,
(15) 10 A
12V power port
(16) 10 A Radio backup, room lamp
(17) 20 A Monitor, controller, starter switch
(18) 10 A Spare
(19) 30 A Engine controller
(20) 5A Engine controller
3 - 112
.
SLOW BLOW FUSE

If the starting motor is not cranked when the starting switch is
turned START, there is probably a disconnection in slow blow fuse
(1) (2 places). Open the battery box cover on the right side of the
machine and carry out inspection and replacement.
REMARK
A slow blow fuse refers to the large-sized fuse wiring installed in
the high current flow portion of the circuit to protect electrical
components and wiring from burning, in the same way as an
ordinary fuse.
CONTROLLER
Controller installed.
NOTICE
Do not let water, mud, or juice spill on the controller. This will cause
failures.
If any problem occurs in the controller, do not repair it by yourself.
Contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
TOOL BOX
Store the tools in this box.
GREASE PUMP HOLDER

The grease pump holder is installed on the inside of the rear left
door of the body. Keep the grease pump hooked on this holder
while it is not used.
3 - 113
.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
(if equipped)
A fire extinguisher is prepared at the rear part inside the operator's
cab.
The directions are described on the nameplate affixed to it. Just in
case, carefully read and grasp them beforehand.
3 - 114
.
OPERATION MACHINE OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS
MACHINE OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS

BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
Walk-around Checks
Before starting the engine, walk around the machine and look at the underside of chassis for anything unusual like
loose bolts and nuts, leakage of fuel, oil and coolant. Also check the condition of the work equipment and the
hydraulic system.
Also check for loose wiring, play, and collection of dust at places that reach high temperature.
WARNING
Remove any combustible materials from around the battery, engine, muffler, turbocharger, or other high temperature engine
parts.
Leakage of fuel or oil will cause the machine to catch fire. Check carefully, be sure to repair any problem, or contact your Komatsu
distributor.
Perform the following inspections and cleaning every day before starting engine for the day's work.
1. Check for damage, wear, play in work equipment, cylinders, linkage, hoses
Check for cracks, excessive wear, play in work equipment, cylinders, linkage, and hoses. If any problem is
found, repair it.
2. Remove dirt and debris from around the engine and radiator.
Check for dirt accumulated around the engine and radiator. Also check for flammable material (dry leaves, twigs,
etc.) around the engine muffler, turbocharger, or other high temperature engine parts. If any dirt or flammable
materials are found, remove them.
For the removal of dust and dirt accumulated on the radiator fins, see "CLEAN AND INSPECT RADIATOR
FINS, OIL COOLER FINS, AFTERCOOLER FINS, FUEL COOLER FINS, AND AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER FINS (PAGE 4-64)".
3. Check for coolant and oil leakage around the engine

Check for oil leakage from the engine and coolant leaks from the cooling system. If any problem is found, repair
it.
4. Cleaning around battery

Make sure that there is no dirt, especially electrolyte such as snow melting agent or salt on the battery, and no
deposits around the battery.
Do the cleaning around the battery.
For how to handle the battery such as cleaning precautions, see "HANDLING BATTERY (PAGE 2-41)".
Also, do not use a direct air blow or dry cloth to clean the battery. Use a wet cloth to prevent fire or explosion from
static electricity.
5. Check for leakage from fuel line.

Check that there is no leakage of fuel or damage to the hoses and tubes. If any problem is found, perform
repairs.
6. Check for oil leakage from hydraulic equipment, hydraulic tank, hoses, and joints
Check for oil leakage. If any problem is found, repair the area where oil is leaking.
3 - 115
.
MACHINE OPERATIONS AND CONTROLS OPERATION
7. Check the undercarriage (track, sprocket, idler, guard) for damage, wear, loose bolts, or leakage of oil from
rollers.
If any problem is found, repair it.
8. Check for problems in handrails, steps, loose bolts.

If any problem is found, repair it. Tighten any loose bolts.
9. Check for problem in gauges, monitor.

Check for problem in the gauges and monitor in the operator's cab. If any problem is found, replace the parts.
Clean off any dirt from the surface.
10. Clean, check rearview mirror

Check that there is no damage to the rearview mirror. If it is damaged repair. Clean the surface of the mirror and
adjust the angle so that the area at the rear can be seen from the operator's seat.
11. Seat belt and mounting clamps

Check for damage or wear to the seat belt and mounting clamps. If there is any damage, replace with new parts.
12. Check bucket with hook (if equipped) for damage.

Check for damage to the hook, guide, and hook mount. If any problem is found, contact your Komatsu distributor
for repairs.
13. Inspection and cleaning of camera

Check the camera for any abnormality. If it is found defective, call your Komatsu distributor for repair.
3 - 116
.
Checks Before Starting

Always check the items in this section before starting the engine each day.
Drain Water And Sediment from Fuel Tank

1. Open the door at the right of the machine.
2. Set a container under drain hose (1) to catch the drained fuel.
3. Turn drain valve (2) to OPEN (O) position and drain all the
sediment and water accumulated at the bottom together with
the fuel.
4. When clean fuel comes out, turn drain valve (2) to CLOSE (S)
position.
5. Close the door.
Check for Water and Sediment in Water Separator, Drain Water

1. Open the pump room door on the right side of the machine.
The water separator forms one unit with fuel prefilter (1).
2. It is possible to judge the water level and amount of sediment
by looking through transparent cup (2). If there is any water or
sediment collected at the bottom, set a container to catch the
drain water under drain hose (3).
3. Loosen drain valve (4) and drain the water.
4. When fuel starts to drain from drain hose (3), tighten drain
valve (4) immediately.
NOTICE
If the water inside transparent cup (2) freezes, check that the frozen water has melted completely, then use the procedure above
to drain the water.
REMARK
If transparent cup (2) is dirty or it is difficult to see the inside, clean transparent cup (2) when replacing fuel prefilter
cartridge (1).
When the drain valve (4) has been removed during the cleaning operation, coat the O-ring with grease and
tighten until it contacts the bottom.
Adjustment of Drain Valve

If drain valve (4) is stiff, coat the O-ring portion of the drain valve with grease to make the movement smooth.
1. Turn the valve (6) at the bottom of the fuel tank to CLOSE
position (S).
3 - 117
.
2. Set the container to catch the fuel under the prefilter cartridge.
3. Loosen drain valve (4), then drain all the water and sediment in
the transparent cup (2) and also the fuel accumulated in
prefilter cartridge (1).
4. Check that nothing more comes out from drain hose (3), then
remove drain valve (4).
5. Coat O-ring portion (7) with a suitable amount of grease.

When doing this, be careful not to let the grease get stuck to the
drain valve water drain port (8) or drain valve thread (9).
6. Tighten drain valve (4) by hand until it contacts the bottom of transparent cup (2).
7. Remove the fuel container.
8. Turn the valve (6) at the bottom of the fuel tank to OPEN position (O).
REMARK
When bleeding air, see "REPLACE FUEL PREFILTER CARTRIDGE (PAGE 4-61)" or "REPLACE FUEL MAIN
FILTER CARTRIDGE (PAGE 4-72)".
3 - 118
.
Check Oil Level in Hydraulic Tank, Add Oil
WARNING
Immediately after the engine is stopped, its parts and oil are still very hot, and may cause burn injury. Accordingly, wait until
they have cooled down before starting the work.
When removing the oil filler cap, turn it slowly to release the internal pressure, then remove it.
1. Set the work equipment in the posture shown in the diagram on

the right, then check the oil level and add oil if necessary.
2. If the work equipment is not in the condition shown in the
diagram on the right, start the engine, run the engine at low
speed, retract the arm and bucket cylinder rods fully, then
lower the boom, set the bucket teeth in contact with the ground,
and stop the engine.
3. Within 15 seconds after stopping the engine, move each
control lever (for work equipment and travel) to the full stroke
in all directions to release the internal pressure.
4. Check sight gauge (G) from the right window installed to the
operator's compartment. The oil level should be between the H
and L lines when the oil temperature is 50°C (122°F).
NOTICE
Do not add oil above the H line. This will damage the hydraulic equipment
and may cause oil to spurt out. If oil is added above the H line, stop the
engine, wait for the oil temperature to cool down, put a container to catch
the oil under drain plug (P) at the bottom of the hydraulic tank, then drain
the excess oil from the drain plug.
5. If the oil level is below the L line, add oil through oil filler port (F)
at the top of the hydraulic tank.
REMARK
The oil level will vary depending upon the oil temperature.
Accordingly, use the following as a guide:
Target oil level is the middle between the H and L lines when the
oil temperature is 50°C (122°F), and anywhere between the H
and L lines when the oil temperature is 30 to 70°C (86 to 158°
F).
3 - 119
.
Check Coolant Level, Add Coolant
WARNING
Do not open the radiator cap unless necessary. When checking the coolant, always wait for the engine to cool down and check
the sub-tank.
Immediately after the engine is stopped, the coolant is at a high temperature and the radiator is under high internal pressure.
If the cap is removed to check the coolant level in this condition, there is a hazard of burns. Wait for the temperature to go
down, then turn the cap slowly to release the pressure and remove it carefully.
1. Open the door at the left of the machine, and check if the
coolant in sub-tank (1) (shown in the diagram on the right) is
between the FULL and LOW marks. If the coolant level is low,
add coolant to the FULL level through the filler port of sub-tank
(1).
2. After adding coolant, tighten the cap securely.
3. If the sub-tank becomes empty, there is probably coolant
leakage. After checking, repair any abnormality immediately. If
no abnormality is found, check the level of the water in the
radiator. If it is low, add coolant of the same density in radiator
according to the coolant density table in "CLEAN INSIDE OF
COOLING SYSTEM (PAGE 4-29)", then add coolant to the
sub-tank.
4. If the inside of sub-tank (1) is dirty and the water level cannot
be seen, use the procedure in "CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING
SYSTEM (PAGE 4-29)".
3 - 120
.
Check Oil Level in Engine Oil Pan, Add Oil
WARNING
Immediately after the engine is stopped, its parts and oil are still very hot, and may cause burn injury. Accordingly, wait until they
have cooled down before starting the work.
1. Open the engine hood.

2. Remove dipstick (G), and wipe the oil off with a cloth.
3. Fully insert dipstick (G) into dipstick pipe, then remove it.
4. The oil level should be between H and L marks on dipstick (G).

If the oil level is below L mark, add oil through oil filler port (F).
5. If the oil is above the H line, open drain valve (P) at the bottom
of the engine oil pan, drain the excess engine oil, then check
the oil level again.
6. If oil level is correct, securely tighten the oil filler cap and close
the engine hood.
REMARK
When checking the oil level after the engine has been operated, wait for at least 15 minutes after stopping the engine
before checking.
If the machine is at an angle, make it horizontal before checking.
3 - 121
.
Check Electric Wiring
CAUTION
If fuses are frequently blown or if there are traces of short-circuiting on the electrical wiring, promptly ask your Komatsu
distributor to locate the cause and make the repair.
Keep the top surface of the battery clean and check the breather hole in the battery cap. If it is clogged with dirt or dust, wash
the battery cap to clear the breather hole.
Check that there is no damage to the fuses; that fuses of the specified capacity are used; that there is no open circuit
or trace of short-circuiting in the electric wiring and no damage to the covering. Check also that there is no loosened
terminals. If any, tighten them.
Moreover, pay particular attention to the electric wiring when checking the battery, engine starting motor and
alternator.
Be sure to check that there is no inflammable material accumulated around the battery. If any is found, remove
immediately.
3 - 122
.
Check Fuel Level, Add Fuel
WARNING
When adding fuel, never spill the fuel or let it overflow. It will cause fire.
If any fuel has spilled, wipe it up completely. If fuel has spilled over soil or sand, remove that soil or sand.
Fuel is highly flammable and dangerous. Never bring open flames near fuel.
1. Turn the engine starting switch to ON position and check the

fuel level gauge (1) on the machine monitor for fuel level.
After checking, turn the switch back to OFF position.
2. If fuel is found to be low, unscrew fuel filler cap (F) on the fuel
tank and add fuel through the filler port until float gauge (G)
comes up to the highest point.
Fuel tank capacity: 247 liters (65.26 US gal)
Position of tip (a) of float gauge (G) when fuel tank is full:
Approximately 50 mm {2 in}
3. After adding fuel, push float gauge (G) straight down with fuel
filler cap (F). Be careful not to get float gauge (G) caught in the
tab of fuel filler cap (F), and tighten fuel filler cap (F) securely.
REMARK
If breather hole (3) on the cap is clogged, the pressure in the tank
will drop and fuel will not flow. Clean the hole from time to time.
3 - 123
.
Check Working Lamp Switch

Check that the working lamps and lamps inside the instruments light up properly. Check also that there is no dirt
or damage.
If any lamp does not light up, the bulb is probably blown up or there is a open circuit, so ask your Komatsu distributor
to perform repairs.
1. Turn the starting switch to ON position.
2. Turn the lamp switch ON (night mode (a), and day mode (b))
and check that the working lamp lights up.
Check Function of Horn

1. Turn the starting switch to ON position.
2. Confirm that the horn sounds immediately when the horn
button is pressed.
If the horn does not sound, contact your Komatsu distributor for
repair.
3 - 124
.
Adjustment
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
When adjusting the position of the operator's seat, always set the lock lever to LOCK position to prevent any accidental contact
with the control levers.
Always adjust the operator's seat before starting each operation or when the operators change shift.
Adjust the operator's seat so control levers and switches can be operated freely and easily with the operator's
back against the backrest.
(A) Fore-and-aft adjustment

Pull lever (1) up, set the seat to the desired position, then release
the lever.
Fore-and-aft adjustment: 160 mm {6.3 in} (16 stages)
(B) Adjusting reclining
REMARK
The seat can be reclined more when the seat is pushed to the front.
The amount of reclining decreases as the seat is pushed back, so
when moving the seat back, return the seat back to UPRIGHT
position.
Pull up lever (2) and set the backrest to a position that is

comfortable for operation, then release the lever.
Sit with your back against the seat backrest when adjusting. If your
back is not against the backrest, the backrest may suddenly move
forward.
(C) Adjusting seat tilt

Forward tilt
Push lever (3) down to adjust angle of the front of seat. (4 stages)
To raise the angle at front of the seat, keep the lever pushed down and apply your weight to the rear of seat.
To lower the angle at front of the seat, keep the lever pushed down and apply your weight to the front of seat.
Rear tilt
Pull lever (4) up to adjust angle of the rear of seat. (4 stages)
To raise the angle at rear of the seat, keep lever (3) pulled up, and stand up slightly to remove your weight from
the seat.
To lower the angle at rear of the seat, keep lever (3) pulled up, and apply your weight to the seat.
Amount of tilt: Up 13 deg., down 13 deg.
Adjusting seat height

It is possible to move the seat up or down by combining adjustments forward tilt and rear tilt.
After setting the forward tilt or rear tilt to the desired height, operate the opposite part to set the seat horizontal then
secure in position.
Height adjustment: 60 mm {2.4 in}
3 - 125
.
(D) Adjusting armrest height

The height of armrest (5) can be adjusted up or down by changing
the position of adjustment bolt (6) at the rear of the armrest.
Armrest height adjustment: 33 mm {1.3 in}
(E) Overall fore-and-aft adjustment of seat

Move lever (7) to right, set to the desired position, then release the lever. In this case, the operator's seat, left and
right control levers, and lock lever all slide together.
Fore-and-aft adjustment: 180 mm {7.1 in} (9 stages)
(F) Adjusting suspension (if equipped)

Turn knob (8) to the right to make the suspension harder, or to the left to make the suspension softer. Adjust the
reading of the dial to match the operator's weight and select the optimum suspension.
REMARK
To obtain the optimum adjustment, turn the knob (8) so that the indicator of the weight display (kg) in the transparent
portion of knob (8) is the same as the operator's weight.
3 - 126
.
Adjustment of Mirrors and Camera
WARNING
Be sure to adjust the mirrors and camera before starting work. If they are
not adjusted properly, you cannot secure the visibility and may be injured
or may injure someone seriously.
Mirror (A)
Adjust the mirror mount so that it is possible to see people at the
rear left of the machine.
Install the side view mirror in the location indicated in the figure
at right.
Fix mirror securing stay (1) the way the side view mirror
stretches outward to the maximum.
If the side view mirror does not move smoothly when adjusting
its angle, loosen mirror securing bolt (2) and mirror securing stay
bolt (3).
Tightening torque of bolt (2): 6.0 to 7.0 Nm
(0.61 to 0.71 kgm, 4.5 to 5.2 lbft)
When adjusting the side view mirror angle, make an adjustment
so that the side of the machine comes into view on the mirror as
shown in the figure at right.
Mirror (B)
Adjust the mirror mount so that it is possible to see people at the
rear right of the machine.
at right.
its angle, loosen mirror securing bolt (4) and mirror securing stay
bolt (5).
(0.61 to 0.71 kgm, 4.5 to 5.2 lbft)
3 - 127
.
When adjusting the side view mirror angle, make an adjustment

so that the side of the machine comes into view on the mirror as
shown in the figure at right.
Mirror (C)
When installing the mirror, adjust so that people standing at the
front right edge of the machine can be seen.
at right.
its angle, loosen mirror securing bolt (6).
(0.41 to 0.55 kgm, 3.0 to 4.0 lbft)
Camera (D)
Adjust the side view mirrors so that people around 1 m (3 ft 3 in)
away from the machine can be seen.
(W): 1 m (3 ft 3 in)
For details of the camera (D) adjustment procedure, see "Adjusting Angle of Camera (PAGE 3-129)".
3 - 128
.
Adjusting Angle of Camera
WARNING
If the rear view displayed on the monitor is misaligned, the camera angle
must be adjusted. If the camera angle is not adjusted properly, you
cannot secure the visibility and a serious personal injury or death may
result.
When adjusting the camera, if you stand on an unstable place, or take
an unstable posture, you may fall and be injured. Put proper stepladder
or step on the level and firm ground, and adjust the camera in secure
posture.
Adjust the angle of the rearview camera so that a person standing

in area 1 m {3 ft 3 in} away from the machine's rear part (W)
appears in the machine monitor at the operator's seat.
If the image on the monitor is not aligned correctly, remove cover

(1) and adjust the mounting angle (A) of the rearview camera.
Amount of adjustment of angle (A): Within a range of 30 to 60 deg.
3 - 129
.
1. When removing bolt cover (2), insert a flat-head screwdriver

etc. to the hole (3) of bolt cover (2) and push the inside claw to
remove.
2. Remove mounting bolts (4) of cover (1) from 2 places.
3. Remove cover (1).
4. Loosen camera mounting bolt (5) and adjust camera installing

angle (A) so that the side of camera matches the edge of
bracket (B).
REMARK
Part of the machine is shown on the monitor screen.
5. After adjusting, tighten bolt (5).
6. Install covers (1) and (2).
3 - 130
.
Seat Belt
WARNING
Before fitting the seat belt, check that there is no problem in the belt mount bracket or mounting belt. If it is worn or damaged,
replace the seat belt.
Even if there are no signs of damage, replace belts in accordance with the following schedule:
5 years after the date of seat belt manufacture, or every 3 years after the start of actual usage, whichever date comes sooner.
Always wear the seat belt during operations.
Fit the seat belt so that it is not twisted.
REMARK
The date of seat belt manufacture attached to the seat belt is the start of the 5-year period. It is not the start of the
3-year period of actual usage.
Fastening and Removing

This seat belt has a wind-in device, so it is not necessary to adjust the length.
Fastening Seat Belt

Hold grip (2) and pull the belt out from wind-in device (1), check that
the belt is not twisted, then insert tongue (3) into buckle (4)
securely.
When doing this, pull the belt lightly to check that it is properly
locked.
Removing Belt
Press button (5) in buckle (4), and remove tongue (3) from buckle (4).
The belt is automatically wound in, hold grip (2) and return the belt slowly to wind-in device (1).
3 - 131
.
Operations Before Starting Engine

WARNING
When starting the engine, check that the lock lever is securely at LOCK position.
If the lock lever is not locked securely and the control levers or control pedal are touched when the engine is started, the machine
may move unexpectedly, and this may lead to serious personal injury.
1. Check that lock lever (1) is at LOCK position (L).

2. Check that each control lever and control pedal is at NEUTRAL
position.
If the control levers and control pedal are not being touched,
they will be at NEUTRAL position.
3. Insert the key in starting switch (2), turn the key to ON position
(B), then perform the following checks.
If a password has been set, the input display screen will be

displayed on the monitor screen.
After inputting the password, press Enter switch F6 (3).
REMARK
Contact your Komatsu distributor for details of the method of
setting, changing, or cancelling the password.
3 - 132
.
1) The buzzer sounds for approx. 2 seconds, then the monitor

or meter lights up for approx. 2 seconds.
Radiator coolant level monitor (4)
Charge level monitor (5)
Engine oil pressure monitor (6)
Engine oil level monitor (7)
Air cleaner clogging monitor (8)
Engine coolant temperature gauge (9)
If any monitor does not light up or the buzzer does not
sound, there is probably a failure in the monitor, so please
contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
2) After approximately 2 seconds, the screen will change to

the working mode/travel speed display monitor. Next, it will
switch to the standard screen.
Engine coolant temperature gauge (9)
Engine coolant temperature monitor (10)
Fuel gauge (11)
Fuel level monitor (12)
Hydraulic oil temperature gauge (13)
Hydraulic oil temperature monitor (14)
3) If the hydraulic oil temperature gauge goes out and caution

lamp (15) stay lit in red, perform inspection immediately for
the item which is lighted up in red.
4) If the maintenance due time has passed for certain items,

maintenance due time monitor (16) is lit for 30 seconds.
Press maintenance switch F5 (17), check the item, and
carry out maintenance immediately.
For details of the method of checking the maintenance

time, see "Maintenance Selector Switch (PAGE 3-41)" in
the explanation for each component.
3 - 133
.
STARTING ENGINE
Normal Starting
WARNING
Start the engine only after sitting down in the operator's seat.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting circuit. Such an act may cause a serious personal
injury, death or fire.
Check that there are no persons or obstacles in the surrounding area, then sound the horn and start the engine.
Never use starting aid fluids as they may cause explosions.
Exhaust gas is toxic. When starting the engine in confined spaces, be particularly careful to ensure good ventilation.
NOTICE
Before starting the engine, check that fuel control dial (2) is at Low idle
(MIN) position. If the fuel control dial is at High idle (MAX) position, the
engine will accelerate suddenly and cause damage to the engine parts.
Do not keep the key in starting switch (3) at START position
continuously for more than 20 seconds.
If the engine does not start, wait for at least 2 minutes, then start again
from the beginning.
After the engine starts, wait for the engine oil pressure monitor to go
out. Do not touch the control levers or control pedal while the engine oil
pressure monitor is lit.
1. Check the lock lever (1) is in LOCK position (L). If the lock lever
(1) is in FREE position (F), the engine does not start.
2. Set fuel control dial (2) to Low idle (MIN) position.
3 - 134
.
3. Turn the key in starting switch (3) to START position (C). The
engine will start.
REMARK
If the ambient temperature is low, the engine may not start even
when the key in the starting switch (3) is kept at START position for
20 seconds. If this happens, wait for at least 2 minutes, then start
again from the beginning.
4. After the engine starts, release the key in starting switch (3).
The key will automatically return to ON position (B).
REMARK
When the engine is started, the battery voltage may suddenly drop
depending on the temperature and the battery condition. If this
happens, the display on the machine monitor may momentarily go
out, but this does not indicate any abnormality.
5. Even if the engine starts, wait for the engine oil pressure
monitor to go out. Do not touch the control levers or control
pedal while the engine oil pressure monitor is lit.
NOTICE
If the engine oil pressure monitor does not go out even after 4 to 5 seconds
have passed, stop the engine immediately. Check the oil level, check for
leakage of oil, and take the necessary action.
3 - 135
.
Starting Engine in Cold Weather

WARNING
Start the engine only after sitting down in the operator's seat.
Do not attempt to start the engine by short-circuiting the engine starting circuit. Such an act may cause a serious personal
injury, death or fire.
Check that there are no persons or obstacles in the surrounding area, then sound the horn and start the engine.
Never use starting aid fluids as they may cause explosions.
Exhaust gas is toxic. When starting the engine in confined spaces, be particularly careful to ensure good ventilation.
NOTICE
Do not try to start the engine with the fuel adjustment dial set near the
High idle (MAX). Otherwise the engine parts may be damaged.
Do not keep the starting motor rotating continuously for more than 20
seconds.
If the engine fails to start, wait for about 2 minutes and repeat from Step
4.
When starting in low temperatures, do as follows.

1. Check the lock lever (1) is in LOCK position (L). If the lock lever
(1) is in FREE position (F), the engine does not start.
2. Before starting the engine, check that fuel control dial (2) is at the Low idle (MIN) position.
3 - 136
.
3. Hold the key in starting switch (3) at HEAT position (D) and
check that preheating monitor (4) lights up.
After approx. 30 seconds, preheating monitor (4) will flash for
10 seconds to inform the operator that the preheating has been
completed.
4. When engine pre-heating monitor (4) goes off, turn the key in
stating switch (3) to the START position (C) to start the engine.
5. When the engine starts, release the key in starting switch (3).
The key will automatically return to ON position (B).
6. Keep the engine idle for the initial 15 seconds right after it has been started, and do not operate any control lever
or the fuel adjustment dial during that time.
3 - 137
.
7. Check that battery charge monitor (4), engine oil pressure

monitor (5), and engine oil level monitor (6) are off.
Turbo protect function

The turbo protect function is a function to protect the turbocharger by keeping the engine speed at less than 1100
rpm immediately after the engine is started.
When the turbo protect function is actuated, the engine speed is held at less than 1100 rpm, regardless of the
position of the fuel control dial.
When the turbo protect function is actuated, the engine speed is held at less than 1100 rpm, even if the fuel control
dial is operated.
When the turbo protect function is canceled, the engine speed is set to the speed for the position of the fuel control
dial.
The relationship between the length of time of actuating the
Coolant Turbo protect
turbo protect function and the temperature of the engine coolant
temperature time (sec.)
is as shown in the table.
Above 10°C (50°F) 0
10 to -30°C
Change 0 to 20
(50 to -22°F)
below -30°C (22°F) 20
3 - 138
.
AFTER STARTING ENGINE

WARNING
To stop the engine in emergencies or when the actuation of the engine
is abnormal or there is any other trouble, turn the key in the starting
switch to OFF position.
Do not perform operations or operate the levers or pedal suddenly while
the hydraulic oil is at low temperature. Always perform the warm-up
operation for the hydraulic equipment until the hydraulic oil
temperature monitor displays the correct temperature.
(When the hydraulic oil temperature is low, the low temperature display
shown on the right is given.
(A) Display when temperature is normal: Monitor background (C) is blue
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C) is white)
If the warm-up operation for the hydraulic equipment is not performed
thoroughly, and the machine is moved, the reaction of the control levers
and pedals will be slow and the movement may not be what the operator
intended. Always warm up the hydraulic equipment. In particular, in
cold areas, always warm up the hydraulic equipment thoroughly.
There are 2 types of warm-up operation: warm up the engine and warm up the hydraulic equipment. In addition,
depending on the environment, the method of performing the warm-up operation may differ, so perform the warm-up
operation according to the items given in the appropriate section.
(When only the engine is warmed up, the hydraulic equipment is not warmed up, so always perform the warm-up
operation for the hydraulic equipment separately from the warm-up operation for the engine. Warm up the hydraulic
equipment thoroughly ensures that the hydraulic oil is warmed up and that warm hydraulic oil circulates in all the
control circuits.)
Checking of Engine Startability and Noise

When starting the engine, check that the engine causes no abnormal noise and that it starts up easily and smoothly.
Check also that there is no abnormal noise when the engine is at idle or when the revolution rises slightly.
When there is an abnormal noise at the engine startup and if that condition continues, the engine may be
damaged. In that case, ask your Komatsu distributor to check the engine as soon as possible.
Checking of Engine Acceleration and Deceleration

When stopping the machine during the operation, check that there is no irregular engine revolution or that the engine
does not stop suddenly.
Check also that the engine speed rises smoothly when the fuel control dial is turned to High idle (MAX).
Perform these checks in a safe place, watching out for danger in the surroundings.
When the engine performs very badly at Low idle (MIN) and in the acceleration and if that condition continues,
the engine may be damaged or confuse the operator's sense of driving or lower the braking efficiency, and as
a result lead to an unexpected accident. In that case, ask your Komatsu distributor to check the engine as soon
as possible.
3 - 139
.
Breaking-in the New Machine
NOTICE
Your Komatsu machine has been thoroughly adjusted and tested before shipment from the factory. However, operating the
machine under full load before breaking the machine in can adversely affect the performance and shorten the machine life.
Be sure to break in the machine for the initial 100 hours (as indicated on the service meter).
Make sure that you fully understand the content of this manual, and pay careful attention to the following points when
breaking in the machine.
Run the engine at idle for 15 seconds after starting it. During this time, do not operate the control levers or fuel
control dial.
Idle the engine for 5 minutes after starting it up.
Avoid operation with heavy loads or at high speeds.
Immediately after starting the engine, avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, unnecessary sudden stops, and
sudden changes in direction.
Engine Warm Up
NOTICE
Do not accelerate the engine suddenly until the warm-up operation has
been completed.
Do not run the engine at Low idle (MIN) or High idle (MAX) under no load
for more than 20 minutes. This will have an adverse effect on the
environment, and will also have an adverse effect on the internal
structure of the engine. If it is necessary to run the engine at idle for
more than 20 minutes, apply a load from time to time or run at a
mid-range speed.
After the engine starts, do not start operating the machine immediately. First, perform the following operations and
checks.
1. This machine is equipped with an automatic engine warm-up system, so if the engine water temperature is
below 55 °C (131 °F) after the engine is started, the engine warm-up operation starts automatically. When the
engine automatic warm-up operation starts, the engine speed is maintained at a speed higher than the normal
low idle speed.
If the engine water temperature goes above 55 °C (131 °F) , the automatic warm-up operation is cancelled and
the engine speed drops to the normal low idle speed.
2. After 10 minutes warm-up operation, Check that engine

coolant temperature monitor (1) displays the correct
temperature.
If it displays low temperature, use the procedure in Step 3 to
carry out additional warm up of the engine until the monitor
displays the correct temperature.
(A) Display when temperature is correct: Monitor background
(C) is blue
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C)
is white
3 - 140
.
3. Turn fuel control dial (2) to a point midway between Low idle
(MIN) and High idle (MAX), run the engine under no load at a
mid-range speed until engine coolant temperature monitor (1)
(A) Display when temperature is normal: Monitor background

(C) is blue
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background
(C) is white
If the engine coolant temperature monitor displays the correct temperature, the engine warm-up operation is
completed.
After checking that the engine coolant temperature monitor displays the correct temperature, perform the warm-up
operation for the hydraulic equipment.
3 - 141
.
Hydraulic Equipment Warm Up

WARNING
Before performing the warming-up operation for the hydraulic
equipment, turn the swing lock switch ON, check on the monitor that the
swing lock is actuated, then start the warming-up operation.
When warming up the hydraulic equipment, check that there is no
person or obstacle in the surrounding area, then sound the horn and
start the operation.
Perform the warming-up operation for the hydraulic equipment until the
hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays the correct temperature.
(When the hydraulic oil temperature is low, the low temperature display
shown in the diagram on the right is given.
(A) Display when temperature is normal: Monitor background (C) is blue
(B) Display when temperature is low: Monitor background (C) is white)
The warming-up operation for the hydraulic equipment is necessary not
only for the circuit between the pump and cylinders and between the
pump and motor, but also for the control circuits. Do not perform the
operation just for 1 cylinder or motor, or the operation just in one
direction. Perform the operation in all directions for all the work
equipment (boom, arm, bucket), swing, travel, and attachment (if
equipped).
1. Check that engine coolant temperature monitor (1) displays

the correct temperature.
(C) is blue
(C) is white
If it displays low temperature, perform additional warm up of
the engine until engine coolant temperature monitor (1)
For details of the procedure, see "Engine Warm Up (PAGE
3-140)".
3 - 142
.
2. Turn swing lock switch (2) ON and check that the swing lock
monitor lights up.
3. To complete the warm-up operation of the hydraulic equipment

more quickly, set the working mode to P mode (heavy-duty
mode).
For details of the procedure for setting the working mode, see
"Working Mode Selector Switch (PAGE 3-25)".
4. Operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever (3) slowly
and securely to set it to the FREE position (F), and then raise
the bucket from the ground.
3 - 143
.
5. Turn fuel control dial (4) to a point midway between Low idle
(MIN) and High idle (MAX) position.
NOTICE
When the work equipment is retracted, take care that it does not interfere
with the machine body or ground.
6. Move right work equipment control lever (5) slowly in the

direction to pull in the bucket (D). Operate the lever to the end
of its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
7. Move right work equipment control lever (5) slowly in the
direction to push out the bucket (C). Operate the lever to the
end of its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
8. Next, move left work equipment control lever (6) slowly in the direction to pull in the arm (B). Operate the lever
to the end of its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
9. Move left work equipment control lever (6) slowly in the direction to push out the arm (A). Operate the lever to
the end of its travel and hold it in position for 30 seconds.
10. Repeat the operation in steps 6 to 9 for 5 minutes.
11. Check that hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7) is displaying

If the hydraulic oil temperature monitor is not displaying the
correct temperature (it is displaying low temperature), repeat
steps 6 to 10 until the display is the correct temperature.

(C) is blue
(C) is white
12. Check that engine coolant temperature monitor (1) displays
(C) is blue
(C) is white
If it displays low temperature, perform additional warm up of
the engine until engine coolant temperature monitor (1)
For details of the procedure, see "Engine Warm Up (PAGE
3-140)".
3 - 144
.
13. Check that the hydraulic oil temperature monitor and engine
coolant temperature monitor are displaying the correct
temperature, then check that all the gauges and caution
monitors on the machine monitor are in the following state.
Radiator coolant level monitor (8): OFF
Charge level monitor (9): OFF
Engine oil pressure monitor (10): ON
Engine oil level monitor (11): OFF
Air cleaner clogging monitor (12): OFF
Engine preheating lamp (13): OFF
Engine water temperature gauge (14): Indicator in green
range
Engine coolant temperature monitor (1): Displays correct
temperature
Hydraulic oil temperature gauge (15): Displays green range
Hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7): Displays correct
temperature
Fuel gauge (16): Displays green range
Fuel level monitor (17): Display is correct level
14. Check for abnormal exhaust gas color, noise, or vibration. If

any problem is found, contact your Komatsu distributor.
In cold temperatures [ambient temperature below 0 °C (32 °F)], even when the hydraulic oil temperature monitor
displays the correct temperature, perform additional step 15 to warm up all the hydraulic equipment.
15. Turn fuel control dial (4) to High idle (MAX) position, repeat
steps 6 to 9 for 3 to 5 minutes, then check again that the
hydraulic oil temperature monitor is displaying the correct
temperature.
If it is not displaying the correct temperature, repeat steps 6 to
9 for 3 to 5 minutes until hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7)

(C) is blue
(C) is white
3 - 145
.
For both normal temperatures and cold temperatures, perform the following operation.
16. Check that fuel control dial (4) is at a point midway between
Low idle (MIN) and High idle (MAX) position.
If it is not at the midway position, set it to the midway position
and run the engine at a mid-range speed before operating.
17. Before starting operations, repeat the following operations

slowly 3 to 5 times to circulate warm oil through the control
circuits.
Boom operation RAISE (E) ←→ LOWER (F)

Arm operation IN (B) ←→ OUT (A)
Bucket operation CURL (D) ←→ DUMP (C)
When performing swing operations, release swing lock switch

(2), check that swing lock monitor (19) goes out, then operate
the swing.
Swing operation Left (G) ←→ Right (H)
Travel (Lo) operation FORWARD (A) ←→ REVERSE (B)
3 - 146
.
For attachment operations (if equipped), change the working mode

to the attachment mode.
Blade operation LOWER (a) ←→ RAISE (b)
Attachment operation One way (A) ←→ Other way (B)
18. Check that hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7) is displaying

If the hydraulic oil temperature monitor is not displaying the
correct temperature (it is displaying low temperature), repeat
steps 6 to 10 until the display is the correct temperature.

(C) is blue
(C) is white
If the hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays the correct temperature, the hydraulic equipment warm-up
operation is completed.
After confirming that the hydraulic oil temperature monitor displays the correct temperature, perform the following
procedure.
3 - 147
.
AIR CONDITIONER WARM-UP OPERATION
NOTICE
To prevent the failure of the air conditioner compressor, do the warm-up operation of the air conditioner one time a day when you
use the air conditioner for the first time. If you turn on the air conditioner while the engine runs at high speed, the excessive load
is applied to the air conditioner compressor, and it can cause the seizure in the air conditioner compressor.
When you operate the machine while the auto switch or the air conditioner switch is turned on, use the air conditioner
in the conditions that follow for 3 minutes after the air conditioner is started.
1. Set the fuel control dial as shown in the figure (at the 1/4
position between the low idle (MIN) and high idle (MAX)
position).
2. Set the temperature to 18.0°C (64.4°F), set the air flow to the
maximum, and continue for 3 minutes.
The air conditioner compressor starts up securely, and the
warm-up operation of the air conditioner is done.
3 - 148
.
Operation After Completion Of Warm-Up Operation

1. Check that hydraulic oil temperature monitor (7) displays the
correct temperature.
(A) Display when temperature is normal: Monitor

background (C) is blue
(C) is white
2. Push working mode selector switch (20) of the machine

monitor to select the working mode to be used.
For details of the procedure for selecting the working mode,
see "Working Mode Selector Switch (PAGE 3-25)".
Working mode monitor display

1) P mode
For heavy-duty operations
2) E mode
For operations with emphasis on fuel economy
3 - 149
.
3) L mode
For operations requiring fine control
4) B mode
For breaker operations
5) ATT mode
For operations with crusher or other double-acting action
attachment
3 - 150
.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
NOTICE
If the engine is stopped abruptly, service life of component parts of the
engine may be considerably reduced. Do not stop the engine abruptly
except in an emergency. If the engine has overheated, do not try to stop it
abruptly but run it at medium speed to allow it to cool down gradually, and
then stop it.
1. Run the engine at Low idle (MIN) for approximately 5 minutes to cool down gradually.
2. Turn the key in starting switch (1) to OFF position (A) and stop
the engine.
3. Remove the key from starting switch (1).
3 - 151
.
MACHINE OPERATION
WARNING
Before operating the travel lever or travel pedal, check the direction that the track frame is facing.
When the track frame is facing the rear (when the sprocket is at the front), the direction of operation of the travel lever and travel
pedal is the opposite to the direction of movement of the machine (forward/reverse, left/right).
Before starting the machine off, check that the area around the machine is safe, and sound the horn.
Do not allow anyone to enter the area around the machine.
Remove any obstacles from the travel path.
The area at the rear of the machine is a blind spot. Always use the camera to check the area at the rear of the machine before
traveling in reverse.
When the auto-deceleration is being used, if the travel lever or travel pedal are operated, the engine speed will suddenly rise,
so be careful when operating the travel lever or travel pedal.
When traveling, check that the travel alarm works properly.
Preparations for Moving the Machine

1. Set swing lock switch (1) to ON (actuated) position and confirm
that swing lock monitor lamp (2) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
2. Turn fuel control dial (3) towards High idle (MAX) position to
increase the engine speed.
3 - 152
.
Moving Machine Forward

securely to FREE position (F). Set the work equipment in the
travel posture and raise it 40 to 50 cm {16 to 20 in} from the
ground.
If the work equipment blocks the view and it is difficult to
travel in safety, raise the work equipment to a greater height.
2. Operate the right and left travel levers (5), or the right or left travel pedals (6) as follows:
When sprocket (A) is situated at the rear of the machine;
Start the machine either by pushing lever (5) forward slowly or
by stepping on the front part of pedal (6) slowly.
When sprocket is situated at the front of the machine;

Start the machine either by pulling lever (5) back slowly or by
stepping on the rear part of pedal (6) slowly.
3. Check that the travel alarm sounds properly. If the travel alarm does not sound, contact your Komatsu distributor
for repair.
REMARK
In cold temperatures, if the machine travel speed is not normal, thoroughly perform the warming-up operation.
In addition, if the undercarriage is clogged with mud and the machine travel speed is not normal, remove the soil and
mud from the undercarriage.
3 - 153
.
Moving Machine Backward

securely to FREE position (F). Set the work equipment in the
travel posture and raise it 40 to 50 cm {16 to 20 in} from the
ground.
If the work equipment blocks the view and it is difficult to
travel in safety, raise the work equipment to a greater height.
2. Operate the right and left travel levers (5), or the right or left travel pedals (6) as follows:
When sprocket (A) is at the rear of the machine:
Slowly pull the levers (5) backward, or slowly depress the rear
part of the pedals (6) to move the machine backward.
When sprocket (A) is at the front of the machine:

Slowly push the levers (5) forward, or slowly depress the front
part of the pedals (6) to move the machine backward.
3. Check that the travel alarm sounds properly. If the travel alarm does not sound, contact your Komatsu distributor
for repair.
REMARK
In cold temperatures, if the machine travel speed is not normal, thoroughly perform the warming-up operation.
In addition, if the undercarriage is clogged with mud and the machine travel speed is not normal, remove the soil and
mud from the undercarriage.
3 - 154
.
Stopping Machine
Avoid stopping suddenly. Give yourself ample room when stopping.
1. Put the left and right travel levers (1) in NEUTRAL position,
then stop the machine.
3 - 155
.
STEERING THE MACHINE
Steering
WARNING
Before operating the travel levers or travel pedals, check the direction that the track frame is facing (the position of the sprocket).
When the sprocket is at the front, the direction of operation of the travel levers or control pedals is the opposite from the direction
of movement of the machine.
Use the travel levers to change direction.

Avoid sudden changes of direction as much as possible.
Especially when performing counter-rotation (spin turn), stop the
machine before turning.
Operate 2 travel levers (1) as follows.
Steering the Machine when Stopped

When turning to the left:
Push the right travel lever forward to turn to the left when traveling
forward; and pull it back to turn left when traveling in reverse.
(A): Forward left turn
(B): Reverse left turn
REMARK
When turning to the right, operate the left travel lever in the same
way.
3 - 156
.
Changing Direction of the Machine

When turning to the left:
If the left travel lever is returned to NEUTRAL position, the machine
will turn to the left.
(A): Forward left turn
(B): Reverse left turn
REMARK
When turning to the right, operate the right travel lever in the same
way.
Counter-rotation Turn (Spin Turn)

When using counter-rotation (spin turn) to turn left, pull the left
travel lever back and push the right travel lever forward.
REMARK
When using counter-rotation to turn right, pull the right travel lever
back and push the left travel lever forward.
3 - 157
.
SWINGING
WARNING
The tail of the machine extends outside the tracks. Before operating the swing, check that the area around the machine is safe.
If the lever is operated when the engine speed has been lowered by the auto-deceleration function, the engine speed will
suddenly rise, operate the levers carefully.
1. Before starting the swing operation, turn swing lock switch (1)
OFF and check that swing lock monitor (2) has gone out.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
2. Operate left work equipment control lever (3) to swing the

upper structure.
(A): Left swing
(B): Right swing
3. When not using the swing, turn swing lock switch (1) ON.
Check that swing lock monitor (2) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
3 - 158
.
WORK EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND OPERATIONS

WARNING
If the lever is operated when the engine speed has been lowered by the auto-deceleration function, the engine speed will suddenly
rise, operate the levers carefully.
Use the control levers to operate the work equipment.

Note that when the levers are released, they return to HOLD position and the work equipment is held in that position.
Arm control
Move the left work equipment control lever to the front or rear to
operate the arm.
Swing control
Move the left work equipment control lever to the left or right to
swing the upper structure.
Boom control
Move the right work equipment control lever to the front or rear
to operate the boom.
Bucket control
Move the right work equipment control lever to the left or right to
operate the bucket.
3 - 159
.
If the work equipment control levers are returned to NEUTRAL position when the machine is stopped, even if the
fuel control dial is set to High idle (MAX), the auto-deceleration mechanism will act to reduce the engine speed to
a mid-range speed.
REMARK
The control circuit on this machine is equipped with an accumulator. Even if the engine is stopped, if the starting
switch key is turned to ON position within 15 seconds after stopping the engine, and the lock lever is set to FREE
position, it is possible to use the lever operation to lower the work equipment to the ground.
This procedure can also be used for releasing the remaining pressure in the hydraulic cylinder circuits or for lowering
the boom after loading the machine onto a trailer.
3 - 160
.
WORKING MODE
Working Mode
Use working mode selector switch (1) to select the working mode that matches the operating conditions or purpose.
This will make it possible to perform operations efficiently.
Use the following procedure to select the most efficient working mode.
When the starting switch is turned ON, the working mode is set to the mode that was in operation when the starting
switch was last turned OFF.
Use the working mode switch to set the mode to the most efficient
mode to match the type of work.
Working
Applicable operations
mode
Normal digging or loading operations
P mode
(operations with emphasis on production)
Normal digging or loading operations
E mode
(operations with emphasis on fuel consumption)
L mode Aligning position (fine control operations)
B mode Breaker operations
Operations with the crusher or other

ATT mode
double-acting action attachment
NOTICE
If breaker operations are performed in a mode other than the breaker mode, there is danger of breakage of the hydraulic
equipment. Do not perform breaker operations in any mode except the breaker mode.
1. If working mode selector switch (1) is pressed, the working

mode selection screen is displayed on the monitor.
3 - 161
.
2. Press switches F3 or F4 at the bottom of the screen or the

working mode selector switch to select the appropriate mode.
3. After selecting the desired mode, press switch F6 to accept the

change. The screen returns to the standard screen.
If switch F5 is pressed, the screen returns to the standard
screen without changing the mode.
If a working mode is selected, and nothing is done for 5
seconds, the selected working mode is automatically
accepted and the screen returns to the standard screen.
If a working mode is selected and working mode switch (1)
is kept pressed, the selected mode is accepted and the
screen returns to the standard screen.
If the breaker mode is selected, "Really Set Breaker Mode?"

is displayed on the screen.
To set to the breaker mode, press switch F6.
If switch F5 is pressed, the screen returns to the working
mode selection screen.
One-Touch Power Max. Switch

The one-touch power max. Switch can be used during operations to increase the power. Make effective use of this
function whenever necessary in combination with the working mode.
Press the left knob switch and keep it pressed. The power is
increased as long as the switch is being pressed. However, the
increased power is automatically canceled after 8.5 seconds.
This function is not actuated when the working mode is set to L

mode or B mode.
3 - 162
.
WARNING
If it is necessary to operate the work equipment control lever when the machine is traveling, stop the machine, then operate
the control lever.
If any lever is operated when the auto-deceleration is being actuated, the engine speed will suddenly increase, so be careful
when operating.
Do Not Use the Swing Force to Hit and Give Shocks to the Object
Do not use the swing force to compact soil or break objects. This
is not only dangerous, but will also drastically reduce the life of the
machine.
Operations Using Travel Force

Do not dig the bucket into the ground and use the travel force to
perform excavation. This will damage the machine or work
equipment.
Prohibition of Operations Using Hydraulic Cylinders to Stroke Ends

If the work equipment is used with the cylinder rod operated to its
stroke end, and given impact by some external force, the hydraulic
cylinders will be damaged, causing personal injury. Avoid
operations with the hydraulic cylinder fully retracted or fully
extended.
3 - 163
.
Operations Using Bucket Dropping Force

Do not use the dropping force of the machine for digging, or use the
dropping force of the bucket as s pickaxe, breaker, or pile driver.
This will drastically reduce the life of the machine.
Operations Using Machine Dropping Force

Do not use the dropping force of the machine for digging.
Digging Hard Rocky Ground

Do not attempt to directly excavate hard rocky ground with the work equipment. It is better to excavate it after
breaking up by some other means. This will not only save the machine from damage but will make for better
economy.
Sudden Lever or Pedal Shifting High Speed Travel

(1) Do not operate the levers and pedals suddenly or take any
other action to move the machine quickly.
(2) Do not operate the levers or pedals suddenly from FORWARD
(A) to REVERSE (B) (or from REVERSE (B) to FORWARD (A)).
(3) Do not operate the levers or pedals suddenly (do not release
them suddenly) to stop the machine when traveling at high
speed.
3 - 164
.
Long-Time Continuous Travel Operations

If the machine travels continuously at high speed for 1.5 hours or
more, the lubricating oil inside the track rollers and final drive will
rise to a high temperature. There is a danger that this will cause
damage to the oil seal or leakage of oil.
When traveling continuously for a long time, stop the machine for
30 minutes every 1.5 hours to allow the lubricating oil inside the
track rollers and final drive to cool down.
3 - 165
.
GENERAL OPERATION INFORMATION
Traveling
Traveling over boulders, tree stumps, or other obstacles will cause
a big shock to the chassis (and in particular to the tracks), and this
will cause damage to the machine. For this reason, always remove
any obstacles or travel around them, or take other steps to avoid
traveling over such obstacles as far as possible.
If there is no way to avoid traveling over an obstacle, reduce the
travel speed, keep the work equipment close to the ground, and try
to travel so that the center of the track passes over the obstacle.
High Speed Travel

On uneven roadbeds such as rock beds or uneven roads with large
rocks, travel at Lo speed. When traveling at high speed, set the
idler in the forward direction.
Press travel speed selector switch (1) to change the travel
speed. The travel speed (Lo, Hi) is displayed on travel speed
monitor (2).
3 - 166
.
PERMISSIBLE DEPTH OF WATER, SOIL AND DIRT
NOTICE
When driving the machine out of water, if the angle of the machine exceeds
15 deg., the rear of the upper structure will go under water, and water will
be thrown up by the cooling fan. This may cause the fan to break.
Be extremely careful when driving the machine out of water.
Do not drive the machine in water or soil and dirt deeper than the
center of carrier roller (1).
After the job, be sure to supply grease to the parts which have been
under water for a long time until the used grease is projected.
(around the bucket pin, in particular)
3 - 167
.
TRAVELING ON SLOPES
WARNING
Turning or operating the work equipment when working on slopes may
cause the machine to lose it balance and turn over, so avoid such
operations.
It is particularly dangerous to swing downhill when the bucket is loaded.
If such operations have to be performed, pile soil to make a platform (A)
on the slope so the machine is kept horizontal during operation.
Do not work on a slope covered with the steel plates. Even with slight
slopes there is a hazard that the machine may slip.
Do not travel up or down steep slopes. There is a danger that the
machine may turn over.
When traveling, raise the bucket approximately 20 to 30 cm (8 to 12 in)
from the ground.
Do not travel downhill in reverse.
Never turn on slopes or travel across slopes.
Always go down to a flat place to perform these operations. It may be
longer, but it will ensure safety.
Always operate or travel in such a way that it is possible to stop safely
at any time if the machine slips or becomes unstable.
When traveling uphill, if the shoes slip or it is impossible to travel uphill
using only the force of the tracks, do not use the pulling force of the arm
to help the machine travel uphill. There is danger that the machine may
turn over.
1. When traveling down steep hills, use the travel lever and fuel
control dial to keep the travel speed low. When traveling down
a steep hill of more than 15 deg., set the work equipment to the
posture shown in the diagram on the right, and lower the
engine speed.
2. When traveling up a steep hill of more than 15 deg., set the

work equipment to the posture shown in the figure on the right.
3 - 168
.
When traveling up a steep slope, extend the work equipment to

the front to improve the balance, keep the work equipment
approximately 20 to 30 cm {8 to 12 in} above the ground, and
Traveling Downhill
Put the travel lever in NEUTRAL position. This will cause the brake to be automatically applied.
Engine Stopped on Slope

If the engine stops when traveling uphill, move the travel levers to NEUTRAL position, lower the bucket to the
ground, stop the machine, then start the engine again.
Cab Doors on Slope

If the engine stops when the machine is on a slope, never use the left work equipment control lever to perform
swing operations. The upper structure will swing under its own weight.
Do not open or close the door when the machine is on a slope. The operating effort may suddenly change.
Always keep the door locked in position when it is open and when it is closed.
3 - 169
.
ESCAPE FROM MUD

Always operate carefully to avoid getting stuck in mud. If the machine does get stuck in mud, do as follows to get
the machine out.
Track on One Side Stuck
NOTICE
When using the boom or arm to raise the machine, always have the bottom
of the bucket in contact with the ground. The angle between the boom and
arm should be 90 deg. to 110 deg.
The same applies when using the bucket installed in the reverse direction.
When only one side is stuck in mud, use the bucket to raise the
track, then lay boards or logs and drive the machine out.
Tracks on Both Sides Stuck

When the tracks on both sides are stuck in mud and they slip,
making it impossible for the machine to move, lay boards or logs as
explained above, and dig the bucket into the ground in front. Then
pull in the arm as in normal digging operations and put the travel
levers in FORWARD position to pull the machine out.
3 - 170
.
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS
In addition to the following, it is possible to further increase the range of applications by using various attachments.
Backhoe Work
A backhoe is suitable for excavating areas that are lower than the
machine.
When the condition of the machine is as shown in the diagram on
the right (angle between [bucket cylinder and link] and [arm
cylinder and arm] is 90 deg.), the maximum excavation force is
obtained from the pushing force of each cylinder.
When excavating, use this angle effectively to optimize your
working efficiency.
The range for excavating with the arm is from 45 deg. away from
the machine to 30 deg. towards the machine.
There may be some differences depending on the excavation
depth, but try to stay within the above range rather than operating
the cylinder to the end of its stroke.
Shovel Work
A shovel is suitable for excavating at a position higher than the
machine. Shovel work is performed by attaching the bucket in the
reverse direction.
Ditching Work
Ditching work can be performed efficiently by attaching a bucket
which matches the digging operation and then setting the tracks
parallel to the line of the ditch to be excavated.
To excavate a wide ditch, first dig both sides and then finally
remove the center portion.
3 - 171
.
Loading Work
In places where the swing angle is narrow, work efficiency can be
enhanced by locating the dump truck in a place easily visible to the
operator.
Loading is easier and capacity greater if you begin from the front of
the dump truck body than if loading is done from the side.
3 - 172
.
BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION

WARNING
When pins are knocked in with a hammer, pieces of metal may fly and cause serious injury.
When performing this operation, always wear goggles, hard hat, gloves, and other protective equipment.
When the bucket is removed, place it in a stable condition.
If pins are hit with a strong force, there is a hazard that the pin may fly out and injure people in the surrounding area. Make sure
that there is no one in the surrounding area before starting the operation.
When removing the pins, do not stand behind the bucket. In addition, be extremely careful not to put your foot under the bucket
while standing at the side for the work.
When removing or inserting pins, be extremely careful not to get your fingers caught.
Never insert your fingers into the pin holes when aligning the holes.
Stop the machine on a firm and flat surface and do the work. When performing joint work, appoint a lead and follow
that person's instructions and signals.
Replacement
1. Place the bucket in contact with a flat surface.
REMARK
When removing the pins, place the bucket so that it is in light
contact with the ground.
If the bucket is lowered strongly to the ground, the resistance will
be increased and it will be difficult to remove the pins.
NOTICE
After removing the pins, make sure that mud or sand does not get on them.
Dust seals are fitted at both ends of the bushings, be careful not to damage
them.
2. Remove the double nut on the stopper bolt for arm pin (A) and
link pin (B), remove the bolt, pull out arm pin (A) and link pin (B),
and then remove the bucket.
3. Align the arm (5) with holes (1) of the replacement bucket and
the link (6) with holes (2), then insert grease-coated pins (A)
and (B) into hole (1) and hole (2) respectively.
REMARK
Carry out installation in the reverse order to removal.
When installing the bucket (4), the O-rings (3) are easily
damaged, fit the O-rings (3) on the boss of the arm (5) end as
shown in the figure. When knocking the pin, move the O-ring (3)
down to the regular groove.
4. Install the stopper bolts and nuts for each pin, then grease the pin.
3 - 173
.
Inversion
WARNING
When reversing a bucket, there is the danger that the bucket tooth tip
overruns the normal trajectory and interferes with the cab, thus causing a
serious trouble. Pay good attention to the work when reversing a bucket so
that the bucket and the cab may not interfere with each other.
1. Place the bucket in contact with a flat surface.
REMARK
When removing the pins, place the bucket so that it is in light
contact with the ground.
If the bucket is lowered strongly to the ground, the resistance will
be increased and it will be difficult to remove the pins.
NOTICE
After removing the pins, make sure that mud or sand does not get on them.
Dust seals are fitted at both ends of the bushings, be careful not to damage
them.
2. Remove the double nut on the stopper bolt for arm pin (A) and
link pin (B), remove the bolt, pull out arm pin (A) and link pin (B),
and then remove the bucket.
3 - 174
.
3. Turn the removed bucket. After turning the bucket, align the
arm (5) with link (6) mounting hole (1), then align the link (6)
with arm (5) mounting hole (2) and install.
4. Insert grease-coated pins (A) and (B) into hole (1) and hole (2)
respectively.
REMARK
Install the O-ring (3) into retaining hole (1) of the arm (5) and bucket
(4).
When installing the bucket (4), the O-rings (3) are easily damaged,
so fit the O-rings (3) on the boss of the arm (5) end as shown in the
figure on the right. When knocking in the pins, move the O-ring (3)
down to the regular groove.
5. Install the stopper bolts and nuts for each pin, then grease the pin.
3 - 175
.
PARKING MACHINE
WARNING
Avoid stopping suddenly. Give yourself ample room when stopping.
When stopping the machine, select flat hard ground and avoid
dangerous places.
If it is unavoidably necessary to park the machine on a slope, insert
blocks underneath the track shoes. As an additional safety measure,
thrust the bucket into the ground.
If the control lever is touched by accident, the machine may move
suddenly, and this may lead to a serious accident.
Before leaving the operator's compartment, always set the lock lever
securely to LOCK position.
1. Put left and right travel levers (1) in NEUTRAL position.

The machine stops.
2. Turn fuel control dial (2) to Low idle (MIN) position and lower
the engine speed.
3 - 176
.
3. Lower the bucket horizontally until the bottom touches the

ground.
4. Operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever (3) to set it to
the LOCK position (L).
5. Check the engine cooling water temperature and engine oil

pressure with the machine monitor.
If the coolant temperature gauge is in the red range, allow it
to cool until the indicator enters the green range, then stop
the engine. For details of the inspection and action to take,
see "TROUBLES AND ACTIONS (PAGE 3-200)".
If the engine oil pressure monitor is lit, stop the engine
immediately. For details of the inspection and action to take,
see "TROUBLES AND ACTIONS (PAGE 3-200)".
6. Stop the engine. For details on the procedure for stopping the
engine, see "STOPPING THE ENGINE (PAGE 3-151)".
To secure a sufficient space to get off the machine, move the operator's seat and console backward if they are
positioned forward.
MACHINE INSPECTION AFTER DAILY WORK

1. Walk around the machine and check the work equipment, machine exterior, and undercarriage, also check for
any leakage of oil or coolant. If any problems are found, repair them.
2. Fill the fuel tank.
3. Check the engine compartment for paper and debris. Clean out any paper and debris to avoid a fire hazard.
4. Remove any mud affixed to the undercarriage.
3 - 177
.
LOCKING
Always lock the following places.
(1) Operator's cab door
Always close the window.
(2) Fuel tank filler port
(3) Engine hood
(4) Toolbox cover
(5) Left side door of the machine
(6) Right side door of the machine
(7) Air conditioner FRESH filter intake port
REMARK
Use the starting switch key to lock and unlock all these places.
3 - 178
.
ROAD LINERS
(Machine equipped with road liner)
Road Liners Information

Road liner have excellent properties that are not found in steel shoes. However, if they are used in the same way
as steel shoes, full use cannot be made of their advantages.
Be sure to operate without straining the rubber shoes in a way that matches the condition of the jobsite and the
nature of the work.
Comparison of Road Liners and Metal Shoes

Road liner Steel shoe
Little vibration w Δ
Smooth travel (No creaks)  
Little noise w Δ
No damage to paved surface w Δ
Easily damage  w
Strong drawber pull w w
w: Excellent
: Good
Δ: Average
Considering the properities of the material used, rubber shoes and road liners offer various advantages. How-ever,
thier weak point is lack of strength. Therefore, it is important to understand the advantages of rubber shoes and road
liners, and to follow the precautions regarding handling and prohibited work. This will extend the life of the
rubbershoes and road liners and will enable the machine to display the advantages of rubber shoes and road liners
to the maximum. Before using rubber shoes and road liner, always read "Using Road Liners (PAGE 3-180)".
Warranty for Road Liners

It is important to inspect and maintain the tracks at the correct tension. Furthermore, these shoes must not be used
near objects where they are likely to suffer damage, such as the corners of steel plates, U-shaped ditch liners,
blocks, on crushed rock or the sharp edges of rocks, iron beams, or scrap iron.
Any damage resulting from the customer's mistaken use of the machine shall not be included in the scope of the
warranty.
3 - 179
.
Using Road Liners
Prohibited Works
Do not carry out the following types of work.
Carrying out operations and steering on crushed rock, extremely rough hard rock, steel beams, scrap iron, or near
the edges of steel plates will cause damage to the rubber shoes and road liners.
In places such as river beds where there are large numbers of large and small boulders, the stones may get
caught and damage the rubber shoes and road liners or make the shoes come off. If dozing operations are carried
out when the shoes are slipping, this will reduce the life of the rubber shoes and road liner.
Be careful not to get oil, fuel, or chemical solvent on the rubber shoes and road liners. If such a substance shold
get on the shoes, remove it immediately. Furthermore, do not travel on road surfaces where oil has collected.
When putting the machine into long-term storage (3 months or more), store the machine indoors where it is
protected from direct sunlight or rain.
Do not use the machine in high-temperature areas, such as areas where there is burning wood, steel plates that
have been left under the hot sun, or places where asphalt has been laid.
When the rubber parts of the road liner are so worn or broken that the head of the mounting bolts are scratched,
replace the shoe immediately. If the bolt heads are broken, the bolt cannot be removed.
When installing road liners, always install them to all links on both sides. If they are installed to only one part of
the links, their durability will be greatly reduced.
Long Life Operations

Be careful of the following points when carrying out work.
Avoid carrying out counterrotation turns on concrete surfaces. There is danger that the concrete surface will
scrape off the rubber from the shoe.
Avoid making sudden changes in direction. This may cause premature wear or damage to the rubber shoes and
road liners.
Avoid operating the steering when traveling over places where there is a big difference in height. When traveling
over obstacles or places where there is a difference in height, drive the machine at right angles to the obstacle
to prevent the shoes from coming off.
If the machine has been raised using the bucket, lower it slowly.
Avoid doing work with materials that produce oil when crushed (soy beans, corn, or remains of vegetables
squeezed for oil); or wash the machine after use.
Avoid handling materials that will attack the adhesion of the steel core, such as salt, ammonium sulphate,
potassium chloride, potassium sulphate, or calcium superphosphate; or wash the machine after use.
The adhesion of the core will be attacked by salt, so avoid using the machine in coastal areas.
When handling salt, sugar, wheat, or soy beans, if there is any deep cut in the rubber shoes and road liners, these
substances may get into the lugs or cut portion of the rubber. Always repair the rubber before use.
Do not carry out work that involves scraping against walls or concrete embankments.
Road liners slip extremely easily on snow or frozen roads. Be careful not to slip when traveling or working on
slopes.
The properties of road liners change when working in extermely cold places, and this will reduce the life of the
rubber shoes and road liners.
Because of the properties of rubber, use the road liners within a range of -25°C to +65°C (-13°F to +149°F).
When carrying out bucket operations, be careful not to damage the road liners with the bucket.
3 - 180
.
OPERATION TRANSPORTATION
TRANSPORTATION
When transporting the machine, observe all related laws and regulations, and be careful to assure safety.
TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE
Select the method of transportation to match the weight and dimensions given in "SPECIFICATIONS (PAGE
5-2)".
Note that the weight and dimensions given in SPECIFICATIONS may differ according to the type of shoe or arm,
or other attachments.
Consult your Komatsu distributor for details of the procedure for transporting machines with a protective guard
installed for the operator's cab.
3 - 181
.
TRANSPORTATION OPERATION
LOADING AND UNLOADING WITH TRAILER

WARNING
Always obey the following when loading or unloading the machine from a
trailer.
Select firm, level ground when loading or unloading the machine.
Maintain a safe distance from the edge of the road.
Always turn the auto-deceleration switch OFF (cancel).
If the auto-deceleration switch is left ON, the machine may suddenly
start moving.
Always set the travel speed switch to low speed (Lo), run the engine at
low idle, and operate the machine slowly when loading or unloading.
In cold areas, perform the warming-up operation thoroughly and make
sure that the engine speed is stable before performing the loading or
unloading operation.
Never correct your steering on the ramps. There is danger that the
machine may tip over.
If necessary, drive off the ramps or back on to the trailer and correct the
direction.
It is dangerous to use the work equipment for loading and unloading
operations. Always use ramps.
When on the ramps, do not operate any lever except the travel lever.
The center of gravity of the machine will change suddenly at the joint
between the ramps and the trailer, and there is danger of the machine
losing its balance.
Travel slowly over this point.
If it is necessary to swing the work equipment on the trailer platform, the
footing is unstable, so be extremely careful that the machine does not
tip over.
If the work equipment is installed to the machine, pull the work
equipment in, and operate slowly to prevent the machine from losing its
balance.
Position a flagman to give guidance to prevent the machine from
coming off the ramps and to ensure safety in the operation.
Always observe the following regarding the ramps and trailer platform.
Use ramps with ample width, length, thickness, and strength and install
them at a maximum slope of 15 deg.
When using piled soil, compact the piled soil fully to prevent the slope
face from collapsing.
Clean the machine tracks and ramps before starting in order to prevent
the machine from slipping on the ramps.
There is danger of the machine slipping if there is water, snow, grease,
oil, or ice on the ramp surface.
When loading or unloading, always use ramps or a platform. Proceed as follows.
3 - 182
.
Loading
1. Load on firm level ground only.
Maintain a safe distance from the edge of a road.
2. Apply the trailer brakes securely, then put blocks (1) under the
tires to prevent the trailer from moving.
Set left and right ramps (2) parallel to each other and
equally spaced to the left and right of center (3) of the trailer.
Make angle of installation (4) a maximum of 15 deg. If the
ramps bend a large amount under the weight of the
machine, put blocks under the ramps to prevent them from
bending.
3. Turn the travel speed selector switch to low speed travel (Lo
lamp lights up).
Press travel speed selector switch (5) to switch the travel
speed. The travel speed (Lo, Hi) is displayed on the travel
speed monitor (6).
4. Turn auto-deceleration switch (7) OFF and operate the fuel

control dial to set the engine speed to Low idle (MIN).
Each time auto-deceleration switch (7) is pressed, it
switches OFF  ON  OFF in turn.
When auto-deceleration switch (7) is turned OFF, the
auto-deceleration monitor (8) goes out.
5. Turn the swing lock switch ON to apply the swing lock.

When the swing lock switch is turned to ON position, the
swing lock monitor (9) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
3 - 183
.
6. If the machine is equipped with work equipment, set the work

equipment at the front, and travel forward to load it; if it has no
work equipment, travel in reverse to load it.
Follow instructions and signals of a conductor particularly
when traveling in reverse.
7. Before moving onto the ramps, make sure that the machine is
positioned in a straight line with the ramps and that the
centerline of the machine matches that of the trailer.
Align the direction of travel with the ramps and travel slowly.
Lower the work equipment as far as possible without causing
interference.
When on the ramps, operate only the travel lever. Do not
operate any other lever.
8. When loading or unloading a machine with the work equipment

installed, at the point where the tracks are on both the ramps
and the ground surface, turn the swing lock switch OFF, then
swing the upper structure slowly 180 deg.
After doing that, drive slowly in reverse and load the machine
onto the trailer.
9. Turn the swing lock switch ON to apply the swing lock.

When the swing lock switch is turned to ON position, the
swing lock monitor (9) lights up.
(a): ON position
(b): OFF position
3 - 184
.
10. When the machine travels over the rear wheels of the trailer, it
becomes unstable, drive slowly and carefully. (Never operate
the steering.)
11. At the moment the machine passes the rear wheels, it tilts
forward, be careful not to let the work equipment hit the trailer
body. Drive the machine forward to the specified position, then
stop the machine.
12. Lower the work equipment on top of wooden blocks.
3 - 185
.
Securing Machine
NOTICE
Stow the radio antenna. Reassemble the mirrors so that they are within the width of the machine.
To prevent damage to the bucket cylinder during transportation, put a wooden block under the tip of the bucket link to prevent
the bucket cylinder from touching the floor.
Check that the engine hood catch is locked. Hold the grip of the engine hood and raise it slightly. If it does not open, the catch
is locked.
If the engine hood catch is not locked, there is danger that the engine hood may open during transportation.
Load the machine onto a trailer as follows:

1. Extend the bucket and arm cylinders fully, then lower the boom
slowly.
2. Operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever to set it to the
LOCK position (L) securely.
3. Stop the engine, then remove the key from the starting switch.
4. Close all doors, windows, and covers.
Lock the covers, caps, and doors fitted with locks.
5. Place blocks under both ends of the tracks to prevent the

machine from moving during transportation, and secure the
machine with chains or wire rope of suitable strength.
Be particularly careful to secure the machine in position so it
does not slip to the side.
3 - 186
.
Stowing Radio Antenna

Loosen bolt (2) of radio antenna (1) at the rear of the cab, lower
the antenna, then tighten bolt (2) again to secure radio antenna
(1) in position.
When unloading the machine from the trailer and operating it,
follow the opposite procedure from stowing to set radio antenna
(1) vertical, then secure it in position with bolt (2).
Rearview Mirrors
The mirrors are at the positions shown in the diagram on the right.
If they are damaged, or are to be removed for shipment, or are to
be installed again, use the following procedure.
After installing the mirrors, be sure to adjust them, referring to
"Adjustment of Mirrors and Camera (PAGE 3-127)".
3 - 187
.
Removal
Mirrors (A), (B)
1. Loosen mounting bolt (2), then remove mirror (1) from support
(3).
2. Loosen bolt (4) and remove support (3) and clamp (5) from the
handrail.
Installation
Mirrors (A), (B)
1. Install support (3) and clamp (5) to the handrail, then tighten
with bolt (4).
2. Install mirror (1) to support (3),then tighten lock bolt (2).
3 - 188
.
Unloading
1. Unload on firm level ground only. Maintain a safe distance from the edge of a road.
2. Apply the trailer brakes securely, then put blocks (1) under the
tires to prevent the trailer from moving.
Set left and right ramps (2) parallel to each other and
equally spaced to the left and right of center (3) of the trailer.
Make angle of installation (4) a maximum of 15 deg. If the
ramps bend a large amount under the weight of the
machine, put blocks under the ramps to prevent them from
bending.
3. Remove the chains and wire ropes fastening the machine.

4. Start the engine.
Warm the engine up fully.
FREE position (F).
6. Turn the travel speed selector switch to low speed travel (Lo
lamp lights up).
Press travel speed selector switch (5) to switch the travel
speed. The travel speed (Lo, Hi) is displayed on the travel
speed monitor (6).
7. Turn auto-deceleration switch (7) OFF and operate the fuel

control dial to set the engine speed to Low idle (MIN).
Each time auto-deceleration switch (7) is pressed, it
switches OFF  ON  OFF in turn.
When auto-deceleration switch (7) is turned OFF, the
auto-deceleration monitor (8) goes out.
3 - 189
.
8. Raise the work equipment, pull in the arm under the boom,
then move the machine slowly.
9. When the machine is horizontal on top of the rear wheels of the
trailer, stop the machine.
NOTICE
When unloading the machine, always keep the arm and boom at an
angle of 90 deg. to 110 deg.
If the machine is unloaded with the arm pulled in, it will cause damage
to the machine.
When moving onto the ramps, do not thrust the bucket into the ground.
This will cause damage to the hydraulic cylinders.
10. When moving from the rear of the trailer on to the ramps, set
the angle of the arm and boom to 90 deg. to 110 deg., lower the
bucket to the ground, then move the machine slowly.
11. When moving down the ramps, operate the boom and arm
slowly to lower the machine carefully until it is completely off
the ramps.
3 - 190
.
LIFTING MACHINE
WARNING
The operator performing the lifting operation using a crane must be a properly qualified crane operator.
Never raise the machine with any worker on it.
Always make sure that the wire rope is of ample strength for the weight of this machine.
When lifting, keep the machine horizontal.
When performing lifting operations, set the lock lever to LOCK position to prevent the machine from moving unexpectedly.
Never enter the area under or around a raised machine.
Never try to lift the machine in any posture other than the posture given in the procedure below or using lifting equipment other
than in the procedure below.
There is a hazard that the machine may lose its balance.
NOTICE
This method of lifting applies to the standard specification machine.
The method of lifting differs according to the attachments and options installed.
For details of the procedure for machines that are not the standard specification, consult your Komatsu distributor.
For weight, see "SPECIFICATIONS (PAGE 5-2)".

When lifting the machine, perform the operation on flat ground as follows.
Standard Specification Machine

1. Start the engine, then the swing the upper structure so that the work equipment will be on the side of sprocket
(1).
2. Extend the bucket cylinder and arm cylinder fully, then lower
the work equipment to the ground as shown in the figure on the
right using the boom cylinder.
4. Stop the engine, check that there is nothing around the operator's compartment, then get off the machine.
Close the cab door and front glass securely.
3 - 191
.
5. Pass wire ropes between the 1st and 2nd track rollers from the
front and between the 1st and 2nd track rollers from the rear.
However, for machines equipped with a full roller guard for the
track roller, pass the wire rope under the track.
6. Set the lifting angle (A) of the wire rope to 30 deg. to 40 deg.,
then lift the machine slowly.
7. After the machine comes off the ground, check the hook
condition and the lifting posture, and then lift slowly.
Machines With Lifting Hook

In the case of machines equipped with a lifting hook, it is possible to lift the machine as follows.
1. The lifting hooks are at the positions shown in the diagram on
the right.
2. Start the engine and set the work equipment to the posture
shown in the diagram on the right. (Boom fully raised, arm,
bucket fully pulled in) set the upper structure facing straight to
the front. (Idler end)
3 - 192
.
4. Stop the engine, check that the area around the operator's cab is safe, then get down from the machine.
Close the cab door, front glass, left and right doors, and engine hood securely.
5. Install shackles to the lifting hooks on top of the boom and counterweight, then fit wire rope.
3 - 193
.
6. As shown in the diagram on the right, select the wire rope so

that lifting point (A) is directly above the center of gravity (B) (a
point 490 mm (19.3 in) to the rear of the swing center).
(A): Lifting point
(B): Center of gravity
(C): Swing center
(D): 320 mm (12.6 in)
(E): Min. 5 m (16 ft 5 in)
(F): Min. 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in)
(G): Min. 3.4 m (11 ft 2 in)
7. When lifting the machine, check that there is no change in the posture of the work equipment caused by leakage
of oil from the hydraulic circuit at the boom cylinder head end.
8. When the machine comes off the ground, stop the lifting operation, check that the machine is balanced, and
when the machine stabilizes, lift it slowly.
3 - 194
.
OPERATION COLD WEATHER OPERATION
COLD WEATHER OPERATION

COLD WEATHER OPERATION INFORMATION
If the temperature becomes low, it becomes difficult to start the engine, and the coolant may freeze, so do as follows.
Fuel and Lubricants

Change to fuel and oil with low viscosity for all components. For details of the specified viscosity, see
"RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT (PAGE 4-13)".
Cooling System Coolant

WARNING
Coolant is toxic. Be careful not to get it into your eyes or on your skin. If it should get into your eyes or on your skin, wash it
off with large amounts of fresh water and see a doctor at once.
When changing the coolant or when handling the cooling water containing coolant that has been drained during repair of
radiator, contact your Komatsu distributor or request a specialist company to perform the operation. Coolant is toxic. Do not
let it flow into drainage ditches or spray it onto the ground surface.
NOTICE
Use Komatsu genuine SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC) for the coolant. As a basic rule, we do not recommend the use of any coolant
other than SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC).
Coolant is already diluted with distilled water, so it is not flammable.

For details of the density of coolant and the interval for changing the coolant, see "CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING
SYSTEM (PAGE 4-29)".
3 - 195
.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION OPERATION
Battery
WARNING
The battery generates flammable gas. Do not bring open flame near the battery.
Battery electrolyte is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin, wash it off with a large amount of water and consult a
doctor.
Battery electrolyte dissolves paint. If it gets on the bodywork, wash it off immediately with water.
If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source. There is danger
that the battery may explode.
Battery electrolyte is toxic. Do not let it flow into drainage ditches or spray it on to the ground surface.
When the ambient temperature drops, the capacity of the battery will also drop. If the battery charge ratio is low, the
battery electrolyte may freeze. Maintain the battery charge as close as possible to 100%. Insulate it against cold
temperature to ensure the machine can be started easily the next morning.
REMARK
Measure the specific gravity and calculate the charging rate from the following conversion table.
Electrolyte
Temperature 20°C 0°C -10°C -20°C
Charging (68°F) (32°F) (14°F) (-4°F)
Rate (%)
100 1.28 1.29 1.30 1.31
90 1.26 1.27 1.28 1.29
80 1.24 1.25 1.26 1.27
75 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.26
The battery's capacity drastically drops at a low ambient temperature. Therefore either cover it with a moisture-
free sheet, or remove it from the machine after the day's work, keep in a warm place and install again next day.
If the electrolyte level is low, add distilled water in the morning before beginning work. Do not add water after the
day's work to prevent diluted electrolyte in the battery from freezing during the night.
3 - 196
.
OPERATION COLD WEATHER OPERATION
AFTER DAILY WORK COMPLETION

WARNING
Performing idle-running of the tracks is dangerous, stay well away from the tracks.
To prevent mud, water, or the undercarriage from freezing and making it impossible for the machine to move on the
following morning, observe the following precautions.
Remove all the mud and water from the machine. In particular, wipe the hydraulic cylinder rods clean to prevent
damage to the seal caused by mud, dirt, or drops of water on the rod from getting inside the seal.
Park the machine on hard, dry ground.
If this is impossible, park the machine on boards.
The boards prevent the tracks from freezing to the ground, and allow the machine to be moved the next morning.
Open the drain valve and drain any water collected in the fuel system to prevent it from freezing.
Fill the fuel tank to capacity. This minimizes moisture condensation in the tank when the temperature drops.
After operation in water or mud, remove water from undercarriage as described below to extend undercarriage
service life.
1. Swing 90 deg. with engine at Low idle (MIN) and bring the work
equipment to the side of the track.
2. Jack up the machine until the track is raised slightly from the
ground. Rotate the track under no load. Repeat this procedure
on both the left and right sides.
AFTER COLD WEATHER SEASON

When the season changes and the weather becomes warmer, do as follows.
Replace the fuel and oil for all parts with oil of the viscosity specified.
For details, see "RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT (PAGE 4-13)".
3 - 197
.
LONG TERM STORAGE OPERATION
LONG TERM STORAGE

BEFORE STORAGE
NOTICE
To protect the hydraulic cylinder piston rod while in storage, keep the work
equipment in the posture shown at right.
(This prevents rust from developing on the piston rod)
When putting the machine in storage for a long time (more than 1 month), do as follows.
Clean and wash all parts, then store the machine indoors. If the machine has to be stored outdoors, select level
ground and cover the machine with canvas.
Completely fill the fuel tank. This prevents moisture from collecting.
Lubricate and change the oil before storage.
Coat the exposed portion of the hydraulic cylinder piston rod with grease.
Disconnect the negative terminals of the battery and cover it or remove it from the machine and store it separately.
Lock each control lever and pedal with the lock lever and pedal lock.
Set the attachment control pedal to LOCK position on machines ready for attachments.
Set the stop valve to LOCK position on machines ready for attachments. Install the blind plugs to the elbows.
For details of LOCK and FREE positions of the stop valve, see "ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION (PAGE 6-15)".
To prevent rust, fill with coolant to give a density of at least 30% for the engine coolant.
DURING STORAGE
WARNING
If it is necessary to perform the rust-prevention operation while the machine is indoors, open the doors and windows to improve
ventilation and prevent gas poisoning.
During storage, operate and move the machine for a short distance once a month so that a new film of oil will coat
moving parts. At the same time, also charge the battery.
When operating the work equipment, wipe off all the grease from the hydraulic cylinder rods.
If the machine is equipped with an air conditioner, operate the air conditioner for 3 to 5 minutes once a month to
lubricate all parts of the air conditioner compressor. Always run the engine at Low idle (MIN) when doing this.
In addition, check the refrigerant level twice a year.
3 - 198
.
OPERATION LONG TERM STORAGE
AFTER STORAGE
NOTICE
If the machine has been stored without performing the monthly rust-prevention operation, consult your Komatsu distributor
before using it.
When using the machine after long-term storage, do as follows before using it.
Wipe off the grease from the hydraulic cylinder rods.
Add oil and grease at all lubrication points.
When the machine is stored for a long period, moisture in the air will mix with the oil. Check the oil before and after
starting the engine. If there is water in the oil, change all the oil.
STARTING MACHINE AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE

When starting the engine after long-term storage, perform the warming-up operation thoroughly. For details, see
"Engine Warm Up (PAGE 3-140)".
3 - 199
.
TROUBLES AND ACTIONS OPERATION
TROUBLES AND ACTIONS

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
When starting after running out of fuel, fill with fuel and bleed the air from the fuel system before stating.
For details on bleeding the air, see "REPLACE FUEL PREFILTER CARTRIDGE (PAGE 4-61)", "REPLACE FUEL
MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE (PAGE 4-72)".
PHENOMENA THAT ARE NOT FAILURES

Note that the following phenomena are not failures:
When the arm control lever is operated to IN position and the
work equipment is lowered under no load from a high position,
the arm speed will drop momentarily when the arm is more or
less at the vertical position.
When the bucket control lever is operated to CURL position and

the work equipment is lowered under no load from a high
position, the bucket speed will drop momentarily when the
bucket teeth are more or less at the horizontal position.
The bucket or arm will fluctuate by itself during heavy-duty
digging operations.
When starting or stopping the swing, noise will be emitted from the brake valve.
When going down a steep slope at low speed, a noise will be emitted from the travel motor brake valve.
3 - 200
.
OPERATION TROUBLES AND ACTIONS
TOWING THE MACHINE

WARNING
Serious injury or death could result if a disabled machine is towed
incorrectly or if there is a mistake in the selection or inspection of the wire
rope.
Always check that the wire rope used for towing has ample strength for
the weight of the machine being towed.
Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced diameter (B),
or kinks (C). There is danger that the rope may break during the towing
operation.
Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
Never tow a machine on a slope.
During the towing operation, never stand between the towing machine
and the machine being towed.
Operate the machine slowly and be careful not to apply any sudden load
to the wire rope.
NOTICE
The maximum towing capacity for this machine is 12,500 kg (122,600 N).
Always carry out towing operations within the maximum towing capacity.
If the machine sinks in mud and cannot get out under its own
power, or if the drawbar pull of the excavator is being used to tow
a heavy object, use a wire rope as shown in the figure on the
right.
Place pieces of wood between wire ropes and body to prevent
damage to ropes and body.
Hold the wire rope level and direct it straight to the track frame.
When towing a machine, travel at a speed of less than 1 km/h
(0.6 MPH) for a distance of only a few meters to a place that is
suitable for performing repairs.
This is for use only in emergencies.
3 - 201
.
LIGHTWEIGHT TOWING HOLE

WARNING
The shackle must always be used.
Hold the wire rope level and direct it straight to the track frame.
Move the machine slowly and be careful not to apply any sudden load to the wire rope.
There is a hole in the track frame to fit the shackle when towing light
objects.
Permissible towing load: Max. 65,700 N (6,700 kg)
SEVERE JOB CONDITION

When performing digging operations in water, if the work equipment mounting pin goes into the water, perform
greasing every time the operation is performed.
For heavy-duty operations and deep digging, perform greasing of the work equipment mounting pins every time
before operation.
After greasing, operate the boom, arm and bucket several times, then grease again.
3 - 202
.
DISCHARGED BATTERY
WARNING
It is dangerous to charge a battery installed on a machine. Make sure
that it is removed before charging.
When checking or handling the battery, stop the engine and turn the
starting switch key to OFF position.
The battery generates hydrogen gas, so there is a hazard of explosion.
Do not bring lighted cigarettes near the battery, or do nothing that will
cause sparks.
Battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid, and it will attack your clothes
and skin. If it gets on your clothes or on your skin, immediately wash it
off with a large amount of water. If it gets in your eyes, wash it out with
fresh water and consult a doctor.
When handling batteries, always wear protective eyeglasses and rubber
gloves.
When removing the battery, first disconnect the cable from the ground
(normally the negative (-) terminal). When installing, install the positive
(+) terminal first.
If a tool touches the positive (+) terminal and the chassis, there is
danger that it will cause a spark, so be extremely careful.
If the terminals are loose, there is danger that the defective contact may
generate sparks that will cause an explosion.
When installing the terminal, securely install it.
When removing or installing the terminals, check which is the positive
(+) terminal and which is the negative (-) terminal.
For the removal and installation of battery, see "Battery Removal and
Installation (PAGE 3-203)".
Battery Removal and Installation

Before removing the battery, remove the ground cable (normally connected to the negative (-) terminal).
If a tool touches the positive (+) terminal and the chassis, there is danger that it will cause a spark.
When installing the battery, connect the ground cable last.
When replacing the battery, secure it with battery hold-down.
Tightening torque: Tightening battery terminal: 9.8 to 19.6 Nm (1 to 2.0 kgfm, 7.2 to 14.5 lbft)
3 - 203
.
Battery Charges
When charging the battery, if the battery is not handled correctly,
there is a hazard that the battery may explode. Always follow the
instructions of "DISCHARGED BATTERY (PAGE 3-203)" and the
instruction manual accompanying the charger, and do as follows.
Set the voltage of the charger to match the voltage of the battery
to be charged. If the correct voltage is not selected, the charger
may overheat and cause an explosion.
Connect the positive (+) charger clip of the charger to the
positive (+) terminal of the battery, then connect the negative (-)
charger clip of the charger to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery. Be sure to attach the clips securely.
Set the charging current to 1/10 of the value of the rated battery capacity; when performing rapid charging, set
it to less than the rated battery capacity.
If the charger current is too high, the electrolyte will leak or dry up, and this may cause the battery to catch fire and
explode.
If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source.
There is a danger that this will ignite the battery electrolyte and cause the battery to explode.
Do not use or charge the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below LOWER LEVEL line. This may cause an
explosion. Check the battery electrolyte level periodically and add distilled water to bring the electrolyte level to
UPPER LEVEL line.
3 - 204
.
Starting Engine with Booster Cables

When starting the engine with a booster cable, do as follows.
Connecting and Disconnecting Booster Cables
WARNING
When connecting the cables, never contact the positive (+) and negative
(-) terminals.
When starting the engine with a booster cable, always wear protective
eyeglasses.
Be careful not to let the normal machine and failed machine contact
each other. This prevents sparks from generating near the battery which
could ignite the hydrogen gas given off by the battery. If hydrogen gas
explodes, it could cause serious injury.
Be careful not to make a mistake when connecting a booster cable. In
the last connection (to the upper structure frame), a spark will be
caused, connect the cable to a spot as far away from the battery as
possible. (Avoid the work equipment, however, because it is not a good
conductor)
When removing the booster cable, exercise good care so that the
booster cable clips may not contact each other, or they contact the
chassis.
NOTICE
The starting system for this machine uses 24 V. For the normal machine, also use a 24 V battery.
The size of the booster cable and clip should be suitable for the battry size.
The battery of the normal machine must be the same capacity as that of the engine to be started.
Check the cables and clips for damage or corrosion.
Make sure that the cables and clips are firmly connected.
Check that the lock levers and parking brake levers of both machine are in LOCK position.
Check that each lever is in NEUTRAL position.
3 - 205
.
Booster Cable Connection

Keep the starting switch of the normal machine and failed machine in OFF position.
Connect the booster cable as follows, in the order of the numbers marked in the figure.
1. Connect the clip of booster cable (A) to the positive (+) terminal
of battery (C) on the failed machine.
2. Connect the clip at the other end of booster cable (A) to the
positive (+) terminal of battery (D) on the normal machine.
3. Connect the clip of booster cable (B) to the negative (-) terminal
of battery (D) on the normal machine.
4. Connect the other clip of booster cable (B) to the revolving
frame (E) of the failed machine.
Starting the Engine
WARNING
Always check that the lock lever is set to LOCK position, regardless of whether the machine is working normally or has failed.
Check also that all the control levers are in NEUTRAL position.
1. Make sure the clips are firmly connected to the battery terminals.
2. Start engine of the normal machine and run it at High idle (MAX).
3. Turn the starting switch of the failed machine to START position and start the engine.
If the engine doesn't start at first, try again after 2 minutes or so.
Booster Cable Disconnection

After the engine has started, disconnect the booster cables in the reverse of the order in which they were connected.
1. Remove the clip of booster cable (B) from the revolving frame
(E) of the failed machine.
2. Remove the clip of booster cable (B) from the negative (-)
terminal of battery (D) on the normal machine.
3. Remove the clip of booster cable (A) from the positive (+)
terminal of battery (D) on the normal machine.
4. Remove the clip of booster cable (A) from the positive (+)
terminal of battery (C) on the failed machine.
3 - 206
.
OTHER TROUBLE
Electrical System
( ): Always contact your Komatsu distributor when dealing with these items.
In cases of problems or causes which are not listed below, ask your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
Problem Main causes Remedy

Lamp does not glow brightly even Defective wiring, deterioration of ( Check, repair loose terminals,
when the engine runs at high speed battery disconnections, replace battery)
Lamp flickers while engine is Loose fan belt ( Replace fan belt, Check tension)
running
Charge level monitor does not go Defective alternator ( Replace)
out even when engine is running Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
Abnormal noise is generated from Defective alternator ( Replace)
alternator
Starting motor does not turn when Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
starting switch is turned to ON Defective starting motor ( Replace)
Insufficient battery charge Charge
Pinion of starting motor keeps Insufficient battery charge Charge
going and out Defective safety relay ( Replace)
Starting motor turns engine Insufficient battery charge Charge
sluggishly Defective starting motor ( Replace)
Starting motor disengages before Defective wiring, defective ring ( Check, repair)
engine starts gear pinion
Insufficient battery charge Charge
Engine pre-heating monitor does Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
not light Defective heater relay ( Replace)
Defective monitor ( Replace)
Oil pressure monitor does not light Defective monitor ( Replace)
up when engine is stopped Defective caution lamp switch ( Replace)
(starting switch at ON position)
Outside of electrical heater is not Defective wiring ( Check, repair)
warm when touched by hand Disconnection in electric heater ( Replace)
Defective operation of heater ( Replace)
Travel alarm does not sound when Defective wiring ( Check for loose connector
travel lever is operated terminals or disconnection, repair)
( Replace)
Defective alarm ( Replace)
Defective travel PPC pressure
sensor
Rear-view monitor does not show Defective wiring ( Check for loose, missing
image connectors or disconnection,
repair)
Defective camera ( Replace)
Defective monitor ( Replace)
Starting motor turns but engine Defective engine controller power ( Replace)
does not start supply circuit
Defective relay ( Replace)
Defective connector at engine end ( Check for loose, missing
connectors or disconnection,
repair)
3 - 207
.
Chassis

Speed of travel, swing, boom, arm, Lack of hydraulic oil Add oil to specified level, see
bucket is slow CHECK BEFORE STARTING
Pump generates abnormal noise Clogged element in hydraulic Clean, see EVERY 2000
(sucking in air) tank strainer, lack of oil HOURS SERVICE
Excessive rise in hydraulic oil Loose fan belt ( Check fan belt tension, replace)
temperature Dirty oil cooler Clean, see EVERY 500 HOURS
SERVICE
Lack of hydraulic oil Add oil to specified level, see
CHECK BEFORE STARTING
Track comes off Track too loose Adjust track tension, see WHEN
Abnormal wear of sprocket REQUIRED
Boom rises slowly, does not rise Lack of hydraulic oil Add oil to specified level,
Does not swing Swing lock switch still applied Turn swing lock switch OFF
3 - 208
.
Engine

Engine oil pressure monitor lights Oil level low in oil pan (sucking Add oil to specified level, see
up air in) CHECK BEFORE STARTING
Clogging oil filter cartridge Replace cartridge, see EVERY
500 HOURS SERVICR
Defective tightening of oil pipe, ( Check, repair)
pipe joint, oil leakage from
damaged point
Defective engine oil pressure ( Replace sensor)
sensor
Defective monitor ( Replace monitor)
Steam spurts out from top of Check, add coolant, repair, see
Coolant level low, leakage of water
radiator (pressure valve) CHECK BEFORE STARTING
Loose fan belt
Adjust fan belt tension, see
EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE
Dirt scale accumulated in cooling
Change coolant, flush inside of
system
cooling system, see WHEN
REQUIRED
Clogging radiator fins or damages
Clean or repair, see EVERY
fins
500 HOURS SERVICE
Defective thermostat
Engine water temperature gauge ( Replace thermostat)
Loose radiator filler cap (high
indicator is in red range Tightening cap or replace
altitude operations)
packing
Defective monitor
( Replace monitor)
Engine dose not start when Lack of fuel Add fuel, see CHECK BEFORE
starting motor is turned STARTING
Air in fuel system Repair place where air in
sucked in, see EVERY 500
HOURS SERVICE
Defective fuel injection pump or ( Replace pump or nozzle)
defective nozzle
Starting motor cranks engine See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
sluggishly
Pre-heating monitor dose not light See ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
up
Defective compression
( Defective valve clearance) ( Adjust valve clearance)
Exhaust gas is white or blue Too mach oil in oil pan Add oil to specified level, see
Improper fuel Change to specified fuel
Exhaust gas sometimes becomes Clogging air cleaner element Clean or replace, see WHEN
black REQUIRED
Defective nozzle ( Replace nozzle)
Defective compression ( See "Defective compression")
Defective turbocharger ( Clean or replace turbocharger)
Combustion noise occasionally Defective nozzle ( Replace nozzle)
make breathing sound
3 - 209
.

Abnormal noise generated Low grade fuel being used Change to specified fuel
(combustion or mechanical) Overheating See "Engine water temperature
gauge indicator is in red range"
above
Damage inside muffler ( Replace muffler)
Excessive valve clearance ( Adjust valve clearance)
Engine stops while in work Clogged prefilter, main filter Replace filter cartridge
Defective engine and fuel line ( Check, repair)
3 - 210
.
Electronic Control System

When the user code is shown on the display portion of the machine
monitor, take the respective measures shown in the self-diagnosis
chart below.
Machine Monitoring System
Monitor
Failure mode Action
display
When emergency pump drive switch is at the up
E02 Pump control system error (emergency) position, normal operations become possible,
but have inspection carried out immediately. (*1)
E03 Swing brake system error Have inspection carried out immediately.
Engine controller power source error
E10 Engine controller drive system circuit Have inspection carried out immediately.
error (engine stopped)
Engine controller system error Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection
E11
Output reduced to protect engine carried out immediately.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection
E14 Abnormality in throttle system
carried out immediately.
If a display of "CA2249" or "CA559" appears in the user
code screen and yet the machine has not run out of fuel,
replace both fuel main filter element and fuel prefilter
element immediately. (*2)
If the display of "CA2249" or "CA559" still does not
Engine sensor (coolant temperature, disappear after the replacement, ask your Komatsu
E15 fuel pressure, oil pressure) system distributor for an inspection immediately, even though
error normal operation of the machine is still possible.
On the other hand, if any other code than "CA2249" and

"CA559" appears in the user code screen, again ask your
Komatsu distributor for an inspection immediately, even
though normal operation of the machine is still possible.
Operate machine to a safe posture and have inspection
E0E Network error
carried out immediately.
(*1): For details of handling the emergency pump drive switch, see "Emergency Pump Drive Switch (PAGE 3-73)".
(*2): For the replacement of the fuel main filter element, see "REPLACE FUEL MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE (PAGE
4-72)" and for the replacement of the fuel prefilter element, see "REPLACE FUEL PREFILTER CARTRIDGE
(PAGE 4-61)" respectively.
3 - 211
.
Point of Contact to Telephone when Error Occurs

If an error screen is displayed on the monitor, the telephone
number for the point of contact is displayed at the bottom of the
error screen.
REMARK
If no point of contact telephone number has been registered, no
telephone number is displayed.
It is necessary to register the telephone number, Ask your
Komatsu distributor to perform the registration.
3 - 212
.
4-1
.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Do not perform any inspection and maintenance operation that is not found in this manual.
Service Meter Reading

Check the service meter reading every day to see if the time has come for any necessary maintenance to be
performed.
Komatsu Genuine Replacement Parts

Use Komatsu genuine parts specified in the Parts Book as replacement parts.
Komatsu Genuine Lubricants

For lubrication of the machine, use the Komatsu genuine lubricants. Moreover use oil of the specified viscosity
according to the ambient temperature.
Windshield Washer Fluid

Use automobile window washer fluid, and be careful not to let any dirt get into it.
Fresh and Clean Lubricants

Use clean oil and grease. Also, keep the containers of the oil and grease clean. Keep foreign materials away from
oil and grease.
Check Drained Oil and Used Filter

After oil is changed or filters are replaced, check the old oil and filters for metal particles and foreign materials. If large
quantity of metal particles or foreign materials are found, always report to the person in charge, and perform suitable
action.
Fuel Strainer
Do not remove the strainer from the filler port when adding fuel.
Welding Instructions
Cut off power. Wait for approximately 1 minute after turning off the engine starting switch key, and then disconnect
the negative (-) terminal of the battery.
Do not apply more than 200 V continuously.
Connect grounding cable within 1 m (3 ft 3 in) of the area to be welded. If grounding cable is connected near
instruments, connectors, etc., the instruments may malfunction.
If a seal or bearing happens to come between the part being welded and grounding point, change the grounding
point to avoid such parts.
Do not use the area around the work equipment pins or the hydraulic cylinders as the grounding point.
Do not Drop Things Inside Machine

When opening inspection windows or the oil filler port of the tank to perform inspection, be careful not to drop nuts,
bolts, or tools inside the machine.
If such things are dropped inside the machine, it may cause damage and/or malfunction of the machine, and will
lead to failure. If you drop anything inside the machine, always remove it immediately.
Do not put unnecessary things in your pockets. Carry only things which are necessary for inspection.
4-2
.
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Dusty Jobsite
When working at dusty worksites, do as follows:
Inspect the dust indicator frequently to see if the air cleaner is dirty or clogged.
Clean the radiator core frequently to avoid clogging.
Clean and replace the fuel filter frequently.
Clean electrical components, especially the starting motor and alternator, to avoid accumulation of dust.
When checking and replacing the oil or filters, move the machine to a place where there is no dust and take care
to prevent dust from entering the system.
Avoid Mixing Lubricants

If a different brand or grade of oil has to be added, drain the old oil and replace all the oil with the new brand or grade
of oil. Never mix different brand or grade of oil.
Locking the Inspection Covers

Lock inspection cover securely into position with the lock bar. If inspection or maintenance is performed with
inspection cover not locked in position, there is a danger that it may be suddenly blow shut by the wind and cause
injury to the worker.
Hydraulic System - Air Bleeding

When hydraulic equipment has been repaired or replaced, or the hydraulic piping has been removed and installed
again, the air must be bled from the circuit. For details, see "BLEEDING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (PAGE
4-48)".
Hydraulic Hose Installation

When removing parts at locations where there are O-rings or gasket seals, clean the mounting surface, and
replace with new parts.
When doing this, be careful not to forget to assemble the O-rings and gaskets.
When installing the hoses, do not twist them or bend them sharply. If they are installed so, their service life will
be shortened extremely and they may be damaged.
Checks After Inspection and Maintenance Works

If you forget to perform the checks after inspection and maintenance, unexpected problems may occur, and this may
lead to serious injury or death. Always observe the following:
Checks after operation (with engine stopped)
Have any inspection and maintenance points been forgotten?
Have all inspection and maintenance items been performed correctly?
Have any tools or parts been dropped inside the machine? It is particularly dangerous if parts are dropped
inside the machine and get caught in the lever linkage mechanism.
Are there any leakage of coolant or oil? Have all nuts and bolts been tightened?
Checks when operating engine
For details of the checks when operating the engine, see "TWO WORKERS FOR MAINTENANCE WHEN
ENGINE IS RUNNING (PAGE 2-39)" and pay careful attention to safety.
Are the inspection and maintenance items working properly?
Is there any leakage of fuel or oil when the engine speed is raised?
4-3
.
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS WHEN YOU CLEAN WORK EQUIPMENT CONTROL LEVER

If oil or detergent gets onto the resin parts which are used at the knob of work equipment control lever of hydraulic
excavator, they will become hard in a short time. Because of the hardening, you cannot push the switch at the top
of the lever such as horn switch. Be careful not to let oil get onto the work equipment control lever.
If dirt gets onto the work equipment control lever, clean it with a dry cloth or a cloth wet with water or warm water.
Do not use a detergent because oil or detergent can cause deterioration.
4-4
.
MAINTENANCE OUTLINE OF SERVICE
OUTLINE OF SERVICE
Always use Komatsu genuine parts for replacement parts, grease or oil.
When changing the oil or adding oil, do not mix different types of oil. When changing the type of oil, drain all the
old oil and fill completely with the new oil. Always replace the filter at the same time. (There is no problem if the
small amount of oil remaining in the piping mixes with the new oil.)
Unless otherwise specified, when the machine is shipped from the factory, it is filled with the oil and coolant listed
in the table below.
Item Type
Engine oil pan Engine oil EO15W40DH (Komatsu genuine parts)
Damper case
Swing machinery case Powertrain oil TO30 (Komatsu genuine parts)
Final drive case
Hydraulic oil system Powertrain oil TO10 (Komatsu genuine parts)
Radiator SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC) (Komatsu genuine parts) (density: 30% or above)
HANDLING OIL, FUEL, COOLANT, AND PERFORMING OIL CLINIC
OIL
Oil is used in the engine and hydraulic equipment under extremely severe conditions (high temperature, high
pressure), and deteriorates with use.
Always use oil that matches the grade and maximum and minimum ambient temperatures recommended in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Even if the oil is not dirty, always change the oil at the specified interval.
Oil corresponds to blood in the human body, always be careful when handling it to prevent any impurities (water,
metal particles, dirt, etc.) from getting in.
The majority of problems with the machine are caused by the entry of such impurities.
Take particular care not to let any impurities get in when storing or adding oil.
Never mix oils of different grades or brands.
Always add the specified capacity of oil.
Having too much oil or too little oil are both causes of problems.
If the oil in the work equipment is not clear, there is probably water or air getting into the circuit. In such cases,
When changing the oil, always replace the related filters at the same time.
We recommend you have an analysis made of the oil periodically to check the condition of the machine. For
those who wish to use this service, consult your Komatsu distributor.
When using commercially available oil, it may be necessary to reduce the oil change interval.
We recommend that you use the Komatsu oil clinic to perform a detailed checks of the characteristics of the oil.
4-5
.
OUTLINE OF SERVICE MAINTENANCE
FUEL
To prevent the moisture in the air from condensing and forming water inside the fuel tank, always fill the fuel tank
after completing the day's work.
The fuel pump is a precision instrument, and if fuel containing water or dirt is used, it cannot work properly.
Be extremely careful not to let impurities get in when storing or adding fuel.
Always use the fuel specified for the temperature in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
If the fuel is used at temperatures lower than the specified temperature (particularly at temperatures below -15
°C (5°F), the fuel will solidify.
If the fuel is used at temperatures higher than the specified temperature, the viscosity will drop, and this may
result in problems such as a drop in output.
Before starting the engine, or when 10 minutes have passed after adding fuel, drain the sediment and water from
the fuel tank.
If the engine runs out of fuel, or if the filters have been replaced, it is necessary to bleed the air from the circuit.
If there is any foreign material in the fuel tank, wash the tank and fuel system.
NOTICE
Always use diesel oil for the fuel.
To ensure good fuel consumption characteristics and exhaust gas characteristics, the engine mounted on this machine uses an
electronically controlled high-pressure fuel injection device. This device requires high precision parts and lubrication, so if low
viscosity fuel with low lubricating ability is used, the durability may drop markedly.
4-6
.
BIO-FUEL
The biofuel is a fuel that is formed in a transesterification reaction of vegetable oil, animal fat, and edible oil.
The ASTM D975 diesel fuel can contain 5 % or less of biofuel.
Use the biofuel conforming to ASTM D7467 if its mixing ratio is between 6% to 20%.
The EN590 diesel fuel can contain 7 % or less of biofuel.
When you use 100% biofuel for mixing, it needs to conform to ASTM D6751 or EN14214.
In the United States, purchase the biofuel from the dealer certified by BQ-9000.
In the EU, purchase the biofuel from the member companies of European Biodiesel Board (EBB).
In other countries or regions, purchase the biofuel from the dealer that guarantees the same quality as BQ-9000 or
EBB.
NOTICE
When you use biofuel other than the preceding diesel fuel and its mixing ratio is up to 20 %, obey the precautions that follow.
It is necessary to consult with the local regulatory authorities of engine exhaust gas regulation whether the biofuel can be used
or not.
The fuel can possibly leak because of the deterioration of rubber material of the fuel hose.
Replace it with the fuel hose applicable for biofuel. Consult your Komatsu distributor for replacement of the fuel hose.
Biofuel cannot be stored for a long time because it is easy to deteriorate and change in quality.
Use the fuel in the storage tank or the fuel tank of the machine within 6 months.
If the deteriorated and altered biofuel is used, it can cause bad effects on the engine parts.
When you store the machine which uses the diesel fuel mixed with the biofuel for more than 3 months, do the procedure that
follows.
o Replace it with pure diesel fuel or the new diesel fuel mixed with the biofuel at the lowest possible mixing ratio.
o After you change the fuel, run the engine for a minimum of 30 minutes before you store the machine.
Because the biofuel dissolves the materials stuck to the fuel tank and fuel line, the fuel filter can be clogged with them.
When you change the diesel fuel to the biofuel, replace the fuel main filter cartridge and fuel prefilter cartridge with new ones.
When you replace the fuel main filter cartridge and fuel prefilter cartridge, make the replacement interval half the normal time
until the second replacement after you change the diesel fuel to the biofuel.
Because the biofuel absorbs moisture easily, it can possibly cause a growth of microorganism.
When the microorganism grows in the biofuel, it can cause corrosion of the fuel system and the clogging of the fuel filter.
Drain the water from the fuel tank before you start the operation.
When you complete the operation, fill the fuel tank to reduce the air layer.
If the biofuel is used in the conditions of the specific operation, the fuel can possibly get mixed into the engine oil.
The fuel level in the engine oil must not exceed 5 %. Deteriorated engine oil can cause adverse effects on the engine parts such
as a reduction of lubricating function. It is recommended to take a sample of the oil on a periodic basis.
The characteristics of the biofuel change when outside air temperature is low. The fuel filter can be clogged and the fuel inside
the fuel tank can be solidified. Store the biofuel in the warm building or in the storage tank.
The energy density of the biofuel becomes lower by 7 to 10% with that of the diesel fuel. Fuel consumption and
output can possibly be lowered when the mixing ratio is high.
Fuel hose quality can change as time passes due to the influence of material of bio when using BDF that mixing ratio
is over 20 % and they are likely to wear out or deteriorate.
Strongly recommend to replace Fuel hose every 2 years or every 4000 hours, whichever comes sooner.
4-7
.
PARAFFIN-BASED FUEL
The paraffin-based fuel is generated by natural gas, coal, vegetable oil, and animal and plant fat, and its main
constituent is paraffin.
The paraffin-based fuel has almost the same characteristics as the diesel fuel.
Vegetable oil and fat-derived fuel are called renewable diesel (RD) and hydrogenated vegetable oil (HVO).
The fuel synthesized from natural gas is called gas-to-liquid (GTL).
NOTICE
Use the paraffin-based fuel which agrees with EN15940:2016 and ASTM D975.
As long as the fuel agrees with EN15940:2016 and ASTM D975, its mixing ratio can be up to 100 %.
The energy density of the paraffin-based fuel becomes lower up to 10% with that of the diesel fuel. Thus, fuel
consumption and output can possibly be lowered.
COOLANT AND WATER FOR DILUTION

Komatsu genuine SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC) has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as
preventing freezing.
Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of antifreeze coolant is essential.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC). SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC) has
excellent anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for 2 years or 4000 hours.
As a basic rule, we do not recommend the use of any coolant other than SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC). If you use
another coolant, it may cause serious problems, such as corrosion of the engine and aluminum parts of the
cooling system.
When using antifreeze, always observe the precautions given in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Coolant is already diluted with distilled water, so it is not flammable.
The density used for the coolant differs according to the ambient temperature.
For details of the density of the coolant, see "CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM (PAGE 4-29)".
Even in the areas where it is not considered necessary to prevent freezing, always use coolant with a density of
over 30% in order to prevent corrosion of the cooling system.
Coolant is diluted with distilled water that does not contain any ions or water-hardening substances. Never dilute
the coolant with ordinary water.
If the engine overheats, wait for the engine to cool before adding coolant.
If the coolant level is low, it will cause overheating, and will also cause problems with corrosion due to air entering
the coolant.
4-8
.
GREASE
Grease is used to prevent seizure and noises at the joints.
This construction equipment is used under heavy-duty conditions. Always use the recommended grease and
follow the change intervals and recommended ambient temperatures given in this Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
Grease fittings not included in the maintenance section are grease fittings for overhaul, so they do not need
grease.
If any part becomes stiff after being used for long time, add grease.
Always wipe off all of the old grease that is pushed out when greasing.
Be particularly careful to wipe off the old grease in places where sand or dirt sticking in the grease would cause
wear of the rotating parts.
PERFORMING KOWA (Komatsu Oil Wear Analysis)

KOWA is a maintenance service that makes it possible to prevent machine failures and downtime. With KOWA, the
oil is periodically sampled and analyzed. This enables early detection of wear of the machine drive parts and other
problems.
We strongly recommend you to use this service. The oil analysis is performed at actual cost, so the cost is low, and
the results of the analysis are reported together with recommendations which will reduce repair costs and machine
downtime.
KOWA ANALYSIS ITEMS

Measurement of density of metal wear particles
This uses an ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) analyzer to
measure the density of iron, copper, and other metal wear
particles in the oil.
Measurement of quantity of particles

This uses a PQI (Particle Quantifier Index) measurer to
measure the quantity of iron particles of 5 μm or more, enabling
early detection of failures.
Others
Measurements are made of items such as the ratio of water, coolant, and fuel in the oil, and dynamic viscosity,
if necessary, to enable a highly precise diagnosis of the machine and the components' condition.
4-9
.
OIL SAMPLING
Sampling interval
500 hours
Precautions when sampling

Make sure that the oil is well mixed before sampling.
Perform sampling at regular fixed intervals.
Do not perform sampling on rainy or windy days when water or dust can get into the oil.
For further details of KOWA, contact your Komatsu distributor.
STORING OIL AND FUEL

Keep indoors to prevent any water, dirt, or other impurities from getting in.
When keeping drum cans for a long period, put the drum on its side so that the filler port of the drums is at the side
to prevent moisture from being sucked in.
If drums have to be stored outside, cover them with a waterproof sheet or take other measures to protect them.
To prevent any change in quality during long-term storage, be sure to use in the order of first in - first out (use the
oldest oil or fuel first).
FILTERS
Filters are extremely important safety parts. They prevent impurities in the fuel and air circuits from entering
important equipment and causing problems.
Replace all filters periodically. For details, see the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
However, when working in severe conditions, replace the filters at shorter intervals according to the oil and fuel
(sulfur content) being used.
Never try to clean the filters (cartridge type) and use them again. Always replace with new filters.
When replacing oil filters, check if any metal particles are attached to the old filter. If any metal particles are found,
Do not open packs of spare filters until just before they are to be used.
Use of Komatsu genuine filter elements is strongly recommended.
BATTERY TERMINAL
Make sure that the battery terminals have no looseness or corrosion.
If there is looseness, make sure that there is no damage or corrosion, and retighten it.
For the procedure to retighten and the torques, etc., see "Battery Removal and Installation (PAGE 3-203)".
If there is corrosion, fully clean the rust on the battery and battery cable, and replace the battery terminals.
When you replace the battery terminals, obey the instructions given in "PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE
(PAGE 2-37)".
4 - 10
.
ELECTRIC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

It is extremely dangerous if the electrical equipment becomes wet or the covering of the wiring is damaged. This
will cause an electrical short circuit and may lead to malfunction of the machine. Do not wash the inside of the
operator's cab with water. When washing the machine, be careful not to let water get into the electrical
components.
Service relating to the electric system is checking fan belt tension, checking damage or wear to the fan belt and
checking battery fluid level.
Never install any electric components other than those specified by Komatsu.
External electro-magnetic interference may cause malfunction of the control system controller, before installing
a radio receiver or other wireless equipment, consult your Komatsu distributor.
When working at the seashore, carefully clean the electric system to prevent corrosion.
When installing electrical equipment, connect it to the special power source connector.
Do not connect the optional power source to the fuse, starting switch, or battery relay.
4 - 11
.
WEAR PARTS MAINTENANCE
WEAR PARTS
Replace wear parts such as the filter element or air cleaner element at the time of periodic maintenance or before
they reach the wear limit. The wear parts should be replaced correctly in order to ensure more economic use of the
machine. When replacing parts, always use Komatsu genuine parts.
As a result of our continuous efforts to improve product quality, the part number may change, so inform your
Komatsu distributor of the machine serial number and check for the latest part number when ordering parts.
WEAR PARTS LIST

The parts in parentheses are to be replaced at the same time.
Item Part No. Part Name Q'ty Replacement frequency

Engine oil filter 600-211-2110 Cartridge 1
Cartridge EVERY 500
Fuel prefilter 600-319-4110 1
(with Seal) HOURS SERVICE
Hydraulic tank breather 20Y-60-21470 Element 1
14X-60-31150 Element 1
Hydraulic oil filter EVERY 1000
(07000-15155) (O-ring) (1)
HOURS SERVICE
Fuel main filter 600-319-3870 Cartridge 1
Air cleaner 600-185-2100 Element assembly 1 -
Electric heater 6204-11-4850 Gasket 2 -
205-70-74272 Vertical pin type 4
(205-70-74282) (Pin) (4)
(205-70-74291) (Lock) (4)
205-70-19570 Horizontal pin type 4
Bucket (09244-02496) (Pin) (4) -
202-70-63161 Side cutter (Left) 1
202-70-63171 Side cutter (Right) 1
(208-32-11231) (Bolt) (8)
(01803-02228) (Nut) (8)
12F-70-31281 Edge (center portion) 1
21Y-71-11221 Edge (left, right) 2
Reinforced blade (if equipped) -
(02090-11055) (Bolt) (24)
(02290-11016) (Nut) (24)
Air conditioner RECIRC filter 208-979-7620 Filter 1 EVERY ONE YEAR
Air conditioner FRESH filter 17M-911-3530 Element 1 EVERY ONE YEAR
4 - 12
.
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT

Komatsu genuine oils are adjusted to maintain the reliability and durability of Komatsu construction equipment
and components.
In order to keep your machine in the best conditioner for long periods of time, it is essential to follow the
instructions in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Failure to follow the Operation and Maintenance Manual may result in shortened life or excess wear of the engine,
power train, cooling system, and/or other components.
Commercially available lubricant additives may be good for the machine, but they may also cause harm.
Komatsu does not recommend any commercially available lubricant additive.
Use the oil recommended according to the ambient temperature in the chart below.
Specified capacity means the total amount of oil including the oil in the tank and the piping. Refill amount of oil
means the amount of oil needed to refill the system during inspection and maintenance.
When starting the engine in temperatures below 0°C (32°F), be sure to use the recommended multi-grade oil,
even if the ambient temperature may become higher during the course of the day.
If the machine is operated at a temperature below -20°C (-4°F), a separate device is needed, so consult your
Komatsu distributor.
When the fuel sulfur content is less than 0.5%, change the engine oil according to the period inspection table
given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
If the fuel sulfur content is 0.5% or more, change the oil and oil filter according to the following table.
Sulfur content (%) Oil change interval Oil filter change interval
Less than 0.5 500 hours 500 hours

0.5 to 1.0 250 hours 250 hours
1.0 and up (*) (*)
* If these fuels are used, there is danger that serious trouble may occur because of early deterioration of the engine
oil or early wear of the internal parts of the engine. If the local situation makes it necessary to use these fuels,
always remember the following.
1) Be sure to check Total Basic Number (TBN) of oil frequently by TBN handy checker etc., and change oil
based on the result.
2) Always be aware that oil change interval is extremely shorter than standard.
3) Be sure to perform periodic engine inspection by distributor's expert since change interval of periodic
replacement parts and overhaul interval are also shorter.
4 - 13
.
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT MAINTENANCE
USE OF FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
ASTM: American Society of Testing and Material
Swing
Engine Final drive case PTO Hydraulic Fuel Cooling
machinery
oil pan (each of right and left) gear case system tank system
case
Specified Liters 11.5 2.5 2.1 0.75 145 247 13.9
capacity US gal 3.04 0.66 0.55 0.20 38.31 65.26 3.67
Refill Liters 11 2.5 2.1 - 90 - -
capacity US gal 2.91 0.66 0.55 - 23.78 - -
NOTICE
Always use diesel oil for the fuel.
To ensure good fuel consumption characteristics and exhaust gas characteristics, the engine mounted on this machine uses an
electronically controlled high-pressure fuel injection device. This device requires high precision parts and lubrication, so if low
viscosity fuel with low lubricating ability is used, the durability may drop markedly.
4 - 14
.
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT
The ASTM D975 diesel fuel can contain 5 % or less of biofuel.

The EN590 diesel fuel can contain 7 % or less of biofuel.
NOTICE
When you use biofuel other than the preceding diesel fuel and its mixing ratio is up to 20 %, obey the precautions that follow.
It is necessary to consult with the local regulatory authorities of engine exhaust gas regulation whether the biofuel can be used
or not.
The fuel can possibly leak because of the deterioration of rubber material of the fuel hose.
Replace it with the fuel hose applicable for biofuel. Consult your Komatsu distributor for replacement of the fuel hose.
Biofuel cannot be stored for a long time because it is easy to deteriorate and change in quality.
Use the fuel in the storage tank or the fuel tank of the machine within 6 months.
If the deteriorated and altered biofuel is used, it can cause bad effects on the engine parts.
When you store the machine which uses the diesel fuel mixed with the biofuel for more than 3 months, do the procedure that
follows.
o Replace it with pure diesel fuel or the new diesel fuel mixed with the biofuel at the lowest possible mixing ratio.
o After you change the fuel, run the engine for a minimum of 30 minutes before you store the machine.
Because the biofuel dissolves the materials stuck to the fuel tank and fuel line, the fuel filter can be clogged with them.
When you change the diesel fuel to the biofuel, replace the fuel main filter cartridge and fuel prefilter cartridge with new ones.
When you replace the fuel main filter cartridge and fuel prefilter cartridge, make the replacement interval half the normal time
until the second replacement after you change the diesel fuel to the biofuel.
Because the biofuel absorbs moisture easily, it can possibly cause a growth of microorganism.
When the microorganism grows in the biofuel, it can cause corrosion of the fuel system and the clogging of the fuel filter.
Drain the water from the fuel tank before you start the operation.
When you complete the operation, fill the fuel tank to reduce the air layer.
If the biofuel is used in the conditions of the specific operation, the fuel can possibly get mixed into the engine oil.
The fuel level in the engine oil must not exceed 5 %. Deteriorated engine oil can cause adverse effects on the engine parts such
as a reduction of lubricating function. It is recommended to take a sample of the oil on a periodic basis.
The characteristics of the biofuel change when outside air temperature is low. The fuel filter can be clogged and the fuel inside
the fuel tank can be solidified. Store the biofuel in the warm building or in the storage tank.
NOTICE
Use the paraffin-based fuel which agrees with EN15940:2016 and ASTM D975.
As long as the fuel agrees with EN15940:2016 and ASTM D975, its mixing ratio can be up to 100 %.
Note 1: HTHS ( High-Temperature High-Shear Viscosity 150°C (302°F)), specified by ASTM D4741 must be equal
to or higher than 3.5 mPa-S. Komatsu EOS0W30 and EOS5W40 are the most suitable oils.
Note 2: Powertrain oil has different properties from engine oil. Be sure to use the recommended oils.
Note 3: Hyper grease (G2-T, G2-TE) has a high performance.

When it is necessary to improve the lubricating ability of the grease in order to prevent squeaking of pins and
bushings, the use of G2-T or G2-TE is recommended.
4 - 15
.
RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT, AND LUBRICANT MAINTENANCE
Note 4: Supercoolant (AF-NAC)

1) Coolant has the important function of anticorrosion as well as antifreeze.
Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of antifreeze coolant is essential.
Komatsu machines are supplied with Komatsu Supercoolant AF-NAC. Komatsu Supercoolant AF-NAC has
excellent anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for 2 years or 4000 hours.
Komatsu Supercoolant AF-NAC is strongly recommended wherever available.
2) For details of the Supercoolant AF-NAC density, see "CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM (PAGE 4-29)".
Supercoolant AF-NAC is supplied already diluted. In this case, add the pre-diluted fluid to keep the tank full.
(Never dilute the Supercoolant with ordinary water.)
3) To maintain the anticorrosion properties of Supercoolant AF-NAC, always keep the density of Supercoolant
between 30% and 64%.
RECOMMENDED BRANDS, RECOMMENDED QUALITY FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN

KOMATSU GENUINE OIL
When using commercially available oils other than Komatsu genuine oil, consult your Komatsu distributor.
4 - 16
.
MAINTENANCE TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

TIGHTENING TORQUE LIST
CAUTION
If nuts, bolts, or other parts are not tightened to the specified torque, it will cause looseness or damage to the tightened parts, and
this will cause failure of the machine or problems with operation.
Always pay careful attention when tightening parts.
Unless otherwise specified, tighten the metric nuts and bolts to the torque shown in the table below.
If it is necessary to replace any nut or bolt, always use a Komatsu genuine part of the same size as the part that was
replaced.
Thread Width Tightening torque

diameter across
Target value Service limit
of bolt flats
(a)(mm) (b)(mm) Nm kgfm lbft Nm kgfm lbft
6 10 13.2 1.35 9.8 11.8 to 14.7 1.2 to 1.5 8.7 to 10.8
8 13 31 3.2 23.1 27 to 34 2.8 to 3.5 20.3 to 25.3
10 17 66 6.7 48.5 59 to 74 6.0 to 7.5 43.4 to 54.2
12 19 113 11.5 83.2 98 to 123 10.0 to 12.5 72.3 to 90.4
14 22 172 17.5 126.6 153 to 190 15.5 to 19.5 112.1 to 141.0
16 24 260 26.5 191.7 235 to 285 23.5 to 29.5 170.0 to 213.4

18 27 360 37.0 267.6 320 to 400 33.0 to 41.0 238.7 to 296.6
20 30 510 52.3 378.3 455 to 565 46.5 to 58.0 336.3 to 419.5
22 32 688 70.3 508.5 610 to 765 62.5 to 78.0 452.1 to 564.2
24 36 883 90.0 651.0 785 to 980 80.0 to 100.0 578.6 to 723.3
27 41 1295 132.5 958.4 1150 to 1440 118.0 to 147.0 853.5 to 1063.3

30 46 1720 175.0 1265.8 1520 to 1910 155.0 to 195.0 1121.1 to 1410.4
33 50 2210 225.0 1627.4 1960 to 2450 200.0 to 250.0 1446.6 to 1808.3
36 55 2750 280.0 2025.2 2450 to 3040 250.0 to 310.0 1808.3 to 2242.2
39 60 3280 335.0 2423.1 2890 to 3630 295.0 to 370.0 2133.7 to 2676.2
Apply the following table for Hydraulic Hose.
Hose Width
Tightening torque
nomi across
nal flat
Target valve Service limit
num a
ber (mm) Nm kgfm lbft Nm kgfm lbft
02 19 44 4.5 32.5 35 to 54 3.5 to 5.5 25.3 to 39.8
22 74 7.5 54.2 54 to 93 5.5 to 9.5 39.8 to 68.7
03
24 78 8.0 57.9 59 to 98 6.0 to 10.0 43.4 to 72.3
04 27 103 10.5 75.9 84 to 132 8.5 to 13.5 61.5 to 97.6
05 32 157 16.0 115.7 128 to 186 13.0 to 19.0 94.0 to 137.4
06 36 216 22.0 159.1 177 to 245 18.0 to 25.0 130.2 to 180.8
4 - 17
.
DEFINED LIFE PARTS MAINTENANCE
DEFINED LIFE PARTS

For using the machine safely for a long period, always perform periodic inspection of the defined life parts that
have a particularly close relation to safety, such as hoses and the seat belt.
The material of these components naturally changes over time, and repeated use causes deterioration, wear,
and fatigue. As a result, there is a hazard that these components may fail and cause serious personal injury or
death. Check if there is any abnormality in wear or deterioration on them before work and at the regular
maintenance.
Replace immediately the hose if any defect is found by checking. If any of the hose clamps show deterioration
like deformation or cracking, replace the clamps at the same time as the hoses.
Tighten all loose hoses and replace defective hoses, as required. When replacing hoses, always replace O-rings,
gaskets, and other such parts at the same time.
DEFINED LIFE PARTS LIST

Inspection
No. Target Parts Q'ty
/Replacement interval
1 Fuel hose (fuel tank - injection pump) 3 Every 2 years or every
2 Fuel return hose (return - fuel cooler inlet port) 1 4000 hours, whichever
3 Fuel cooler return hose (fuel cooler outlet port - fuel tank) 1 comes sooner.
4 Turbocharger lubricating hose 1

5 Engine oil filter hose (engine - oil filter) 2
6 Pump outlet hose (pump - control valve delivery hose) 1
7 Pump outlet hose (pump - control valve PP hose) 1
8 Pump outlet hose (pump - control valve LS hose) 1
9 Work equipment hose (boom cylinder inlet port) 4
10 Work equipment hose (bucket cylinder line - boom foot) 2
11 Work equipment hose (bucket cylinder inlet port) 2
Replace if any of the
12 Work equipment hose (arm cylinder line - boom foot) 2 damages were found
13 Work equipment hose (arm cylinder inlet port) 2 when the daily check or
periodical maintenance.
14 Attachment additional line hose (boom foot) 2
15 Attachment additional line hose (boom top) 2
16 Swing line hose (swing motor inlet port) 2
17 Main suction hose 1
18 Air conditioner heater hose 2
19 Accumulator (for control circuit) 1
20 Accumulator (for additional attachment low pressure) 1
21 Accumulator (for additional attachment high pressure) 1
22 Engine high-pressure piping clamps 1set
Every 8000 hours
23 Fuel spray prevention cap 1set
Every 3 years from start

of usage or 5 years after
24 Seat belt 1 manufacturing of seat
belt, whichever comes
sooner.
4 - 18
.
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the maintenance schedule for some parts will be different.
For details, see "MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR HYDRAULIC BREAKER (PAGE 4-21)" to confirm the correct
maintenance schedule when carrying out maintenance.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART
WHEN REQUIRED
CHECK, CLEAN AND REPLACE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT 4- 22
CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM 4- 29
CHECK AND TIGHTEN TRACK SHOE BOLTS 4- 32
CHECK AND ADJUST TRACK TENSION 4- 33
CHECK ROAD LINERS 4- 35
REPLACE ROAD LINERS 4- 35
REPLACE BUCKET TEETH (VERTICAL PIN TYPE) 4- 36
REPLACE BUCKET TEETH (HORIZONTAL PIN TYPE) 4- 39
ADJUST BUCKET CREARANCE 4- 41
CHECK WINDOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL, ADD FLUID 4- 42
CHECK AND MAINTENANCE AIR CONDITIONER 4- 43
WASH WASHABLE FLOOR 4- 44
CHECK GAS SPRING 4- 47
BLEEDING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 4- 48
CHECKS BEFORE STARTING
EVERY 100 HOURS MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATING 4- 51
CHECK SWING MACHINERY CASE OIL, ADD OIL 4- 52

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE, ADD OIL 4- 53
CHECK LEVEL OF BATTERY ELECTROLYTE 4- 54
CHECK AND ADJUST COOLING FAN BELT TENSION 4- 56
CHECK AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION, ADJUST 4- 57

LUBRICATION 4- 58
CHANGE OIL IN ENGINE OIL PAN, REPLACE ENGINE OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE 4- 60
REPLACE FUEL PREFILTER CARTRIDGE 4- 61
CHECK SWING PINION GREASE LEVEL, ADD GREASE 4- 63
LUBRICATE SWING CIRCLE 4- 63
CLEAN AND INSPECT RADIATOR FINS, OIL COOLER FINS, AFTERCOOLER FINS, FUEL
COOLER FINS, AND AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER FINS 4- 64
CLEAN AIR CONDITIONER FRESH/RECIRC FILTERS 4- 66
REPLACE BREATHER ELEMENT IN HYDRAULIC TANK 4- 68
4 - 19
.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE

CHANGE OIL IN SWING MACHINERY CASE 4- 69
CHANGE OIL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE 4- 70
REPLACE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER ELEMENT 4- 71
REPLACE FUEL MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE 4- 72
CHECK ALL TIGHTENING POINTS OF ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE CLAMPS 4- 74
CHECK OIL LEVEL IN PTO GEAR CASE, ADD OIL 4- 74

CLEAN HYDRAULIC TANK STRAINER 4- 76
CHECK ALTERNATOR, STARTING MOTOR 4- 76
CHECK ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE, ADJUST 4- 76
CHECKING CHARGE PRESSURE OF NITROGEN GAS IN ACCUMULATOR (FOR CONTROL
CIRCUIT) 4- 77

CHECK WATER PUMP 4- 80
REPLACE ACCUMULATOR (FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT) 4- 80
CHECK FOR LOOSENESS OF HIGH-PRESSURE PIPING CLAMP, HARDENING OF RUBBER 4- 81
CHECK FOR MISSING FUEL SPRAY PREVENTION CAP, HARDENING OF RUBBER 4- 81

CHANGE OIL IN HYDRAULIC TANK 4- 82

REPLACE HIGH-PRESSURE PIPING CLAMP 4- 84
REPLACE FUEL SPRAY PREVENTION CAP 4- 84
4 - 20
.
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR HYDRAULIC BREAKER

For machine equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the hydraulic oil deteriorates faster than for normal bucket digging
operations, so set the maintenance intervals as follows.
Replace hydraulic filter element

On a new machine, replace the element after the first 100 to 150
hours, then perform further replacement of the element
according to the table on the right.
Change oil in hydraulic tank

Change the oil according to the table on the right.
Replacing additional filter element for breaker (if equipped)

Use a guideline of 250 hours for use of the breaker (operating
ratio for the breaker: 50 % or more), and replace the element
according to the table on the right.
X: Breaker operating ratio (%)

Y: Replacement interval (H)
(A): Hydraulic filter element,Pilot filter element
(B): Hydraulic oil
(C): Additional filter element
REMARK
Breaker operating ratio 100% means that only the breaker is used
Breaker operating ratio 0% means that the breaker is not used
4 - 21
.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
WHEN REQUIRED
CHECK, CLEAN AND REPLACE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

WARNING
When using compressed air, there is danger of dirt flying and causing personal injury.
Always wear protective glasses, dust mask, or other protective equipment.
When removing the outer element from the air cleaner body, it is dangerous to pull it out by force. When working in high places
or where the foothold is poor, be careful not to fall because of the reaction when pulling out the outer element.
NOTICE
Do not clean the air cleaner element until the air cleaner clogging monitor on the machine monitor light up. If the element is
cleaned frequently before the air cleaner clogging monitor light up, the air cleaner will not be able to display its performance
fully, and the cleaning efficiency will also go down.
In addition, during the cleaning operation, more dirt stuck to the element will fall inside the inner element.
If inspection, cleaning, or maintenance is performed with the engine running, dirt will enter the engine and cause damage to
the engine. Always stop the engine before performing these operations.
4 - 22
.
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
Checking
If air cleaner clogging monitor (1) of the machine monitor lights up,
clean the air cleaner element.
Replacing
Replace element, O-ring
If the element has been used for 1 year, or air cleaner clogging
monitor (1) on the machine monitor lights up after the element
has been cleaned, replace outer element (5), inner element (6),
and O-ring (8).
Replacing vacuator valve
Replace vacuator valve (4) if it is damaged or if the rubber is
markedly deformed.
4 - 23
.
Cleaning Outer Element
NOTICE
Before and after cleaning the element, do not leave or keep it in direct sunlight.
1. Open a door located at the rear left side of the machine,

release hooks (2) at 3 locations and then detach cover (3).
NOTICE
Never remove the inner element (6). It will allow dirt to enter and cause
failure of the engine.
Do not use a screwdriver or other tool.
2. Hold the outer element (5), rock it lightly up and down and to
the left and right, and rotate the element to the left and right to
pull it out.
3. When the outer element (5) has been removed, check that the
inner element has not come out of position and is not at an
angle. If is at an angle, insert your hand and push it in straight.
4. After removing the outer element (5), cover the inner element
(6) with a clean cloth or tape to prevent dirt or dust from
entering.
5. Wipe off or brush off the dirt stuck to cover (3) and the inside of
the air cleaner body (7).
6. Remove any dirt or dust that is accumulated to vacuator valve
(4) installed to cover (3).
NOTICE
When cleaning the element, do not hit or beat it against anything.
7. Direct dry compressed air (less than 0.2 MPa {2.1 kgf/cm2,
30.0 PSI}) to the outer element from inside along its pleats,
then direct it from outside along its pleats and again from
inside.
1) Replace the outer element which has been cleaned 6
times repeatedly or used throughout 1 year. Replace the
inner element at the same time.
2) Replace both inner and outer elements when the air cleaner clogging monitor (1) lights up soon after
installing the cleaned outer element even though it has not been cleaned 6 times.
4 - 24
.
3) Remove 1 seal from the element whenever the element

has been cleaned.
8. If small holes or thinner parts are found on the element when

it is checked by shining a light through it after cleaning, replace
the element.
9. Remove the cloth or tape covering inner element (6).
NOTICE
Do not use an element whose pleats or gasket or seal are damaged.
If the element or O-ring are cleaned and used again after they have been used for more than 1 year, it will cause problems. Do
not use them again.
10. Check that there is no dirt or oil stuck to the seal portion of the new element or cleaned element. Wipe off any
dirt or oil.
11. Push the outer element in straight with your hand when installing it to the air cleaner body.
If the outer element is held and rocked lightly up and down and to the left and right while pushing it in, the outer
element can be inserted easily.
NOTICE
Be sure to install the air cleaner element facing in the correct direction.
Install so that the bottom of the air cleaner element cylinder (face where no
hole is drilled) (B), (C) is at cover (3) end. If the direction of installation is
mistaken, there is danger that it will cause breakage of the air cleaner
element or serious damage to the engine.
4 - 25
.
NOTICE
When inserting the element, if the rubber at the tip is swollen or the outer
element is not pushed in straight, and cover (3) is assembled by force to
hook (2), there is danger that the hook and air cleaner body may be
damaged, so be careful when assembling.
12. Install cover (3) as follows.

1) Align cover (3) with the element.
2) Hook the tip of hook (2) to the protruding part of the air
cleaner body and lock it in position.
3) Always install cover (3) so that the vacuator (4) is facing the
ground (A).
4) When cover (3) is installed, check that the clearance
between the air cleaner body and cover (3) is not too large.
If it is too large, install again.
4 - 26
.
Replacing Element
1. Open a door located at the rear left side of the machine,
release hooks (2) at 3 locations and then detach cover (3).
2. Hold the outer element (5), rock it lightly up and down and to
the left and right, and rotate the element to the left and right to
pull it out.
Do not remove inner element (6) when doing this.
3. When the outer element (5) has been removed, check that the
inner element has not come out of position and is not at an
angle. If is at an angle, insert your hand and push it in straight.
4. Wipe off or brush off the dirt stuck to cover (3) and the inside of
the air cleaner body (7).
5. Remove any dirt or dust that is accumulated to vacuator valve
(4) installed to cover (3).
NOTICE
The inner element must not be cleaned and used again. When replacing the outer element, replace the inner element at the
same time.
If the inner element is not installed properly and the outer element and cover are installed, there is danger that the outer element
will be damaged.
The seal portion on improper parts lacks precision, and allows the entry of dust, which leads to damage of the engine. Do not
use such improper parts.
6. Remove inner element (6), then quickly install the new inner element.
Insert the inner element securely so that it does not move.
7. Push the new outer element (5) in straight with your hand when installing it to the air cleaner body.
If the element is held and rocked lightly up and down and to the left and right while pushing it in, the element can
be inserted easily.
NOTICE
Be sure to install the air cleaner element facing in the correct direction.
Install so that the bottom of the air cleaner element cylinder (face where no
hole is drilled) (B), (C) is at cover (3) end. If the direction of installation is
mistaken, there is danger that it will cause breakage of the air cleaner
element or serious damage to the engine.
4 - 27
.
8. Replace O-ring (8) of cover (3) with a new part.
NOTICE
When inserting the element, if the rubber at the tip is swollen or the outer
element is not pushed in straight, and cover (3) is assembled by force to
hook (2), there is danger that the hook and air cleaner body may be
damaged, so be careful when assembling.
9. Install cover (3) as follows.

1) Align cover (3) with the element.
2) Hook the tip of hook (2) to the protruding part of the air
cleaner body and lock it in position.
3) Always install cover (3) so that the vacuator (4) is facing the
ground (A).
4) When cover (3) is installed, check that the clearance
between the air cleaner body and cover (3) is not too large.
If it is too large, install again.
10. Replace seal (9) on the cover (3) with a new seal.
4 - 28
.
CLEAN INSIDE OF COOLING SYSTEM

WARNING
Immediately after the engine is stopped, the coolant is at a high temperature and the radiator is under high internal pressure.
If the cap is removed to drain the coolant in this condition, there is a hazard of burns. Wait for the temperature to go down, then
turn the cap slowly to release the pressure before removing it.
When starting the engine while cleaning the machine, set the lock lever in LOCK position to prevent the machine from moving.
For details of starting the engine, see "BEFORE STARTING ENGINE (PAGE 3-115)" and "STARTING ENGINE (PAGE 3-134)" in
OPERATION section.
There is danger of touching the fan if the undercover is left removed.
Never enter behind the machine when the engine is running.
Stop the machine on level ground when cleaning or changing the coolant.
Clean the inside of the cooling system, change the coolant according to the table below.
Interval for cleaning inside of cooling system

Coolant
and changing antifreeze coolant
Komatsu genuine
Every 2 years or every 4000 hours
SUPERCOOLANT
whichever comes sooner
(AF-NAC)
Komatsu genuine SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC) has the important function of preventing corrosion as well as
preventing freezing. Even in the areas where freezing is not an issue, the use of coolant is essential. Komatsu
machines are supplied with SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC). SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC) has excellent
anticorrosion, antifreeze and cooling properties and can be used continuously for 2 years or 4000 hours. As a basic
rule, we do not recommend the use of any coolant other than SUPERCOOLANT (AF-NAC). If you use another
coolant, it may cause serious problems, such as corrosion of the engine and aluminum parts of the cooling system.
To maintain the anticorrosion properties of Supercoolant (AF-NAC), always keep the density of Supercoolant
between 30% and 64%.
When selecting coolant, investigate the lowest temperature in the past and decide the density for the coolant from
the coolant density table below. When actually deciding the density for the coolant, set it approximately 10°C {18°
F} below lowest temperature. The density must be over 30% at least. If the density of obtained coolant is higher than
the necessary density for lowest temperature, dilute it with adequate distilled water, and then fill it into the tank.
If there is any unclear point, contact your Komatsu distributor.
Coolant density table

°C Above -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40 -45 -50
Minimum Temp
°F Above 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40 -49 -58
Density (%) 30 36 41 46 50 54 58 61 64
4 - 29
.
WARNING
Coolant is toxic. Be careful not to get coolant on you when opening the drain valve.
If it gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with large amount of fresh water and see a doctor at once.
Ask a specialist company or contact your Komatsu distributor for performing the change of coolant or disposal of the cooling
water containing coolant that has been drained during repair of radiator. Coolant is toxic. Do not let it flow into drainage ditches
or spray it onto the ground surface.
Coolant is already diluted with distilled water, so it is not flammable. (For details of the distilled water, see
"COOLANT AND WATER FOR DILUTION (PAGE 4-8)"). Check the density with a coolant tester.
Prepare a container whose capacity is larger than the specified coolant volume to catch drained coolant.
Prepare a hose to use when refilling with coolant.
1. Stop the machine on level ground, then stop the engine.

2. Check that the coolant temperature has gone down enough to
make it possible to touch the radiator cap surface by hand,
then turn radiator cap (1) slowly until it contacts the stopper to
release the pressure.
3. Following this, push radiator cap (1), turn it until it contacts the
stopper, then remove it.
4. Remove the undercover, then set the container under drain

valve (2) to catch the coolant mixture.
Open drain valve (2) at the bottom of the radiator and drain the
coolant.
5. After draining the coolant, close drain valve (2), and fill with city
water. When the radiator is full, start the engine and run at low
idle, then continue to run for approximately. 10 minutes.
6. Stop the engine, open drain valve (2), and drain the water.
7. After draining the water, clean the radiator with detergent.
For the cleaning method, follow the instruction of detergent.
8. Close drain valve (2).
9. Install the undercover.
10. Add coolant through the water filler port up to the mouth of the port. For details of the coolant density, see
"COOLANT DENSITY TABLE".
11. Run the engine at low idle for 5 minutes to remove the air from the water, then run at high idle for 5 minutes.
(Leave radiator cap (1) removed when doing this.)
4 - 30
.
12. Drain the coolant from sub-tank (3), clean the inside of the
sub-tank, then add coolant until the coolant level is between
the FULL and LOW marks.
If the sub-tank is extremely dirty and it is difficult to clean,
replace it with a new part.
13. Stop the engine, wait for approximately 3 minutes, add coolant
up to the mouth of the filler port, and tighten the radiator cap (1).
4 - 31
.
CHECK AND TIGHTEN TRACK SHOE BOLTS

If the machine is used with track shoe bolts (1) loose, they will
break, so tighten any loose bolts immediately.
Tightening
1. First tighten to a tightening torque of 196 ± 19.6 Nm (20 ± 2 kgm, 144.7 ± 14.5 lbft) then check that the nut and
shoe are in close contact with the link contact surface.
2. After checking, tighten the angle of the shoe bolts a further 90 ± 10 deg. for steel shoes (120 ± 10 deg. for swamp
shoes) and 60 ± 10 deg. for road liners.
Order for Tightening

Tighten the bolts in the order shown in the figure on the right. After
tightening, check that the nut and shoe are in close contact with the
link mating surface.
4 - 32
.
CHECK AND ADJUST TRACK TENSION

The wear of the pins and bushings on the undercarriage will vary with the working conditions and type of soil, so
inspect the track tension frequently in order to maintain the standard tension.
Stop the machine on firm, horizontal ground when carrying out the inspection and maintenance.
Checking
1. Run the engine at low idle, move the machine forward a
distance equal to the length of track on ground, then stop the
machine.
2. Choose wooden block (3) that will reach from idler (1) to carrier
roller (2), then place it on top of the track.
3. Measure the maximum deflection between the top surface of
the track and the bottom surface of the wooden block.
Standard deflection
Deflection "a" should be 10 to 30 mm (0.4 to 1.2 in).
If the track tension is not at the standard value, adjust it in the following manner.
Adjustment
WARNING
There is danger of plug (1) flying out under the high internal pressure of the
grease. Never loosen plug (1) more than 1 turn.
Never loosen any part other than plug (1). Never put your face in the
mounting direction of plug (1).
If the track tension cannot be loosened with the procedure given here,
contact your Komatsu distributor.
Increasing Track Tension

Prepare a grease pump.
1. Pump in grease through grease fitting (2) with a grease pump.
2. To check that the track tension is correct, run the engine at low
idle, move the machine forward a distance equal to the length
of track on ground, then stop the machine.
3. Check the track tension again, and if the tension is not correct,
adjust it again.
4 - 33
.
4. Continue to pump in grease until dimension (S) becomes zero

(0). If the tension is still loose, the pin and bushing are
excessively worn, so they must be either turned or replaced.
Contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
Loosening Track Tension
WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to release the grease by any method except the procedure given below.
If track tension is not relieved by this procedure, ask your Komatsu distributor for repairs.
1. Loosen plug (1) gradually to release the grease.

2. When loosening plug (1), turn it a maximum of 1 turn.
3. If the grease does not come out smoothly, move the machine
forwards and backwards a short distance.
4. Tighten plug (1).
5. To check that the track tension is correct, run the engine at low
idle, move the machine forward a distance equal to the length
of track on ground, then stop the machine.
6. Check the track tension again, and if the tension is not correct,
adjust it again.
4 - 34
.
CHECK ROAD LINERS

If the road liners are in the following condition, they must be repaired or replaced, so contact your Komatsu
distributor for repairs or replacement.
Lug Height
If lug height "a" is reduced by wear, the drawbar pull will drop.
If "a" is less than 5 mm (0.2 in), replace with a new part.
When making judgement whether to replace, repair, or contiune

using road liner, please contact your Komatsu distributor.
REPLACE ROAD LINERS

When replacing all the road liner for the machine, please contact your Komatsu distributor to have the
replacement carried out.
When replacing only part of the road liner, use the special road liner removal tool. Order the tool from your
4 - 35
.
REPLACE BUCKET TEETH (VERTICAL PIN TYPE)

Replace the bucket teeth before the adapter starts to wear.
WARNING
It is dangerous if the work equipment moves by mistake when the teeth are being replaced.
Set the work equipment in a stable condition, then stop the engine and set the lock lever securely to LOCK position.
The pins can be knocked out only with strong force, so there is a hazard that the pin may fly out. Check that there is no one in
the surrounding area.
There is a hazard that fragments will fly during the replacement work, so always wear protective equipment like protective
eyeglasses and gloves.
1. To make it possible to knock out pin of tooth (1), put block (5)
under the bottom of the bucket, and set so that the bottom
surface of the bucket is horizontal.
2. Check that the work equipment is in a stable condition, then

operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever to set it to
LOCK position (L).
3. Use a hammer and drift to knock out lock pin (2). (If the drift is
set against rubber pin lock (3) when it is hit, the rubber pin lock
may break. Set it against the back of the pin.)
4. After removing lock pin (2) and rubber pin lock (3), check them.
4 - 36
.
If lock pin (2) and rubber pin lock (3) are used in the condition below, it will cause tooth (1) to come off during
operation. Always replace them with new parts.
The lock pin (2) is too short.
Dimension (B) is 1/3 or more of dimension (A) when locking pin
(2) is aligned with bottom face (C).
Rubber (6) of the rubber pin lock is cut and the steel ball is about
to come out.
Steel ball (7) sinks in when it is pushed by hand.
5. Clean the surface of adapter (4) and remove the soil with a knife.
6. Use your hand or a hammer to push rubber pin lock (3) into the
hole of the adapter (4).
When doing this, be careful that the rubber pin lock (3) does not
fly out from the adapter surface.
7. Clean the inside of teeth (1), then install it to adapter (4). If there is mud affixed to it or if there are protrusions,
the teeth (1) will not enter the adapter properly, and there will not be proper contact at the mating portion.
4 - 37
.
8. Fit tooth (1) to adapter (4), and confirm that when the pointer is
pressed strongly, the rear face of the hole for the pin of the
teeth (1) is at the same level as the rear face of the hole for the
pin of the adapter (4).
If the rear face of the pin hole of tooth (1) protrudes in front of
the rear face of the pin hole of adapter (4), do not knock the pin
in.
If this happens, there is something (C) preventing the tooth (1)
from fitting completely in adapter (4), locate the problem and
remove the obstruction. When tooth (1) fits completely in
adapter (4), knock in lock pin (2).
9. Insert lock pin (2) in the pin hole in the tooth (1), and knock it in
so that the top surface of lock pin (2) is the same height as the
surface of tooth (1).
10. After replacing a bucket tooth, always check the following.
1) After the lock pin (2) has been knocked in completely,
check that it is secured by the teeth (1) and surface.
2) Lightly hit lock pin (2) in the reverse direction from which it
was hit in.
3) Lightly hit the tip of the teeth (1) from above and below, and
hit its sides from right and left.
4) Confirm that rubber pin lock (3) and lock pin (2) are set as
shown in the figure.
REMARK
If the tooth is turned, the wear will become uniform. This will extend the service life of the tooth and reduce the
frequency of replacement.
When replacing the tooth, replace the rubber pin lock and lock pin with new parts at the same time. This will prevent
the tooth from falling out.
4 - 38
.
REPLACE BUCKET TEETH (HORIZONTAL PIN TYPE)

Replace the bucket teeth before the adapter starts to wear.
WARNING
It is dangerous if the work equipment moves by mistake when the teeth are being replaced.
Set the work equipment in a stable condition, then stop the engine and set the lock lever securely to LOCK position.
The pins can be knocked out only with strong force, so there is a hazard that the pin may fly out. Check that there is no one in
the surrounding area.
There is a hazard that fragments will fly during the replacement work, so always wear protective equipment like protective
eyeglasses and gloves.
1. To make it possible to knock out pin (1) of tooth (2), put block
(5) under the bottom of the bucket, and set so that the bottom
surface of the bucket is horizontal.
2. Check that the work equipment is in a stable condition, then

operate the operating portion (g) of the lock lever to set it to
LOCK position (L).
3. Place a bar on the head of pin (1), hit the bar with a hammer to
knock out the pin, then remove tooth (2).
REMARK
If the bucket teeth cannot be safely removed by this method,
have your Komatsu distributor replace the bucket teeth.
4 - 39
.
4. Clean the mounting face. Fit a new tooth (2) in the adapter,
push in pin (1) partially by hand, then lock it with a hammer to
install the tooth to the bucket.
4 - 40
.
ADJUST BUCKET CLEARANCE

WARNING
It is dangerous if the work equipment is mistakenly moved when adjusting
the bucket clearance.
Lower the work equipment to the ground in stable condition, operate the
operating portion (g) of the lock lever to set it to the LOCK position
securely, and stop the engine.
1. Set the work equipment in the position shown in the diagram on

the right, then stop the engine and set the lock lever to LOCK
position (L).
2. Shift O-ring (1) of the linkage and measure the amount of
clearance "a".
Measurement is easier of you move the bucket to one side
(right side of the diagram) or the other so all the clearance can
be measured in one place.
Use a gap (clearance) gauge for easy and accurate
measurement.
3. Loosen 4 plate mounting bolts (2), and loosen plate (3).
The shim is a split type, so the operation can be performed
without removing the bolts.
4. Remove shim (4) corresponding to the amount of clearance "a"
measured above.
[Example]
In the case of clearance of 3 mm (0.118 in), remove two 1.0
mm (0.039 in) shims and one 0.5 mm (0.020 in) shim. Play
becomes 0.5 mm (0.020 in). For shim (4), two types of 1.0 mm
(0.039 in) and 0.5 mm (0.020 in)are used.
(6) Arm
When clearance a is smaller than one shim, do not carry out
(7) Bucket
any maintenance.
5. Tighten the 4 bolts (2).
If the bolts (2) are too stiff to tighten, pull out pin stopper bolt (5)
for easier tightening.
4 - 41
.
CHECK WINDOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL, ADD FLUID

If there is air in the window washer fluid, check the level of the fluid
in window washer tank (1). Add automobile window washer fluid if
necessary.
When adding fluid, be careful not to let any dust get in.
Mixture Ratio of Pure Washer Fluid and Water

The proportion differs according to the ambient temperature, so dilute the washer fluid with water to the following
proportions before adding.
Area, season Proportions Freezing temperature

Washer fluid 1/3: -10°C
Normal
water 2/3 (14°F)
Washer fluid 1/2: -20°C

Winter in cold area
water 1/2 (-4°F)
Winter in extremely -30°C

Pure washer fluid
cold area (-22°F)
There are 2 types depending on the freezing temperature:

-10°C (14°F) (general use) and -30°C (-22°F) (cold area use), select according to the area and season.
4 - 42
.
CHECK AND MAINTENANCE AIR CONDITIONER
Check Level of Refrigerant (gas)
WARNING
If the refrigerant used in the air conditioner gets into your eyes or on your hands, it may cause loss of sight or frostbite. Do not
touch the refrigerant. Never loosen any part of the refrigerant circuit.
Do not bring any open flame close to any point where the refrigerant gas is leaking.
If the refrigerant (gas) level is low, the cooling effect will become
poor. When the engine is running at full throttle and the cooler is
running at high speed, look at the sight glass (1) (inspection
window) in the refrigerant hose mouthpiece to check the condition
of the refrigerant gas (Hydrofluorocarbons HFC-134a) flowing in
the refrigerant circuit.
(A) No bubbles in refrigerant flow: Suitable
(B) Some bubbles in flow (bubbles pass continuously):
Lack of refrigerant
(C) Colorless, transparent: No refrigerant
REMARK
When there are bubbles, the refrigerant gas level is low, so contact
your Komatsu distributors to have refrigerant added. If the air
conditioner is run with the refrigerant gas level low, it will cause
damage to the compressor.
Inspection During Off Season

Even during the off-season, operate the air conditioner for 3 to 5 minutes once a month to maintain the oil film at all
parts of the compressor.
Inspection and Maintenance Items
Check, maintenance items Content of check, maintenance Guideline for maintenance time
Refrigerant (gas) Charge amount Twice a year (spring, autumn)

Air conditioner condenser Clogged fins Every 500 hours
Compressor Operating condition Every 4000 hours
V-belt Damage, tension Every 250 hours
Operating condition
Blower motor, fan When required
(does it make abnormal noise?)
Control mechanism Operating condition (does it function normally?) When required
Mounting condition, looseness at tightening or
Piping mounts When required
connecting portions, leakage of gas, damage
4 - 43
.
WASH WASHABLE FLOOR

WARNING
Put strong blocks below the undercarriage to tilt the machine, and be
very careful when you do the operation.
If you touch the control levers by mistake, there is a possibility that the
machine suddenly moves and it could cause serious accident. Before
you go away from the operator's seat, be sure to hold the operating part
(g) of the lock lever to set it to the LOCK position (L) securely.
NOTICE
When performing this operation, be careful not to get water on the monitor and connectors inside the operator's cab.
Never spray water above the pedestal of the operator's seat (2).
If any water splashes on the surrounding equipment, be sure to wipe it off.
With the washable floor, it is possible to flush out the dirt on the cab floor directly with water.
Washing Washable Floor Mat

1. Stop the machine on horizontal ground, lower the bucket to the ground, and then stop the engine.
2. When washing the floor mat, use a brush to remove the dust, or direct the water onto the mat and wash it with
a brush.
Method of Washing
1. Set the machine at an angle.
For details, see "Method of Setting Machine at Angle (PAGE 4-46)"
2. Swing the upper structure slowly so that water drain holes (3)
in the cab floor are at a low position.
4 - 44
.
3. Lower the work equipment to the ground and set the machine
in a stable condition.
securely to LOCK position (L) and stop the engine.
5. Remove the floor mat holder plate (4).

6. Pull the knob of floor mat holder clip (5) and remove clip (5).
7. Remove the floor mat.
8. Remove the cap from water drain hole (8).
9. Flush out the dirt on the floor directly with water through water
drain hole (3).
10. After completing the washing operation, install the cap in water
drain hole (3).
11. Fit the floor mat, then secure it with floor mat holder plate (4).
12. Secure the floor mat in position with the floor mat holder clip
(5).
4 - 45
.
Method of Setting Machine at Angle
Method Using Slope
WARNING
Select a solid and smooth slope.
Always put blocks under the track to prevent the machine from moving, and dig the work equipment into the ground.
1. Stop the machine so that the work equipment is on the downhill

side.
2. Put blocks under the track and dig the work equipment into the
ground.
Method Using Block
WARNING
Select a firm flat place.
Put strong blocks under the undercarriage to stabilize the machine and be extremely careful when performing the operation.
1. Raise the chassis with the boom and arm.

When doing this, operate the levers slowly.
2. Insert block (5) under the raised track to make the machine
stable.
3. Raise the boom slowly and lower the machine.

When doing this, check that the machine is always stable.
4 - 46
.
CHECK GAS SPRING

WARNING
The gas spring is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an explosion, which will lead to
serious injury or damage. When handling the gas spring, always observe the following.
Do not disassemble the gas spring.
Do not make holes in it or weld it.
Do not hit it, roll it, or subject it to any impact.
When disposing of the gas spring, the gas must be released. Contact your Komatsu distributor to have this work performed.
The gas springs are located at the cab roof (2 places on the right and left).
In the following cases, ask your Komatsu distributor to perform

inspection, repair, and replacement.
When the sun roof is heavy to open.
When the sun roof is not held open.
When oil or gas is found to be leaking from the gas spring.
4 - 47
.
BLEEDING AIR FROM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

For details, see "STARTING ENGINE (PAGE 3-134)". If it is necessary to refer to the items for starting the engine,
moving the machine off, steering, or stopping, see OPERATION section.
1. Bleeding air from pump
1) Loosen air bleeder (1) and check that oil oozes out from the
air bleeder.
2) If the oil does not ooze out, remove the drain hose from the
hydraulic pump case and fill the pump case completely
with hydraulic oil through drain port (2).
Hold the removed hose firmly, keeping the mouthpiece
higher than the oil level in the hydraulic tank so that oil will
not spill out of the hose.
3) After completing the air bleed operation, tighten air bleeder
(1) and install the drain hose.
NOTICE
If the drain hose is installed first, oil will spurt out from bleeder hole (1).
If the pump is operated without filling the pump case with hydraulic oil, abnormal heat will be generated and this may cause an
unexpected damage to the pump.
2. Starting engine
Start the engine, referring to "STARTING ENGINE (PAGE 3-134)".
Run the engine at Low idle (MIN) for 10 minutes after starting, then start operations.
3. Bleeding air from cylinders

1) Run the engine at Low idle (MIN), and extend and retract each cylinder 4 to 5 times, taking care that a
cylinder is not moved to the end of its stroke. (Stop the cylinder approximately 100 mm {3.9 in} short of its
stroke end)
2) Next, operate each cylinder 3 to 4 times to the end of its stroke.
3) Finally, operate each cylinder 4 to 5 times to the end of its stroke to completely remove the air.
NOTICE
If the engine is run at high speed immediately after startup or a cylinder is pushed up to its stroke end, air taken inside the cylinder
may cause damage to the piston packing.
4. Bleeding air from swing motor

1) Run the engine at Low idle (MIN), loosen hose (3) at port
S, and check that oil oozes out from port S hose (3).
NOTICE
Do not operate the swing under any circumstances.
2) If oil does not ooze out, stop the engine, remove port S
hose (3), and fill the inside of the motor case with hydraulic
oil.
3) After completely bleeding the air from the swing motor, tighten port S hose (3).
4) Run the engine at Low idle (MIN) and slowly swing at least 2 times uniformly to the left and right. This will
automatically bleed the air from the swing circuit.
4 - 48
.
NOTICE
If the air is not bled from the swing motor, the motor bearings may be damaged.
When replacing the travel motor safety valve, contact your Komatsu distributor to have it replaced and to have the air bled.
5. Bleeding air from travel motor

(only when oil inside travel motor case has been drained)
1) Run the engine at low idle, remove hose (4) from port C,
then when the oil has flowed out, tighten it again.
2) Run the engine at Low idle (MIN) and swing the work
equipment 90 deg. to bring it to the side of the track.
3) Jack up the machine until the track is raised slightly from
the ground. Rotate the track under no load for 2 minutes.
Repeat this procedure on both the left and right sides, and
rotate the track equally both forward and in reverse.
6. Bleeding air from attachment (when installed)

If a breaker or other attachment has been installed, run the engine at Low idle (MIN) and operate the attachment
pedal repeatedly (approximately 10 times) until the air has been bled from the attachment circuit.
NOTICE
If the method of bleeding the air from the attachment itself is specified by the manufacturer, bleed the air according to the
specified procedure.
After completing the air bleeding operation, stop the engine, and leave the machine for 5 minutes before starting operations.
This will remove the air bubbles in the oil inside the hydraulic cylinders.
Check that there is no leakage of oil and wipe off any oil that has been spilled.
After completing the air bleeding operation, inspect the oil level, and if the oil level is low, add oil.
4 - 49
.

For details of the following items, see "Checks Before Starting (PAGE 3-117)" in OPERATION section.
Drain water and sediment from fuel tank
Check for water and sediment in water separator, drain water
Check oil level in hydraulic tank, add oil
Check coolant level, add coolant
Check oil level in engine oil pan, add oil
Check electric wiring
Check fuel level, add fuel
Check working lamp switch
Check function of horn
4 - 50
.
LUBRICATION
NOTICE
If any abnormal noise is generated from any greasing point, perform greasing regardless of the greasing interval.
Perform greasing every 10 hours for the first 50 hours on a new machine.
After the machine was subjected to jobs in the water, be sure to grease the wet pins.
1. Set the machine to the greasing posture shown on the right,

lower the work equipment to the ground, then stop the engine.
2. By using a grease pump, pump in grease through the grease
fittings shown by arrows.
3. After greasing, wipe off any old grease that was pushed out.
(1) Arm-Bucket coupling pin (1 place)
4 - 51
.
CHECK SWING MACHINERY CASE OIL, ADD OIL

WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature after the engine is stopped, and may cause serious burns. Wait for the temperature to
go down before starting the operation.
1. Remove dipstick (G) and wipe the oil from the dipstick with a
cloth.
2. Fully insert dipstick (G) into the filler pipe.
3. When dipstick (G) is pulled out, if oil level is between the H and
L marks of the gauge, oil level is proper.
4. If oil does not reach L mark on dipstick (G), add oil through oil
filler port (F).
5. If the oil level exceeds the H mark on the oil level gauge, loosen
drain plug (P) to drain the excess oil, after swinging the upper
structure so that drain plug (P) comes between the right and
left tracks.
6. After checking oil level or adding oil, insert the dipstick into the
hole and install oil filler cap.
4 - 52
.
CHECK OIL LEVEL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE, ADD OIL

WARNING
The oil is at high temperature immediately after the machine has been operated. Wait for the oil to cool down before starting
the operation.
If there is still pressure remaining inside the case, the oil or plug may fly out.
Loosen the plug slowly to release the pressure.
Prepare a container to catch drained oil.

Prepare a hexagon wrench.
The diagram on the right shows the left final drive case.
1. Set so that plug (F) is at the top, with plug (F) and plug (P)
prependicular to the ground.
2. Using a hexagonal wrench, remove plug (G) and check that the
oil level is within a range from the bottom of the plug hole to a
point 10 mm (0.4 in) below it.
3. If the oil level is low, add oil through the hole of plug (F). Add
oil until oil overflows from the hole of plug (G).
4. After checking, install plugs (F) and (G).
4 - 53
.
CHECK LEVEL OF BATTERY ELECTROLYTE

Perform this procedure before operating the machine.
WARNING
Do not use the battery if the battery electrolyte level is below LOWER LEVEL line. This will accelerate deterioration of the inside
of the battery and reduce the service life of the battery. In addition, it may cause an explosion.
The battery generates flammable gas and there is danger of explosion, do not bring open flame near the battery.
Battery electrolyte is dangerous. If it gets in your eyes or on your skin, wash it off with a large amount of water and consult a
doctor.
Do not use a direct air blow or dry cloth to clean the battery. A wet cloth will prevent fire or explosion from static electricity.
NOTICE
When adding distilled water to the battery, do not allow the battery electrolyte to go above UPPER LEVEL line. If the electrolyte
level is too high, it may leak and cause damage to the paint surface or corrode other parts.
When adding distilled water in cold weather, add it before starting operations in the morning to prevent the electrolyte from
freezing.
Inspect the battery electrolyte level at least once a month and follow the basic safety procedures given below.
Open the door on the left side of the machine. The batteries are
installed at (A) part.
When Checking Electrolyte Level from Side of Battery

If it is possible to check the electrolyte level from the side of the battery, check as follows.
1. Use a wet cloth to clean the area around the electrolyte level
lines and check that the electrolyte level is between UPPER
LEVEL (U.L.) and LOWER LEVEL (L.L.) lines.
4 - 54
.
2. If the electrolyte level is below the midway point between

UPPER LEVEL (U.L.) and LOWER LEVEL (L.L.) lines, remove
cap (2) and add purified water (e.g. commercially available
replenishment water for a battery) to U.L. line.
3. After adding distilled water, tighten cap (2) securely.
REMARK
If distilled water is added to above UPPER LEVEL (U.L.) line, use
a syringe to lower the level to UPPER LEVEL (U.L.) line.
Neutralize the removed fluid with baking soda (sodium
bicarbonate), then flush it away with a large amount of water or
consult your Komatsu distributor or battery maker.
When it is Impossible to Check Electrolyte Level from Side of Battery

If it is impossible to check the electrolyte level from the side of the battery, or there is no display of UPPER LEVEL
line on the side of the battery, check as follows.
1. Remove cap (2) at the top of the battery, look through water
filler port (3), and check the electrolyte surface. If the
electrolyte does not reach sleeve (4), add purified water (e.g.
commercially available replenishment water for a battery) so
that the level reaches the bottom of the sleeve (UPPER LEVEL
line) without fail.
(A) Suitable level: Electrolyte level is up to bottom of sleeve,
so surface tension causes electrolyte
surface to bulge and poles appear bent.
(B) Low: Electrolyte level is not up to bottom of sleeve, so
poles appear straight and not bent.
2. After adding distilled water, tighten cap (2) securely.
REMARK
If water is added to above the bottom tip of the sleeve, use a pipette
to remove electrolyte. Neutralize the removed electrolyte with
sodium bicarbonate, then flush it away with a large amount of
water. If necessary, contact your Komatsu distributor or your
battery maker.
When it is Possible to Use Indicator to Check Electrolyte Level

If it is possible to use an indicator to check the electrolyte level, follow the instructions given.
4 - 55
.
CHECK AND ADJUST COOLING FAN BELT TENSION
Checking
1. Open engine hood (1).
2. Deflection a should be 7-10 mm (0.3-0.4 in) when the belt is

pressed with the thumb with a force of approx. 58.8 N (6 kg) at
a point midway between the alternator pulley and fan pulley.
Adjustment
1. Loosen mounting bolt (3) of alternator (2).
2. Loosen alternator lock bolt (4).
3. Turn tension bolt (5) of alternator (2) in the direction to loosen
it and adjust so that the belt tension is 7-10 mm (0.3-0.4 in)
(approx. 58.8 N (6 kg)).
When doing this, do not touch double nut (6).
4. Tighten mounting bolt (3) and lock bolt (4).
NOTICE
Check each pulley for damage, wear of the V-groove, and wear of the V-belt. In particular, be sure to check that the V-belt is
not touching the bottom of the V-groove.
If the belt is stretched and there is no allowance for adjustment, or if it is cut or cracked, please contact your Komatsu
distributor for replacement.
4 - 56
.
CHECK AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION, ADJUST
Checking
2. Deflection (A) should be 5-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in) when the belt is

pressed with the thumb with a force of approx. 58.8 N (6 kg) at
a point midway between compressor pulley (3) and fan pulley
(4).
Adjustment
1. Loosen bolts (1) and (2).
Compressor (3) is installed to bracket (4), so when bolts (1)
and (2) are loosened, it becomes possible to move bracket
(4) with the mounting position of bolt (2) as the fulcrum.
2. Loosen bolt (1) and bolts (2), then move compressor (3) to
adjust.
3. When the position of the compressor is determined, tighten
bolts (1) and (2) to hold it in position.
NOTICE
Check each pulley for damage, wear of the V-groove, and wear of the V-belt. In particular, be sure to check that the V-belt is not
touching the bottom of the V-groove.
In case any of the following occurs, ask the Komatsu distributor in your territory to replace the belts with new ones.
• The fan belt has elongated, leaving little allowance for adjustment.
• A cut or crack is found on the belt.
• Slipping or creaking sound is heard coming from the belt.
When the new V-belt is set, readjust it after 1 hour of operation.
4 - 57
.

Maintenance for every 100 and 250 hours service should be performed at the same time.
LUBRICATION
NOTICE
If any abnormal noise is generated from any greasing point, perform greasing regardless of the greasing interval.
Perform greasing every 10 hours for the first 50 hours on a new machine.
After the machine was subjected to jobs in the water, be sure to grease the wet pins.
1. Set the machine to the greasing posture shown on the right,

lower the work equipment to the ground, then stop the engine.
fittings shown by arrows.
(1) Boom cylinder foot pin (2 places)
(2) Boom foot pin (2 places)

(3) Boom cylinder rod end pin (2 places)
(4) Arm cylinder foot pin (1 place)
(5) Boom - Arm coupling pin (1 place)

(6) Arm cylinder rod end pin (1 place)
(7) Bucket cylinder foot pin (1 place)
4 - 58
.
(8) Arm - Link coupling pin (1 place)
(9) Link connecting pin (1 place)

(10) Bucket cylinder rod end (1 place)
(11) Bucket-link connecting pin (2 places)
(12) Blade connecting pin (2 places)

(13) Blade cylinder foot pin (2 places)
(14) Blade cylinder rod end pin (2 places)
4 - 59
.
CHANGE OIL IN ENGINE OIL PAN, REPLACE ENGINE OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE
WARNING
Oil pan refill amount: 11 liters (2.91 US gal)

Prepare a filter wrench
1. Remove undercover at the bottom of the machine, then set the

container under drain valve (P) on the left side of the machine
to catch the oil.
2. Loosen drain plug (P) and drain the oil. Be careful not to get oil
on yourself.
3. Tighten drain plug (P).
4. Open the pump room on the right side of the machine, then
using the filter wrench, turn filter cartridge (1) to the left to
remove it.
5. Clean the filter holder, fill the new filter cartridge with clean oil, coat the thread and packing portion of the new
filter cartridge with oil (or coat thinly with grease), then install.
REMARK
Check that there is no old packing stuck to the filter holder. If there is any old packing stuck to the filter, it will cause
leakage of oil.
6. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the filter holder, then tighten a further 3/4 turn.
7. After replacing the filter cartridge, add oil through oil filler (F)
until the oil level is between the H and L marks on the dipstick
(G).
8. Run the engine at idle for a short time, then stop the engine,
and check that the oil level is between the H and L marks on the
dipstick. For details, see "Check Oil Level in Engine Oil Pan,
Add Oil (PAGE 3-121)".
4 - 60
.
REPLACE FUEL PREFILTER CARTRIDGE

WARNING
Immediately after the engine is stopped, all parts are still very hot. Accordingly, wait until they have cooled down before
replacing the filter.
High pressure is generated inside the engine fuel piping system when the engine is running.
When replacing the filter, wait for at least 30 seconds after stopping the engine to let the internal pressure go down before
Do not bring any open flame close.
NOTICE
Genuine Komatsu fuel filter cartridges use a special filter that has highly efficient filtering ability. When replacing the filter
cartridge, always use a genuine Komatsu part.
The common rail fuel injection system used on this machine consists of more precise parts than the conventional injection
pump and nozzle.
If any part other than a genuine Komatsu filter cartridge is used, dust or dirt may get in and cause problems with the injection
system. Always avoid using substitute parts.
When performing inspection or maintenance of the fuel system, pay more attention than normal to the entry of dirt. If dirt is
stuck to any part, use fuel to wash it off completely.
Prepare a container to catch drain oil.

position (S).
2. Set the container to catch the fuel under the prefilter cartridge.
3. Loosen drain valve (2), then drain all the water and sediment in
the transparent cup (3) and also the fuel accumulated in filter
cartridge (4).
4. By using a filter wrench, turn transparent cup (3) to the left to
remove it. (This cup is used again.)
5. By using a filter wrench, turn cartridge (4) to the left to remove it.
6. Install transparent cup (3) to the bottom of the new filter cartridge. (When doing this, always replace O-ring (5).)
4 - 61
.
7. When installing, apply oil to the packing surface and bring the packing surface into contact with the seal surface
of filter cartridge (4) and then tighten it further by 1/4 to 1/2 turns.
If the transparent cup is tightened too much, the O-ring will be damaged and this will cause leakage of fuel; if it
is not tightened enough, fuel will leak through the gap at the O-ring. To prevent these problems, always tighten
securely to the fixed tightening angle.
8. Clean the filter holder, fill the new filter cartridge with clean fuel, coat the packing surface thinly with oil, then
install to the filter holder.
NOTICE
When adding fuel, do not remove cap (B). Always add fuel from the 8
small holes (A) on the dirty side.
After adding fuel, remove cap (B) and install the fuel filter.
Always fill with clean fuel. Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get into
the fuel. In particular, center portion is the clean side, so do not remove
cap (B) when adding fuel. Be careful not to let dirt or dust get into center
portion on the clean side.
9. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the seal surface of the filter head, then tighten it 3/4
of a turn.
If the filter cartridge is tightened too far, the packing will be damaged and this will lead to leakage of fuel. If the
filter cartridge is too loose, fuel will also leak from the packing, so always tighten the correct amount.
When tightening with a filter wrench, be extremely careful not to dent or damage the filter.
10. Check that the drain valve (2) is tightened securely.
12. After completing the replacement of filter cartridge (4), bleed the air.
Bleed the air as follows:

13. Fill the fuel tank with fuel (to the position where the float is at the highest position).
14. Loosen the knob of feed pump (6), pull it out, then pump it in and out until the movement becomes heavy.
REMARK
It is not necessary to remove the plug at the top of the fuel prefilter and fuel main filter.
After the engine runs out of fuel, use the same procedure to operate feed pump (6) and bleed the air.
15. After finishing the air bleeding, push in the knob of feed pump (6) and tighten it.
16. After replacing the filter cartridge, start the engine and run it at low idle for 10 minutes.
Check for leakage of oil from the filter seal surface and tranparent cup mounting. If any oil is leaking, check the
tightening of the filter cartridge.
If there is still oil leakage, repeat Steps 1 to 5 to remove the filter cartridge, and if any damage or embedded
foreign material in the packing surface is found, replace it with a new cartridge and repeat Steps 6 to 16 to install
it.
4 - 62
.
CHECK SWING PINION GREASE LEVEL, ADD GREASE

Prepare a scale.
1. Remove bolts (1) (2 bolts) on the top of the revolving frame and
remove cover (2).
2. Insert the scale into the grease and check that the grease
passing through the pinion has a height of at least 16 mm (0.6
in). If the level is low, add grease.
3. Check if the grease is milky white. If it is milky white, it is
necessary to change the grease. Contact your Komatsu
distributor.
Total amount of grease: 9.1 liters (2.4 US gal) [8.3 kg (18.3 lb)]
4. Install cover (2) with bolts (1).
LUBRICATE SWING CIRCLE

1. Lower the work equipment to the ground.
fittings shown by arrows. (2 places)
4 - 63
.
CLEAN AND INSPECT RADIATOR FINS, OIL COOLER FINS, AFTERCOOLER FINS, FUEL COOLER
FINS, AND AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER FINS
WARNING
If compressed air, high-pressure water, or steam hits your body directly or dirt is sent flying by the compressed air, high-pressure
water, or steam, there is danger of personal injury. Always wear protective eyeglasses, dust mask, and other protective
equipment.
NOTICE
When using compressed air for cleaning, blow it keeping some distance to avoid damaging the fins. Damage on the fins can cause
water leakage and overheating. In a dusty job site, check the fins every day, regardless of the maintenance time.
2. Loosen screw (4) and pull up net (2) and (3).

3. After pulling up net (2) and (3), clean them.
(Install them again in step 7.)
4. Check the front and rear surfaces of oil cooler fins (5), radiator
fins (6), aftercooler fins (7), Air conditioner condenser fins (8),
and fuel cooler fins (9). If there is any mud, dirt, or leaves stuck
to the fins, blow the dirt off with compressed air.
Steam or water may be used instead of compressed air.
However, when carrying out powerful steam cleaning
(high-pressure machine wash) of the heat exchange
equipment (radiator, oil cooler, aftercooler, fuel cooler, air
conditioner condenser), maintain sufficient distance from the
machine when carrying out the operation. If steam cleaning
(high-pressure machine wash) is carried out at close range,
there is danger that the internal fins of the heat exchange
equipment may be deformed, and this will cause early clogging
and breakage.
5. Check the rubber hose. Replace with a new one if the hose is
found to have cracks or to be hardened by aging. In addition,
check the hose clamps for looseness.
4 - 64
.
6. Remove undercover (10) and blow the mud, dirt, and leaves
that have been cleaned off to the outside.
7. Push in cleaned net (2) back to the original place and secure
it with screw (4).
8. After set the cleaned net (2), then push in cleaned net (3) back
to the original place and secure it with screw (4).
4 - 65
.
CLEAN AIR CONDITIONER FRESH/RECIRC FILTERS

WARNING
If compressed air scattered around dust and debris, there is danger of injury. Always wear protective equipment such as
protective glasses and mask.
NOTICE
As a guideline, the filters should be cleaned every 500 hours, but on dusty jobsites, clean the filters more frequently.
REMARK
If the filter becomes clogged, the air flow will be reduced, and there will be an abnormal noise from the air conditioner
unit.
Cleaning Recirculated Air Filter

1. Remove wing bolts (1) from the inspection window at the
bottom rear left on the inside of the operator's cab, then take
out the recirculated air filter.
2. Clean the filter with compressed air. If there is oil on the filter,
or if the filter is extremely dirty, wash it in a neutral agent. After
rinsing it in water, dry it thoroughly before using it again.
Replace the filter with a new part every year. If the clogging of
the filter cannot be removed by blowing with air or washing in
water, replace the filter immediately.
The RECIRC filter must be installed facing in the correct
direction. Install it so that the projecting part faces the front
of the machine.
4 - 66
.
Cleaning Fresh Air Filter

1. Use the starting switch key to open cover (2) at the rear left of
the operator's cab, then open cover (2) by hand and remove
filter (3) inside the cover.
2. Clean the filter with compressed air. If there is oil on the filter,
or if the filter is extremely dirty, wash it in a neutral agent. After
rinsing it in water, dry it thoroughly before using it again.
Replace the filter with a new part every year. If the clogging of
the filter cannot be removed by blowing with air or washing in
water, replace the filter immediately.
3. After cleaning, return filter (3) to its original position and close
the cover. Use the starting switch key to lock the cover. Do not
forget to remove the starting switch key.
REMARK
The FRESH filter must be installed facing in the correct direction.
When installing, insert the long (L) end of filter (3) into the filter case
first. If the short (S) end is installed first, cover (2) will not close.
4 - 67
.
REPLACE BREATHER ELEMENT IN HYDRAULIC TANK

WARNING
1. Open the door at the rear right side of the machine, then
remove the cap of oil filler (F).
2. Replace element (2) inside the cap.
4 - 68
.

Maintenance for every 100, 250 and 500 hours service should be performed at the same time.
CHANGE OIL IN SWING MACHINERY CASE

WARNING
The parts and oil are at high temperature after the engine is stopped, and may cause serious burns. Wait for the temperature to
go down before starting the operation.
Refill capacity: 2.5 liters (0.66 US gal)
1. Swing the upper structure so that drain plug (P) is between the
left and right tracks.
2. Set an oil container under drain valve (P) at the bottom of the
machine.
3. Remove drain plug (P) at the bottom of the machine, drain the
oil, then tighten the drain plug again.
Tightening torque for drain plug: 44.1 to 93.1 Nm (4.5 to 9.5
kgm, 32.5 to 68.7 lbft)
4. Remove dipstick (G), then add the specified amount of oil from
oil filler (F).
5. Wipe off the oil on the dipstick with a cloth.
6. Fully insert dipstick (G) into dipstick pipe, then remove it.
7. The oil level should be between the H and L marks on oil level
gauge (G). If the oil level is below the L mark, add oil through
oil filler port (F).
8. If the oil is above the H mark, drain the excess oil from drain
plug (P), then check the oil level again.
4 - 69
.
CHANGE OIL IN FINAL DRIVE CASE

WARNING
The oil is at high temperature immediately after the machine has been operated. Wait for the oil to cool down before starting
the operation.
If there is still pressure remaining inside the case, the oil or plug may fly out.
Loosen the plug slowly to release the pressure.
Refill capacity (each): 2.1 liters (0.55 US gal)

Prepare a hexagon wrench.
The diagram on the right shows the left final drive case.
1. Set plug (F) at the top, with plug (F) and plug (P) perpendicular
to the ground surface.
2. Set a container under plug (P) to catch the oil.
3. Remove plugs (P), (G) and (F) with hexagonal wench to drain
the oil.
4. Tighten plug (P).
5. Add the replacement amount of oil through the hole of plug (F).
6. After the oil flows out of the hole plug (G), install plugs (G) and
(F).
4 - 70
.
REPLACE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER ELEMENT

WARNING
NOTICE
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the hydraulic oil will deteriorate much faster than during normal bucket
operations. For details, see "MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR HYDRAULIC BREAKER (PAGE 4-21)" when performing
maintenance.
1. Set the machine to posture shown on the right, lower the work
equipment to the ground, then stop the engine.
2. Remove the cover at the top of the hydraulic tank.
3. Remove the cap from oil filler port (F), and release the internal
pressure.
4. Loosen 4 bolts, then remove cover (1). When doing this, the
cover may fly out under the force of spring (2), so hold the
cover down when removing the bolts.
5. After removing spring (2) and valve (3), take out element (4).
6. Clean the removed parts in flushing oil.
7. Install the new element in the place where old element (4) was
installed.
8. Set valve (3) and spring (2) on top of the element.
9. Set cover (1) in position, push it down by hand, and install the
cover with the mounting bolts.
10. Install the oil filler cap, then install the cover at the top of the
hydraulic tank.
11. To bleed the air, start the engine according to "STARTING
ENGINE (PAGE 3-134)" and run the engine at Low idle (MIN)
for 10 minutes.
12. Stop the engine.
REMARK
Operate the machine after halting for more than 5 minutes to eliminate bubbles in the oil inside the tank.
13. Check for oil leakage and wipe off any spilled oil.
4 - 71
.
REPLACE FUEL MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE

WARNING
Immediately after the engine is stopped, all parts are still very hot. Accordingly, wait until they have cooled down before
High pressure is generated inside the engine fuel piping system when the engine is running.
When replacing the filter, wait for at least 30 seconds after stopping the engine to let the internal pressure go down before
Do not bring any open flame close.
NOTICE
Genuine Komatsu fuel filter cartridges use a special filter that has highly efficient filtering ability. When replacing the filter
cartridge, always use a genuine Komatsu part.
The common rail fuel injection system used on this machine consists of more precise parts than the conventional injection
pump and nozzle.
If any part other than a genuine Komatsu filter cartridge is used, dust or dirt may get in and cause problems with the injection
system. Always avoid using substitute parts.
When performing inspection or maintenance of the fuel system, pay more attention than normal to the entry of dirt. If dirt is
stuck to any part, use fuel to wash it off completely.
Prepare a container to catch drain oil.

position (S).
2. Open the pump room door on the right side of the machine.
3. Set the container to catch the fuel under the filter cartridge.
4. Loosen drain valve (3) at the under of the filter cartridge, then
drain all fuel accumulated in filter cartridge.
5. Tighten drain valve (3) after draining fuel.
6. By using a filter wrench, turn filter cartridge (2)
counterclockwise to remove it.
7. Clean the filter head, coat the packing surface of the new filter
cartridge thinly with oil, then install the filter cartridge to the filter
head.
4 - 72
.
NOTICE
Do not fill the new filter cartridge with fuel.
Remove cap (B) and install the filter cartridge.
8. When installing, tighten until the packing surface contacts the seal surface of the filter holder, then tighten it a
turn or more.
If the filter cartridge is tightened too strong, the packing will be damaged and fuel will leak. But if the filter
cartridge is tightened too loose, fuel also will leak from the gap of the packing portion.
So when tightening, observe the correct tightening degree.
10. After completing the replacement of filter cartridge (2), bleed the air.
11. Check that drain valve (3) at the under of the fuel prefilter is tightened securely.
When if fuel leak from the drain hose, tighten the correct amount again.
Bleed the air as follows:

12. Fill the fuel tank with fuel (to the position where the float is at the highest position).
13. Loosen the knob of feed pump (5), pull it out, then pump it in
and out until the movement becomes heavy.
REMARK
It is not necessary to remove the plug at the top of the fuel
prefilter and fuel main filter.
After the engine runs out of fuel, use the same procedure to
operate feed pump (5) and bleed the air.
14. Push in the knob of feed pump (5) and tighten it.
15. After replacing the filter cartridge, start the engine and run it at low idle for 10 minutes.
Check for leakage of oil from the filter seal surface. If any oil is leaking, check the tightening of the filter cartridge.
If there is still oil leakage, repeat Steps 1 to 6 to remove the filter cartridge, and if any damage or embedded
foreign material in the packing surface is found, replace it with a new cartridge and repeat Steps 7 to 15 to install
it.
4 - 73
.
CHECK ALL TIGHTENING POINTS OF ENGINE EXHAUST PIPE CLAMPS

Ask your Komatsu distributor to check the tightening of the clamps between the air cleaner - turbocharger -
aftercooler - engine.
CHECK OIL LEVEL IN PTO GEAR CASE, ADD OIL

WARNING
1. Swing the upper structure to let the PTO gear case come at the
center between the right and left tracks.
2. Stop the engine, and operate the operating portion (g) of the
lock lever to set it to the LOCK position (L).
3. Remove undercover of the pump chamber.
4 - 74
.
4. Remove oil inspection plug (G) and check that the oil is near
the bottom of the plug hole.
5. If the oil level is low, open the pump room door on the right side
of the machine, remove the plug from oil filler (F), and add oil.
Add oil until the oil level is close to the bottom of the hole of oil
inspection plug (G).
6. Install oil inspection plug (G) and the plug of oil filler (F).
Standard specifications machine
Attachment specifications machine
7. Install the undercover of the pump chamber.
4 - 75
.

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500 and 1000 hours service should be performed at the same time.
CLEAN HYDRAULIC TANK STRAINER

WARNING
1. Remove 4 bolts, then remove cover (6) at the top of the

hydraulic tank.
2. Remove 4 bolts, then remove cover (1). When doing this, cover
(1) may fly off because of the force of spring (2), keep the cover
pushed down when removing the bolts.
3. Hold the top of rod (3) and pull up to remove spring (2) and
strainer (4).
4. Remove any dirt stuck to strainer (4), then wash it in flushing
oil. If strainer (4) is damaged, replace it with a new part.
5. When installing, insert strainer (4) into protruding part (5) of the
tank, and assemble.
6. Install cover (1) with bolts.
7. Install the cover (6) at the top of the hydraulic tank.
CHECK ALTERNATOR, STARTING MOTOR

The brushes may be worn or the bearing may have run out of grease, ask your Komatsu distributor for inspection
and repairs.
If the engine is started frequently, have this inspection performed every 1000 hours.
CHECK ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE, ADJUST

Special tools are needed for inspection and maintenance, contact your Komatsu distributor.
4 - 76
.
CHECKING CHARGE PRESSURE OF NITROGEN GAS IN ACCUMULATOR (FOR CONTROL

CIRCUIT)
WARNING
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an explosion, which will lead to
serious injury or death. When handling the accumulator, always observe as following.
The pressure in the hydraulic circuit cannot be completely removed. When removing the hydraulic equipment, do not stand
in the direction that the oil spurts out when performing the operation. In addition, loosen the bolts slowly when performing the
operation.
Do not make holes in it or weld it or gas cut it.
When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released. Ask your Komatsu distributor to have this work performed.
FUNCTION OF ACCUMULATOR
The accumulator stores the pressure in the control circuit. Even
after the engine is stopped, the control circuit can be operated, so
the following actions are possible.
If the control lever is operated in the direction to lower the work
equipment, it is possible for the work equipment to go down
under its own weight.
The pressure in the hydraulic circuit can be released.
The accumulator is installed to the position shown in the figure on

the right.
CHECKING FUNCTION OF ACCUMULATOR
Replace the accumulator every 2 years or every 4000 hours, whichever comes sooner.
Check the nitrogen gas charge pressure as follows.

1. Stop the machine on firm, level ground.
2. Set the work equipment to the maximum reach (arm fully
extended and bucket fully dumped) and hold the work
equipment at a position 1.5 m (4 ft 11 in) above the ground.
NOTICE
Carry out the following procedure to lower the work equipment to the ground within 15 seconds of stopping the engine.
When the engine stops, the pressure in the accumulator gradually goes down, so inspection can only be carried out immediately
after the engine is stopped.
4 - 77
.
3. Keep the work equipment at the maximum reach, turn the

starting switch to OFF position (A), and stop the engine.
4. Turn the starting switch to the ON position (B).
FREE position (F).
6. Operate the work equipment control lever fully to the boom
LOWER position.
REMARK
Check that the area around the machine is safe, then operate the
work equipment control lever to the LOWER position.
7. Check that the work equipment goes down to the ground under
its own weight.
8. This completes the inspection.
NOTICE
If the nitrogen gas charge pressure in the accumulator is low and operations are continued, it will become impossible to release
the remaining pressure inside the hydraulic circuit if a failure occurs on the machine.
In the following cases, the charge pressure of the accumulator has gone down. Contact your Komatsu distributor.
Work equipment does not go down
Stops while going down
4 - 78
.
METHOD OF RELEASING PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
NOTICE
Carry out the following procedure to operate the work equipment control lever fully to the front, rear, left, and right within 15
seconds of stopping the engine.
When the engine stops, the pressure in the accumulator gradually goes down, so the pressure can only be released immediately
after the engine is stopped.
1. Place the work equipment on the ground. Close the crusher

attachment jaws, etc.
2. Stop the engine.
FREE position (F), then operate each work equipment control
lever and attachment control pedal (if equipped) fully to the
front, rear, left, and right to release the pressure in the hydraulic
circuit.
LOCK position (L) to lock the work equipment control levers
and attachment control pedal (if equipped).
4 - 79
.

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500, 1000 and 2000 hours service should be performed at the same time.
CHECK WATER PUMP

Check that there is no play in the pulley, leakage of oil or water, or clogging of the drain hole. If any problem is found,
contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs or replacement.
REPLACE ACCUMULATOR (FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT)

Replace the accumulator every 2 years or every 4000 hours, whichever comes sooner.
WARNING
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so mistaken operation may cause an explosion, which will lead to
serious injury or death. When handling the accumulator, always observe as following.
The pressure in the hydraulic circuit cannot be completely removed. When removing the hydraulic equipment, do not stand
in the direction that the oil spurts out when performing the operation. In addition, loosen the bolts slowly when performing the
operation.
Do not make holes in it or weld it or gas cut it.
When disposing of the accumulator, the gas must be released. Ask your Komatsu distributor to have this work performed.
If operations are continued after the performance of the

accumulator has dropped, it will be impossible to release the
remaining pressure in the hydraulic circuit if there should be a
failure on the machine. Ask your Komatsu distributor to replace the
accumulator.
The accumulator is installed to the position shown in the figure on

the right.
4 - 80
.
CHECK FOR LOOSENESS OF HIGH-PRESSURE PIPING CLAMP, HARDENING OF RUBBER
Check visually and touch by hand to check that there is no hardening of the rubber and no loose bolts of the
mounting clamps (2 places) for the high-pressure piping between the supply pump and the common rail. If there are
any problems, the parts must be replaced. In this case, ask your Komatsu distributor to perform replacement.
CHECK FOR MISSING FUEL SPRAY PREVENTION CAP, HARDENING OF RUBBER
The fuel spray prevention caps (10 places) on the fuel injection piping and both ends of the high-pressure piping act
to prevent the fuel from coming into contact with high-temperature parts of the engine and causing a fire if the fuel
should leak or spray out. Check visually and touch by hand to check that there are no missing caps, loose bolts or
hardening of the rubber. If there are any problems, the parts must be replaced. In this case, ask your Komatsu
distributor to carry out replacement.
4 - 81
.

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500 and 1000 hours service should be performed at the same time.
CHANGE OIL IN HYDRAULIC TANK

WARNING
NOTICE
If the machine is equipped with a hydraulic breaker, the hydraulic oil will deteriorate much faster than during normal bucket
operations. For details, see "MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR HYDRAULIC BREAKER (PAGE 4-21)" when performing
maintenance.
Refill oil amount: 90 liters (23.78 US gal)

Prepare a handle (for the socket wrench).
1. Swing so that the drain plug at the bottom of the hydraulic tank
is in the middle between the left and right tracks.
2. Retract the arm and bucket cylinders, then lower the boom and
put the teeth in contact with the ground.
LOCK position (L), and stop the engine.
4. Remove cover at the top of the hydraulic tank, then remove the
cap of oil filler (F) over the hydraulic tank.
5. Remove cover at the under of the hydraulic tank, then set the
oil container under the drain plug under the machine. Using the
handle, remove drain plug (P) and drain the oil.
Check the O-ring installed to plug (P), and if it is dam-aged,
replace the O-ring. After draining the oil, tighten drain plug (P).
Tightening torque: 58.8-78.4 Nm (6-8 kgm, 43.4-57.9 lbft).
Take care not to get oil on yourself when you remove drain
plug (P).
4 - 82
.
6. Add the replacement amount of oil through oil filler (F). Check that the oil level is between the H and L lines on
the sight gauge.
For details of oil level check, see "Check Oil Level in Hydraulic Tank, Add Oil (PAGE 3-119)".
4 - 83
.

Maintenance for every 100, 250, 500, 1000, 2000 and 4000 hours service should be performed at the same time.
REPLACE HIGH-PRESSURE PIPING CLAMP

Ask your Komatsu distributor to have the engine high-pressure clamps replaced.
REPLACE FUEL SPRAY PREVENTION CAP

Ask your Komatsu distributor to have the fuel spray prevention cap replaced.
4 - 84
.
5-1
.
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Unit PC130-8
Operating weight kg (lb) 12,700 (28,004)

3
Bucket capacity m (cu.yd) 0.50 (0.65)
Name of engine - Komatsu SAA4D95LE-5 diesel engine
Engine rated horsepower kW (HP)/rpm 68.4 (91.7)/2,200
A Overall length mm (ft in) 7,590 (24' 11")
B Overall height mm (ft in) 2,875 (9' 5")
C Overall width mm (ft in) 2,500 (8' 2")
D Track width mm (ft in) 500 (1' 8")
E Cab height mm (ft in) 2,855 (9' 4")
F Tail swing radius mm (ft in) 2,190 (7' 2")
G Length of track mm (ft in) 3,610 (11' 10")
H Tumbler canter distance mm (ft in) 2,880 (9' 5")
Min. ground clearance mm (ft in) 400 (1' 4")
Travel speed (Low/High) km/h (MPH) 2.9/5.5 (1.8/3.4)
Continuous swing speed rpm 11.0
5-2
.
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Working ranges Unit PC130-8
A Max. digging reach mm (ft in) 8,290 (27' 3")

B Max. digging depth mm (ft in) 5,520 (18' 1")
C Max. digging height mm (ft in) 8,650 (28' 5")
D Max. vertical wall digging depth mm (ft in) 4,950 (16' 3")
E Max. dumping height mm (ft in) 6,210 (20' 4")
F Min. dumping height mm (ft in) -
G Max. reach ground level mm (ft in) 8,170 (26' 10")
5-3
.
.
6-1
.
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS - GENERAL INFORMATION ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS - GENERAL INFORMATION

SAFETY FIRST
If attachments or options other than those authorized by Komatsu are installed, this will not only affect the life of the
machine, but will also cause problems with safety.
When installing attachments not listed in this Operation and Maintenance Manual, consult your Komatsu distributor
first.
If you do not contact Komatsu, we cannot accept any responsibility for any accidents or failures.
WARNING
General precautions
Read the instruction manual for the attachment thoroughly, and do not use this attachment unless you are sure that you have
understood the guides completely.
If you lose the instruction manual, always ask the manufacturer or your Komatsu distributor for a new copy.
Depending on the attachment, install the necessary front guard on the machine.
Depending on the attachment, the impact noise may make it difficult for fellow workers to transmit instructions for the
operation. Before starting operation, decide a leader and determine the signals to be used.
Do not carry out swinging operations to the side with a heavy load on the attachment. This is particularly dangerous on slopes.
Comparing with a machine equipped with a bucket, a machine equipped with a breaker has a heavy load at the front of the work
equipment and is unstable. To avoid a hazard of tipping over, do not carry out operations with the attachment swung to the
side.
When an attachment is installed, the swing range and center of gravity of the machine are different, and the machine may move
in an unexpected way. Be sure that you understand the condition of the machine properly.
Before starting operations, set up a fence around the machine to prevent people from entering.
Never operate the machine when there are people near the machine.
To prevent serious accidents caused by misoperation, do not put your foot on the pedal except when operating the pedal.
Precautions for removal and installation operations

When removing or installing the attachments, obey the following precautions and take care to ensure safety during the operation.
Carry out the removal and installation operation on a flat, firm ground surface.
When the operation is carried out by 2 or more workers, determine the signals and follow these during the operation.
When carrying heavy objects (more than 25 kg or 55 lb), use a crane.
When removing heavy parts, always support the part before removing it.
When lifting such as heavy parts with a crane, always pay careful attention to the position of the center of gravity.
It is dangerous to carry out operations with the load kept suspended. Always set the load on a stand, and check that it is safe.
When removing or installing attachments, make sure that it is in a stable condition and will not fall over.
Never go under a load suspended from a crane.
Always stand in a position that is safe even if the load should fall.
NOTICE
Qualifications are required to operate a crane. Never allow the crane to be operated by an unqualified person.
For details of removal and installation operations, contact your Komatsu distributor.
6-2
.
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS - GENERAL INFORMATION
ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION
WARNING
Long work equipment or heavy work equipment cause the machine to have
poor stability, so there is danger of the machine losing its balance and
tipping over when traveling down steep hills or when swinging on slopes.
Never do any of the following. They are extremely dangerous.
Traveling downhill with the work equipment raised
Traveling across slopes
Swinging upper structure on slopes
If heavy-load work equipment is installed, there will be excessive
overrun when swinging (the distance from operating to stop the swing
to the point where the swing stops completely), so there is danger of
mistaking the distance and hitting other objects.
Allow a margin to the stopping point when operating.
In addition, the hydraulic drift (the gradual downward movement
caused by the weight of the work equipment when the work equipment
is stopped in a raised condition) will also increase.
If the correct procedure is not used when installing the boom and arm,
it may lead to serious damage. Please consult your Komatsu
distributor.
When long work equipment is installed, the working range will suddenly
become larger, so there is danger of mistaking the distance and hitting
other objects. Allow an ample margin between the work equipment and
surrounding obstacles when operating.
6-3
.
BUCKET WITH HOOK ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
BUCKET WITH HOOK

HOOK CONDITION
Check that there is no damage to the hook, stopper, or hook mount. If there is any problem, contact your Komatsu
distributor.
Operations with Care

Do not exceed the following loads when carrying out lifting operations.
When standard arm is installed: 700 kg (1544 lb)
When long arm is installed: 500 kg (1103 lb)
It is dangerous if the load sways excessively. Lower the engine
speed and operate the control levers slowly.
The swing speed of this machine is 3 to 4 times the speed of a
mobile crane. Be particularly careful to check that the
surrounding area is safe when operating the swing.
Check that there is no damage to the hook, stopper, and hook
mount. If any problem is found, contact your Komatsu
distributor.
Never travel the machine while lifting a load.
Depending on the operating posture, there is danger that the
wire or pulley may come off from the hook. To avoid these parts
from coming off, pay careful attention to the angle of the hook.
In addition, do not allow any person to come under or in the area
around a raised load.
If the bucket with hook is turned and used for operations, it will
hit the arm during dumping operations, be careful when using it.
If a hook is to be installed, consult your Komatsu distributor.
6-4
.
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT
MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT

LOCATIONS
OVERALL MACHINE VIEW
(1) Stop valve (5) Accumulator (for high pressure)

(2) Selector valve (6) Breaker circuit additional oil filter
(3) Attachment Control pedal (7) Accumulator (for low pressure)
(4) Lock pin
6-5
.
MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
(8) Quick coupler piping (9) Emergency engine shutdown switch
6-6
.
CONTROLS AND GAUGES
(1) Quick coupler main switch (4) Rear light switch

(2) Emergency engine shutdown switch (5) Turbo timer switch
(3) Quick coupler operation switch
Stop Valve
This valve (1) stops the flow of the hydraulic oil.
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows.
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil stops.
When removing or installing attachments, set this valve to LOCK
position.
6-7
.
Selector Valve
This valve (2) selector the flow of the hydraulic oil.
Position (a) : When breaker is used
Position (b) : When general attachment is used (crusher, etc.)
Attachment Control Pedal
WARNING
Do not perform operations with your foot on the pedal. If the pedal is depressed by mistake, the attachment may suddenly move
and cause a serious accident. Lock the pedal with the lock pin when you are not operating the attachment.
This pedal (3) is used to control the attachment.

When the front, center (neutral), and rear of the pedal are
depressed, the movement of the attachment is as follows.
Hydraulic breaker
Front of pedal (A): Actuated
Center of pedal (N): Stopped
Rear of pedal (B): Stopped
Regarding other attachments, hold a meeting with the attachment

maker at the time of installation to confirm the operation of the
pedal and attachment before using it.
6-8
.
Lock Pin
This pin (4) locks the control pedal.
Position (a): Locked
Position (b): Only front of pedal can be operated to full position
(rear is locked)
Position (c): Both front and rear of pedal can be operated to
full position
When not using the attachment, set the lock pin to position (a).
When using the breaker, use the working mode selector switch
on the monitor switch portion to set the working mode to B mode,
and set the lock pin to position (b) when using the pedal.
When using the crusher, use the working mode selector switch
on the monitor switch portion to set the working mode to ATT
mode, and set the lock pin to position (c) when using the pedal.
NOTICE
When using the breaker, if the lock pin is set to position (c) and the pedal is operated in direction (D), it will cause damage or
defective operation of the breaker. To prevent this, when using the breaker, always set the lock pin to position (b).
Before changing the position of the lock pin, stop the engine.
6-9
.
Accumulator (for High Pressure)

(if equipped)
When a breaker is in use, this accumulator (5) serves to assure the
number of breaker hammering by lowering pulsation in the
hydraulic pump discharging pressure. Its another function is to
protect the pump.
Consult each manufacturer of breaker to decide if an accumulator
may well be installed on your machine.
Table for Additional Circuit and Parts Required for Mounting Breaker
( white circlet indicates an item necessary to install)
Accumulator Low-pressure safety valve
Additional filter Attachment circuit Control circuit Main valve Selector valve
Hydraulic 
   
breaker (go/return)
Cracking pressure of low-pressure safety valve
Main valve 24.53 MPa (250 kg/cm2, 3550.0 PSI)
Selector valve 17.17 MPa (175 kg/cm2, 2490.0 PSI)
Breaker Circuit Additional Oil Filter

This filter (6) is used to prevent deterioration of the hydraulic oil
when using the breaker.
The oil flows through this only when the selector valve is at the
breaker position.
NOTICE
Always install an additional filter in the return circuit on machines
equipped with a hydraulic breaker.
Accumulator (for Low Pressure)

(if equipped)
This accumulator (7) is installed to protect an oil cooler, when a
breaker is used.
Consult each manufacturer of breaker to decide if an accumulator
may well be installed in your machine.
6 - 10
.
Quick Coupler
Quick Coupler Switch

To operate the Quick Coupler switches on the LHS console and on the LH PPC lever must be operated together.
Refer to "HYDAULIC QUICK COUPLER PIPING (PAGE 6-23)" for an explanation of these switches operation.
Switch is used to activate the quick coupler system.

(A):Quick coupler deactiveted.
(B):Quick coupler activeted.
Refer to "ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS" section for detailed
explanation.
Emergency Engine Shutdown Switch

An emergency engine shutdown switch is provided in the operator's cab and 2 other spots on the machine's
periphery (3 spots total). If any one of them is pressed, the engine stops. Use this switch only in emergency, and
for normal starting and stopping of the engine, use the engine starting switch.
6 - 11
.
1. Press the nearest emergency engine shutdown switch, and

the engine stops.
2. If the engine remains in a standstill for a while, turn off the

engine starting switch in the operator's cab.
(If any of the lights is lit, the battery can run down.)
3. Remove the cause that necessitated the engine to stop all of
sudden.
4. Reset the emergency engine shutdown switch by turning the

button in the arrow direction (clockwise) until it comes out.
Now the switch is in the emergency stop position again.
5. When starting up the engine again, use the engine starting
switch.
6 - 12
.
Overload Alarm Buzzer

If the load approaches the lifting limit of the machine, a warning is shown on the monitor panel and an audible alarm
sounds. In this case, lower the load to the ground.
CAUTION
For precautions when performing lifting operations, see "Operations with Care (PAGE 6-4)" .
Do not perform any lifting operation with a load heavier than the specified lifting load.
For the specified load at which the alarm buzzer sounds, measure the operation radius (A) and lifting height (B), and convert
the load value according to the following table.
(A) 6.0m 4.5m 3.0m

(B) (20 ft) (15 ft) (10 ft)
4.5m 850
- -
(15 ft) (1874 lb)
3.0m 1000 1200
-
(10 ft) (2205 lb) (2646 lb)
1.5m 1150 1600 2500
(5 ft) (2536 lb) (3528 lb) (5513 lb)
0m 1300 1950 3300
(0 ft) (2867 lb) (4300 lb) (7277 lb)
6 - 13
.
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Hydraulic Circuit Connection

When connecting the attachment, connect the hydraulic circuit as follows.
One Line Attachment

1. Check that the stop valve is at the LOCK position, then remove
the plug.
Be careful not to lose or damage any part that is removed.
2. Connect the piping for the attachment provided by the

attachment maker.
The dimensions on the stopper valve side are as indicated at
right. For those on the attachment side, confer with each
manufacturer of attachment and determine.
(A) Plug
3. After connecting the piping, bleed the air from the circuit.
1) Start the engine, referring to "STARTING ENGINE (PAGE
3-134)", and run it at low idle for the subsequent 10
minutes. Then proceed to the next work.
2) Run the engine at low idle until the air in the attachment
circuit is completely removed, then operate the attachment
pedal repeatedly (approx. 10 times) to bleed the air.
NOTICE
If the attachment maker specifies an air bleeding procedure for the
attachment itself, follow the specified procedure to bleed the air.
3) After completing the bleeding of the air, stop the engine, and wait for at least 5 minutes before starting
operations. This will release the bubbles in the oil inside the tank.
4) Check that there is no oil leakage, and wipe off any oil that has been spilled.
6 - 14
.
ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Attachment Removal
1. Lower the attachment to the ground and stop the engine.
FREE position (F).
control lever (for work equipment and travel) and attachment
control pedal (if equipped) to the full stroke in all directions to
release the internal pressure.
LOCK position (L).
6. Turn the starting switch to OFF position (A) and stop the
engine.
7. Remove cover at the top surface of the hydraulic tank, then

slowly loosen oil filler cap (F) to release the internal pressure.
6 - 15
.
8. After checking that the hydraulic oil temperature has gone

down, set the rotor of the stop valve (installed to the piping for
the outlet port and inlet port on the side face of the arm) to
LOCK position (b).
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to
long direction of arm)
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at
right angles to long direction of arm)
When setting FREE or LOCK position of the stop valve rotor,

remove bolt (2), turn over plate (1), then turn the rotor. After
setting, install plate (1) again with bolt (2).
9. Remove the hoses on the attachment side. Install the plugs to
the 2 outlets.
The plugs are used to prevent the attachment from incorrect
operation caused by mixing in of foreign matter. After the plugs
are correctly installed, store the attachment.
10. Pull out the mounting pins (2 places), remove the attachment,
then install the bucket.
For details of the procedure for installing the bucket, see
"BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION (PAGE
3-173)".
11. After installing the bucket, check the oil level in the hydraulic
tank.
6 - 16
.
Attachment Installation
1. Remove the bucket.
For details of the procedure for removing the bucket, see "BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND INVERSION (PAGE
3-173)".
2. Place the attachment in a horizontal position, then install to the
arm with pin (A) and then pin (B).
FREE position (F).
control lever (for work equipment and travel) and attachment
control pedal (if equipped) to the full stroke in all directions to
release the internal pressure.
LOCK position (L).
7. Turn the starting switch to OFF position (A) and stop the
engine.
6 - 17
.
8. Remove cover at the top surface of the hydraulic tank, then

slowly loosen oil filler cap (F) to release the internal pressure.
9. After checking that the oil temperature is low, remove the covers from the inlet port and outlet port (2 places).
Be careful that no dirt or mud is stuck to the hose mouthpiece.
If the O-ring is damaged, replace it with a new part.
10. Connect the hose at the attachment side.
When doing this, check the direction of flow of the oil and be careful not to make any mistake.
11. Set the rotor of the stop valve installed to the inlet port on the
side face of the arm and the outlet port piping to FREE position
(a).
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to

long direction of arm)
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at
right angles to long direction of arm)
When setting FREE or LOCK position of the stop valve rotor,

remove bolt (2), turn over plate (1), then turn the rotor. After
setting, install plate (1) again with bolt (2).
12. After installing the attachment, check the oil level in the hydraulic tank.
6 - 18
.
ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS
WARNING
If the pedal is operated when the auto-deceleration is being actuated and the engine speed has dropped, the engine speed will
suddenly rise, so be careful when operating.
If you leave your foot resting on the pedal and depress the pedal by mistake, there is danger that the attachment may suddenly
move and cause serious personal injury. If you do not need to operate the pedal, do not rest your foot on the pedal.
When the attachment is not being used, set the lock pin of the pedal to LOCK position to prevent the pedal from being operated.
When changing the oil flow setting for the breaker mode, see "Breaker/Attachment Setting (PAGE 3-46)",
"Changing Breaker Mode Setting (PAGE 3-46)" for details.
When changing the oil flow setting for the attachment mode for the crusher or other attachment, see
"Breaker/Attachment Setting (PAGE 3-46)", "Changing Breaker Mode Setting (PAGE 3-46)" for details.
The method of operating the attachment is as follows.
When Using Breaker
NOTICE
Use the breaker mode for breaker operations. If the ATT mode is used, there is danger that the breaker may break. Note also that
breaker operations are not allowed in the P, E, or L modes.
With the working mode set to B mode, insert the lock pin in
front-only FREE position (b). Press the front of the pedal to
operate the breaker.
6 - 19
.
If the working mode pilot monitor does not display B for the breaker
mode, press working mode selector switch (1) and set to the
breaker mode as follows.
When working mode selector switch (1) is pressed, the screen

switches to the working mode selection screen.
1. Press working mode selector switch (1) or press switches F3

or F4 to select breaker mode B.
2. With breaker mode B highlighted in yellow, do one of the
following to accept the selection.
Keep working mode selector switch (1) pressed.
Press switch F6.
Leave as it is for 5 seconds.
If switch F5 is pressed, the screen will return to the working
mode selection screen without changing the mode to the
breaker mode.
6 - 20
.
Precautions when Using

Check that the stopper valve is in the FREE position.
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to long

direction of arm)
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at right
angles to long direction of arm)
Check that the working mode is B mode.

Check that the selector valve is in the position for using the
breaker.
Check that selector valve locking plate (2) is properly installed at
the position for breaker application.
The state of the B mode
Consult the manufacturer of the breaker to decide if an accumulator for the breaker circuit should be installed on
your machine.
For details of pther precautions when handling the breaker, read and use correctly the instruction manual
provided by the breaker manufacturer.
When breaker is used, the hydraulic oil degrades faster than in normal operation. Shorten the maintenance
interval of the hydraulic oil and filter element.
See "MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR HYDRAULIC BREAKER (PAGE 4-21)".
6 - 21
.
When Using General Attachment Such as Crusher

1. If the pedal is depressed with lock pin (1) set at the full stroke
position (c), the attachment begins to work.
2. After the work is finished, return the lock pin to the LOCK
position (a) to lock the pedal.
Precautions when Using

Check that the stopper valve is in the FREE position.
(a) FREE: Hydraulic oil flows (direction of arrow is parallel to long

direction of arm)
(b) LOCK: Hydraulic oil does not flow (direction of arrow is at right
angles to long direction of arm)
Check that the working mode is ATT mode.

Confirm that the selector valve is set to the position for general
attachments such as the crusher.
Check that selector valve locking plate (2) is properly installed at
the position for general attachment application.
The state of the ATT mode
For other precautions when using the attachment, see the instruction manual provided by the attachment
manufacture.
6 - 22
.
HYDAULIC QUICK COUPLER PIPING

WARNING
Quick coupler operation can be dangerous. There is a risk of death to exposed persons. Follow these instructions strictly.
1. Use only quick couplers which comply with European standard EN474. In particular, it must be possible to
confirm from the operator's position that the locking of the attachment or bucket has been completed.
2. Use only quick couplers which include a pilot operated check valve in the locking cylinder. This is to ensure that
there is no risk of the bucket or attachment coming loose in the case of loss of hydraulic pressure. If in doubt
consult the manufacturer of the quick coupler.
3. Read the instruction manual of the quick coupler carefully and follow the recommendations. If in doubt about the
installation or operation consult your Komatsu dealer.
4. The pressure regulation valve (2) allows the pressure at the quick coupler to be limited according to the quick
coupler manufacturer's recommendation. Check the specification of the quick coupler and ensure that the valve
is set appropriately.
5. Ensure that the quick coupler is installed by a suitably qualified technician. If in doubt contact your Komatsu
dealer.
LOCATIONS
(1) Switch (See following page) (3) Piping (quick coupler lock direction)
(2) Adjustable pressure regulating valve (4) Piping (quick coupler release direction)
6 - 23
.
OPERATION
To release a bucket or attachment

1. If the bucket or attachment has any hydraulic connections to the machine these must be disconnected before
proceeding.
WARNING
Pressure in the system can cause injury. Follow all instructions in ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.
2. Position the attachment on the ground safely where it is to be left. Take care that it will not roll or slide after
release.
3. Operate the quick coupler main switch (1).
NOTICE
The switch has a safety lock mechanism to prevent accidental operation.
Slide the lock towards you then operate the switch. The lamp on the switch
will come on and a warning buzzer will sound. (NB Operation will only take
place if the quick coupler operation switch (2) is also pressed).
A: When depressed at this point the quick coupler deactivated

[NB - LOCK bucket/attachment].
B: When depressed at this point the quick coupler is ready to
be activated [NB - RELEASE bucket/attachment].
4. With the quick coupler main switch (1) in position "B", press
and hold the quick coupler operation switch (2) on the L.H.
lever to activate the quick coupler.
5. Depending on the design of the quick coupler it may be
necessary to operate one of the hydraulic functions of the
machine (bucket, boom, arm or swing) to raise the pressure in
the hydraulic system. If using the swing function activate the
Swing Lock first (See "Swing Lock Switch (PAGE 3-72)" ).
6. The quick coupler will now release the attachment/bucket.
To pick up a new bucket or attachment

1. Position the quick coupler over the new bucket or attachment.
2. Operate the quick coupler main switch (1).
NOTICE
The switch has a safety lock mechanism to prevent accidental operation. Slide the lock towards you then rock the switch. The
lamp on the switch will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.
3. With the quick coupler main switch (1) in position "B", press and hold the quick coupler operation switch (2) on
the L.H. lever to activate the quick coupler.
4. Depending on the design of the quick coupler it may be necessary to operate one of the hydraulic functions of
the machine (bucket, boom, arm or swing) to raise the pressure in the hydraulic system. If using the swing
function activate the Swing Lock first (See "Swing Lock Switch (PAGE 3-72)" ). The quick coupler will move to
the "released" position.
6 - 24
.
5. Position the quick coupler in the mating portion of the bucket or attachment, moving the bucket cylinder, arm and
boom as necessary. Follow the quick coupler manufacturer's instructions.
6. Release the quick coupler operation switch (2). The quick coupler will lock onto the bucket or attachment, if
necessary operate one of the machine control levers to raise the system pressure.
Return the quick coupler main switch (1) to position "A" (OFF). The lamp will go off and the buzzer stop.
WARNING
European safety standards require that it is possible to check the locked position of the quick coupler from the operator's
position. Failure to check could cause the death of exposed persons. Check carefully that the locking of the quick coupler is
complete and secure. Follow the manufacturer's instructions carefully, including the installation of any safety device, if required.
7. If the bucket or attachment needs connection to the hydraulic system of the machine follow all instructions in
"ATTACHMENT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (PAGE 6-15)".
WARNING
Check daily that the hoses and fittings in the quick coupler piping system are in good condition. Pay particular attention to the
hoses and fittings at the arm end as these can be damaged easily. In case of damage or leakage of oil stop work. Loss of oil could
lead to the bucket or attachment falling and killing an exposed person. The damage or leakage must be repaired before continuing
work.
This machine has a system installed to give a warning if there is a failure to maintain pressure in the quick coupler system. If the
buzzer sounds in the cab make sure that the cause is clarified before continuing work. In particular check for leaks in the system.
If in doubt call your Komatsu dealer.
6 - 25
.
LONG TERM STORAGE

If the equipment is not to be used for a long time, do as follows.
Set the stop valve in LOCK condition.
Install a plug to the valve.
Install a plug to the stopvalve.
Set the selector valve to the position for general attachments such as the crusher.
Set the lock pin at LOCK position.
If there is no breaker or general attachment installed, operating the pedal may cause overheating and other
problems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Hydraulic specifications
Oil flow
Lock Pin position Oil flow (liter/min)

(1) Pedal lock -
(2) Full stroke 225
Low pressure safety valve Cranking pressure

When using breaker: 17.17 MPa (175 kg/cm2, 2490.0 PSI)
When using other attachment: 24.53 MPa (250 kg/cm2, 3550.0 PSI)
6 - 26
.
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS ATTACHMENT GUIDE
ATTACHMENT GUIDE
WARNING
Read the instruction manual for the attachment and the sections of this manual related to attachments and options.
When installing any attachment or option, there may be problems with safety, so contact your Komatsu distributor before
installing.
Installing attachments or options without consulting your Komatsu distributor may not only cause problems with safety, but
may also have an adverse effect on the operation of the machine and the life of the equipment.
Any injuries, accidents, or damage resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments or options will not be the responsibility
of Komatsu.
6 - 27
.
ATTACHMENT GUIDE ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
ATTACHMENT COMBINATIONS
WARNING
Depending on the type or combination of work equipment, there is danger that the work equipment may hit the cab or machine
body.
When using unfamiliar work equipment for the first time, check before starting if there is any danger of interference, and operate
with caution.
This is the combination table for attachments to install to the standard arm, short arm, or long arm.
: Can be used
: Can be used only for light duty work
: Cannot be used
NOTICE
When the long arm is equipped, if the bucket is pulled in to the machine body, the arm interferes with the body. Operate the long
arm carefully.
When the boom is fully lowered during oblique digging, the boom interferes with the undercarriage. Operate the boom
carefully.
Categories of use
For general digging: Digging or loading sand, gravel, clay etc.
For light duty digging: Digging or loading dry, uncaked earth and sand, mud etc.
For loading work: Loading dry, loose earth and sand
For digging or loading hard soil or soft rock, it is recommended that the strengthened bucket with high durability
and high wear resistance be employed.
Outside Outside
PC130-8
Tooth Capacity width width
Name mounting m3 (cu.yd) (bucket (side Use
pin SAE/CECE body) cutter) Reinforced arm
mm (in) mm (in) (2.5m)
0.18/0.16 450 570

Narrow bucket Vertical Narrow digging -
(0.24/0.21) (17.7) (22.5)
Vertical 0.29/0.26 600 720
Narrow bucket Narrow digging -
Horizontal (0.38/0.34) (23.6) (28.4)
Vertical 0.38/0.33 700 820
Narrow bucket Narrow digging -
Horizontal (0.50/0.43) (27.6) (32.3)
Vertical 0.50/0.45 859 979
Standard bucket General digging -
Horizontal (0.65/0.59) (33.8) (38.6)
0.45/0.40 833 953
Reinforced bucket Horizontal Heavy-duty digging 
(0.59/0.52) (32.8) (37.5)
Vertical 0.50/0.45 859 979 
Reinforced bucket Heavy-duty digging
Horizontal (0.65/0.59) (33.8) (38.6) (Only horizontal pin)
Vertical 0.60/0.55 1000
Light duty bucket - Loading -
Horizontal (0.78/0.72) (39.4)
6 - 28
.
TRACK SHOES SELECTION

Select the most suitable track shoe to match the operating conditions.
Selection
Check the category from the uses in the table below, then select the shoes from the table below that.
Category of use B and C are the wide shoe, so there are limits on the use. Check the precautions for use,
examine the conditions of use thoroughly, and use the optimum shoes for the situation.
When selecting the shoe width, choose the narrowest shoes possible to bring the machine within the range
where there is no problem regarding the machine flotation and ground contact pressure. If wider shoes than
necessary are used, the load on the shoe will increase, this may cause problems such as bending of the shoe,
cracking of the link, damage of the pin, coming off of the pins, and looseness of the shoe bolts.
Category Use Precautions when using

Rocky ground,
On rough ground with large obstacles such as boulders or fallen trees,
A riverbeds,
normal soil
These shoes cannot be used on rough ground where there are large
Normal soil, soft obstacles such as boulders or fallen trees.
B
ground Travel at high speed (Hi) only on flat ground. If it is impossible to avoid
going over obstacles, travel slowly in low speed (Lo).
In the case of A and B, use only in places where the machine sinks and it
is impossible to travel.
Extremely soft These shoes cannot be used on rough ground where there are large
C
ground (swamp) obstacles such as boulders or fallen trees.
Travel at high speed (Hi) only on flat ground. If it is impossible to avoid
going over obstacles, travel slowly in low speed (Lo).
Paved road
D Be careful when using flat shoes on slopes. They have low gradeability.
surfaces
Paved road To protect the road liner, always follow the precautions in Section ROAD
E
surfaces LINERS(3-179 PAGE).
PC130-8
Specification Category
Standard 500 mm (1 ft 8 in) Triple A
Option 600 mm (1 ft 12 in) Triple B
Option 700 mm (2 ft 4 in) Triple C
Option - -
Option 510 mm (1 ft 8 in) Single A
Option 750 mm (2 ft 6 in) Swamp C
Option 480 mm (1 ft 7 in) Flat D
Option 500 mm (1 ft 8 in) Road liner E
6 - 29
.
SAFETY DEVICE
This machine is provided with the following extra safety device in addition to those originally built in the main body.
Falling Load Protective Device (Falling Load Protective Valve)

This is a device to prevent lifted load from being dropped if hose or joint in each hydraulic cylinder of boom and arm
breaks.
Boom cylinder
Arm cylinder
6 - 30
.
HANDLING OF RUBBER PAD SHOE AND ROAD LINER

Be sure to observe the following instructions, when using a machine equipped with rubber pad shoes or Road Liner.
Working Environment
Use a machine equipped with rubber pad shoes or Road Liner mainly for jobs on the paved roads. If used
otherwise,
breakage or chipping will occur on the rubber and the service life will be considerably reduced.
Particularly the following jobsites must be avoided.
Jobsite strewn with crushed concrete or on sand
Jobsite with protruding edged objects like steel bar, glass and the like
Jobsite on rocky terrain or in a river with many rocks A ride over a concrete road shoulder or above all the tip
of sheet piles driven into the ground must be avoided.
Be careful of machine skidding on the road covered with water, ice, snow or gravel. Pay special attention when
unloading a machine from a truck.
Use a machine equipped with rubber pad shoes or Road Liner in the ambient temperature range of -25°C to 65
°C (-13°F to 149°F) due to the properties of rubber.
Working Conditions
A job using the undercarriage as a fulcrum, side digging job,
digging job on a slope and a job requiring frequent steering, as
shown in the picture, cause an excessive load on the rubber and
there is danger that it may be damaged.
Durability of rubber pad shoes may not be covered with
warranty, if a special work equipment is mounted.
6 - 31
.
Storage and Maintenance

Take care that no oil or grease sticks to the rubber. If it does,
wipe it off immediately.
Install rubber pad shoes and Road Liner corresponding to the
number of the links. If there is any missing pad or liner, the
rubber will be greatly deformed and damaged.
If rubber pad shoes or Road Liner has to be stored for a long
period, keep it indoors to avoid direct sunlight and rain.
Extent of Damage to Rubber

When traveling on a concrete pavement, rubber may stick to the
road surface, leaving a dark track behind.
The rubber is still usable, even if it does not look in good shape with part of the rubber chipped or cuts developed
on the surface, so long as damage has not developed all over the shoe or it does not damage a road surface.
Check Road Liner

If the road liners are in the following condition, they must be repaired or replaced, so contact your Komatsu
distributor for repairs or replacement.
Height of Lug
If lug height "a" is reduced by wear, the drawer pull will drop. If
"a" is less than 5 mm (0.2 in), replace with a new part.
Replace Road Liner

When all the road liners of the machine need to be replaced, ask your Komatsu distributor to replace them.
When replacing only part of the road liner, use the special road liner removal tool. Order the tool from your
6 - 32
.
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS
RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS

Below described are instructions which must be followed without fail when doing the work by using a hydraulic
excavator equipped with an attachment.
NOTICE
Select the optimum model of attachment for a hydraulic excavator on which it is to be mounted.
Depending on machine models of hydraulic excavator, the kind of attachments or the model of specific attachments that can
be mounted will vary. Hence, consult your Komatsu distributor for the selection of optimum attachments.
HYDRAULIC BREAKER
Main Applications
Crushed rock
Demolition work
Road construction
This attachment can be used for a wide range of applications
including demolition of buildings, breaking up road surfaces or
slag, tunnel work, rock crushing and breaking operations in
quarries.
Keep the chisel pushed perpendicularly against the impact surface

when performing breaking operations.
When applying impact, push the chisel against the impact surface
and operate so that the chassis rises approximately 5 cm {2 in} off
the ground. Do not let the machine come further off the ground than
this amount.
6 - 33
.
RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
When applying continuous impact to the same impact surface, if

the chisel does not penetrate or break the surface within 1 minute,
change the point of impact and perform breaking operations closer
to the edge.
The direction of penetration of the chisel and the direction of the

breaker body will gradually move out of line with each other, always
adjust the bucket cylinder to keep them aligned.
Always keep the chisel pressed against the impact surface

properly to prevent by using the impact force when there is no
resistance.
6 - 34
.
Prohibited Works
To ensure that the machine has a long life, and to ensure that operations are performed in safety, do not operate
the machine in any of the following ways.
Do not operate all cylinders to the end of their strokes. Always leave approximately 5 cm {2 in} to spare.
By using the mount to gather in pieces of rock
Operations using the swing force
Moving the chisel while performing impacting operations
Holding the chisel horizontal or pointed up when performing

impacting operations
6 - 35
.
RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
Operations in water
Twisting the chisel when it has penetrated the rock
Pecking operations
Extending the bucket cylinder fully and thrusting to raise the

machine off the ground
Operations using impact at end of hydraulic cylinder stroke
6 - 36
.
Greasing
Supply grease in the correct position.
NOTICE
If the breaker is greased in an improper posture, it is filled with more grease
than necessary. As a result, soil and sand will enter the hydraulic circuit
and can damage the hydraulic components, while the breaker is in use.
Therefore, be sure to grease the breaker, holding it in the right posture.
6 - 37
.
KOMTRAX ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS
KOMTRAX
WARNING
Never disassemble, repair, modify, or move the wireless communication terminal, antenna, or cables. This may cause failure
or fire on the wireless equipment or the machine itself.
An explosion may mistakenly occur if any wireless equipment is used near the blasting jobsite. It may result in serious
personal injury or death. Disconnect the power supply cable of the wireless communication device before starting the work if
you have to operate the machine within 12 m {39 ft 4 in} from the remote-controlled blasting device.
KOMTRAX is a vehicle management system that remotely manages the machines equipped with the KOMTRAX
device by using satellite communication or portable radio communication.
The GPS (Global Positioning System), receiver, and communication system are equipped in the vehicle
management system.
The machine information such as the machine maintenance, maintenance management, operating situation
management, and machine location management is gathered from the inside network of the machine. It can be
useful for you to perform the machine management by yourself. Your Komatsu distributor uses the above machine
information for supply of service to the customers, improvement of our products and service, etc.
The type of information which is sent from the machine may vary depending on the machine. For the radio station
establishment of KOMTRAX, consult your Komatsu distributor.
POWER SUPPLY FOR KOMTRAX

Even when the starting switch is in OFF position, KOMTRAX system consumes a small amount of electric power.
It is recommended to start the engine periodically to charge the battery. See "LONG TERM STORAGE (PAGE
3-198)" when storing the machine for a long term.
If the power supply cable of KOMTRAX system device has to be disconnected, contact your Komatsu distributor.
6 - 38
.
INDEX
INDEX
<A> <F>
AFTER STARTING ENGINE 3-139 FIRE EXTINGUISHER 3-114
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS 3- 89 FUSE 3-112
ASHTRAY 3- 88
ATTACHMENT GUIDE 6- 27 <G>
ATTACHMENT COMBINATIONS 6- 28 GENERAL OPERATION INFORMATION 3-166
HANDLING OF RUBBER PAD SHOE GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO
AND ROAD LINER 6- 31 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 14
TRACK SHOES SELECTION 6- 29 DO NOT GET CAUGHT IN WORK
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS - EQUIPMENT 2- 19
GENERAL INFORMATION 6- 2 FIRE PREVENTION 2- 16
ATTACHMENT INSTALLATION 6- 3 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING
SAFETY FIRST 6- 2 OPERATION 2- 14
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC POWER 3-111 PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO
ATTACHMENTS AND OPTIONS 2- 20
<B> PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO CAB
BATTERY TERMINAL 4- 10 GLASS 2- 20
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE 3-115 PRECAUTIONS RELATED TO
BUCKET REPLACEMENT AND PROTECTIVE STRUCTURES 2- 19
INVERSION 3-173 PRECAUTIONS WHEN GETTING ON
BUCKET WITH HOOK 6- 4 OR OFF MACHINE 2- 17
HOOK CONDITION 6- 4 PRECAUTIONS WHEN RUNNING
PROHIBITED OPERATIONS 6- 4 ENGINE INSIDE BUILDING 2- 21
PREPARATIONS FOR SAFE
<C> OPERATION 2- 14
CAP WITH LOCK 3- 87 PROTECTION AGAINST FALLING,
COLD WEATHER OPERATION 3-195 FLYING, INTRUDING OBJECTS 2- 20
AFTER COLD WEATHER SEASON 3-197 UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION 2- 20
AFTER DAILY WORK COMPLETION 3-197 GREASE PUMP HOLDER 3-113
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
INFORMATION 3-195 <H>
CONTROL LEVERS AND PEDALS 3- 75 HANDLING OIL, FUEL, COOLANT, AND
CONTROLLER 3-113 PERFORMING OIL CLINIC 4- 5
CONTROLS AND GAUGES 3- 3
<I>
<D> INTRODUCTION 1- 4
DEFINED LIFE PARTS 4- 18
DEFINED LIFE PARTS LIST 4- 18 <K>
DETAILED CONTROLS AND GAUGES 3- 5 KOMTRAX 6- 38
DIRECTIONS OF MACHINE 1- 4 POWER SUPPLY FOR KOMTRAX 6- 38
DOOR LOCK 3- 86
<L>
<E> LIFTING MACHINE 3-191
ELECTRIC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 4- 11 LOADING AND UNLOADING WITH
EMERGENCY ESCAPE HAMMER 3- 86 TRAILER 3-182
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER PLATE 1- 5 LOCKING 3-178
ESCAPE FROM MUD 3-170
7-1
.
INDEX
LONG TERM STORAGE 3-198 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 37

AFTER STORAGE 3-199 PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING
BEFORE STORAGE 3-198 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 37
DURING STORAGE 3-198 PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION
STARTING MACHINE AFTER AND MAINTENANCE 2- 41
LONG-TERM STORAGE 3-199 PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 2- 22
<M> OPERATION 2- 26
MACHINE INSPECTION AFTER DAILY PRECAUTIONS FOR JOBSITE 2- 22
WORK 3-177 STARTING ENGINE 2- 24
MACHINE OPERATION 3-152 TOWING 2- 35
MACHINE OPERATIONS AND TRANSPORTATION 2- 34
CONTROLS 3-115 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
MACHINE READY FOR ATTACHMENT 6- 5 (PIN)/MACHINE SERIAL NO. PLATE 1- 5
ATTACHMENT OPERATIONS 6- 19 PRODUCT INFORMATION 1- 5
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT 6- 14 PROHIBITED OPERATIONS 3-163
LOCATIONS 6- 5
LONG TERM STORAGE 6- 26 <R>
SPECIFICATIONS 6- 26 RADIO 3-102
MACHINE VIEW ILLUSTRATIONS 3- 2 READ THIS MANUAL 1- 2
OVERALL MACHINE VIEW 3- 2 RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS 3-171
MAGAZINE BOX 3- 88 RECOMMENDED ATTACHMENT
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 4- 2 OPERATIONS 6- 33
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 4- 22 HYDRAULIC BREAKER 6- 33
CHECK BEFORE STARTING 4- 50 RECOMMENDED FUEL, COOLANT,
EVERY 100 HOURS MAINTENANCE 4- 51 AND LUBRICANT 4- 13
EVERY 1000 HOURS RECOMMENDED BRANDS, RECOMMENDED
MAINTENANCE 4- 69 QUALITY FOR PRODUCTS OTHER
EVERY 2000 HOURS THAN KOMATSU GENUINE OIL 4- 16
MAINTENANCE 4- 76 USE OF FUEL, COOLANT AND
EVERY 250 HOURS MAINTENANCE 4- 53 LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO
EVERY 4000 HOURS AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 4- 14
MAINTENANCE 4- 80 ROAD LINERS 3-179
EVERY 5000 HOURS <S>
MAINTENANCE 4- 82 SAFETY 2- 2
EVERY 8000 HOURS SAFETY INFORMATION 1- 3
MAINTENANCE 4- 84 SAFETY LABELS 2- 5
WHEN REQUIRED 4- 22 LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS 2- 6
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 4- 19 SAFETY LABELS 2- 7
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL FOR SERVICE METER LOCATION 1- 6
HYDRAULIC BREAKER 4- 21 SLOW BLOW FUSE 3-113
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CHART 4- 19 SPECIFICATIONS 5- 2
MONITORING SYSTEM 3- 5 STARTING ENGINE 3-134
STEERING THE MACHINE 3-156
<O> STOPPING THE ENGINE 3-151
OUTLINE OF SERVICE 4- 5 SUN ROOF 3- 79
SWINGING 3-158
<P> SWITCHES 3- 70
PARKING MACHINE 3-176
7-2
.
INDEX
<T>
TIGHTENING TORQUE LIST 4- 17
TIGHTENING TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS 4- 17
TOOL BOX 3-113
TRANSPORTATION 3-181
TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE 3-181
TRAVELING ON SLOPES 3-168
TROUBLES AND ACTIONS 3-200
DISCHARGED BATTERY 3-203
LIGHTWEIGHT TOWING HOLE 3-202
OTHER TROUBLE 3-207
PHENOMENA THAT ARE NOT
FAILURES 3-200
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL 3-200
SEVERE JOB CONDITION 3-202
TOWING THE MACHINE 3-201
<U>
USE OF MACHINE 1- 4
<V>
VISIBILITY FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT 1- 4
<W>
WEAR PARTS 4- 12
WEAR PARTS LIST 4- 12
WINDSHIELD 3- 80
WORK EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND
OPERATIONS 3-159
WORKING MODE 3-161
<Y>
YOUR MACHINE SERIAL NUMBERS AND
DISTRIBUTOR 1- 6
7-3
.
PC130-8 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Form No. TEN00593-07
©
2022 KOMATSU
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan 03-2022

Manual de Mantenimiento Y/o Operacion Komatsu PC130

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Mantenimiento Y/o Operacion Komatsu PC130

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Mantenimiento Y/o Operacion Komatsu PC130

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TEN00593-07

READ THIS MANUAL FOREWORD

READ THIS MANUAL

Always keep this Operation and Maintenance Manual in the

Storage location for the Operation and Maintenance Manual:

FOREWORD SAFETY INFORMATION

This word is used for information that is useful to know.

(A) Front (E) Operator's seat

VISIBILITY FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT

FOREWORD PRODUCT INFORMATION

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)/MACHINE SERIAL NO. PLATE

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER PLATE

PRODUCT INFORMATION FOREWORD

SERVICE METER LOCATION

YOUR MACHINE SERIAL NUMBERS AND DISTRIBUTOR

Engine serial No.

Product identification number (PIN)

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL 3-200

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 2- 14

PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION 2- 22

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE 2- 37

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

(2) Caution before operating (09802-03000)

(3) Caution for leaving operator's seat (09654-03001)

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

(4) Caution for going close to electric cables (09801-03001)

(5) Caution for operating pattern (09822-03000)

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

(6) Caution when opening or closing front window

(7) Caution when stowing front window (09803-03000)

(8) Caution for high-temperature hydraulic oil (09653-03001)

(9) Caution with high-temperature coolant (09668-03001)

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

(10) Caution for handling accumulator and gas spring

(11) Caution for adjusting track tension (09657-03003)

(12) Caution for handling cable (203-00-11181)

(13) Stopping rotation for inspection and maintenance

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

(14) Emergency escape (09844-00050)

(15) Warning against falling (09805-13000)

(16) Keep off swing area (09133-23000)

(17) Beware of work equipment (09134-A1681)

(18) Caution when handling battery (09664-30013)

SAFETY LABELS SAFETY

(19) Prohibited to start by short-circuiting (09842-A0481)

(20) Caution when swinging or traveling in reverse (22B-00-21290)

(21) Caution for blast site (203-00-11440)

(22)Caution for ROPS (09620-J2000)

SAFETY SAFETY LABELS

(23) Caution for handling quick coupler (20J-00-11271)

(24) Overload alarm buzzer (203-00-11221)

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS COMMON TO OPERATION AND

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE STARTING OPERATION

ENSURING SAFE OPERATION

UNDERSTANDING THE MACHINE